Postfjord

Changelog

What changed, release by release. New releases most weeks.

Starter plan, and more room on Solo

There is a new plan between Free and Solo, and Solo got bigger at the same price.

  • Starter, $19 a month or $14 paid yearly. 3 social accounts, 60 posts a month, unlimited automations, 1,000 active DM contacts a month, 2 members, 3,000 emails a month and about 100 AI drafts. MCP and the API are included.
  • Solo now has 2,500 active DM contacts a month and 3 members. It was 1,000 contacts and 2 members. The price stays $39 a month, or $29 paid yearly.
  • Pick it under Account. Starter sits next to the other plans, monthly or yearly.

More in Plans and billing.

Fixes from a code review of two days of work

  • Experts: a request that fits no listed expert by country, kind of business or service is no longer passed to one anyway. A busy day no longer turns businesses away: past the day's line a request is still kept for us, only without the automatic emails. Deleting an account also deletes the requests the person sent, and their profile address is never given to another expert.
  • Videos made on the phone or Mac: a video whose app is closed halfway now goes to our servers within a few minutes, and nobody in the workspace waits half an hour to save the next one. A video with long music is made on our servers from the start, so an iPhone never runs out of memory on it.
  • Threads: a server error when a post goes out never makes Postfjord post it again, since the post may already be live.
  • Phone notifications: a wave of messages in many conversations rings at most twenty times in ten minutes; the rest wait in the inbox. Signing out deletes the phone's notification key even if the app never saw the answer from the server.
  • Website: the store badges on postfjord.com keep clear space around them, and their text follows the page's language. The MCP page names the Starter plan.

Postfjord Experts

Postfjord Experts is a new list of agencies and freelancers who run marketing for other businesses in Postfjord.

  • Want someone to do it for you? Send one request from the page. A person at Postfjord passes it to up to three experts that fit, and they write to you directly.
  • Run marketing for others? Earn the certificate in the Academy, then press Write my profile under Get listed in My Academy. It is free.
  • A badge for your website. Listed experts get a Postfjord Certified Expert badge that links to their profile.

More in Postfjord Experts.

Phone notifications go only where they should, and the app starts calmly on a slow line

  • A lost phone stops at once. Press Sign out on the phone under Where you're signed in and it stops getting notifications right away, also when the app on it is closed. Before, it stopped only the next time the app was opened.
  • Only owners and editors. A conversation assigned to a viewer no longer sends its text to the viewer's phone. The owners and editors get the notification instead.
  • A suspended workspace sends no notifications. Like everything else it would send.
  • No restart on a slow line. The iPhone and Android app no longer starts over by itself when signing in takes a while on a slow connection, and never while you are typing.

Copy the text of a published post, and Threads carousels that wait their turn

  • On a post that is already published, the text boxes could not be marked or copied. Now you can select the text in every box and copy it, on a computer and on a phone. The boxes still cannot be changed.
  • A Threads carousel with several pictures sometimes failed with "The media cannot be found". Threads needs a while before a new carousel is ready, and Postfjord gave up after ten seconds. It now waits longer. If the carousel is still not ready, Postfjord tries again a few minutes later instead of giving up. Nothing is posted twice, because nothing goes out until Threads has the carousel ready.

Menu on the iPhone changes screen without loading the app again

On an iPhone and an iPad the app stopped opening screens: you tapped, and it stayed on Loading until you closed the app. We found one cause in our test phone and fixed it there. Two days of real use will show whether it was the only one.

  • What we found. Every row in Menu loaded the whole app again. Safari keeps the page you left alive in the background with the app's local data still open, and the page that came up was never let in to that data.
  • Menu. A row in Menu now changes screen at once, the way the bar at the bottom always did.
  • Local data. A page that Safari puts aside lets go of its local data at that moment, so the next page gets it. It applies whenever a whole page is loaded, and the app does that too when it takes a new version.
  • The first update after installing. The app from the store carries an older copy of itself, so its first update was still taken the old way and stayed on Loading once. The new version now notices within six seconds that its local data does not open and starts again without it for that run.
  • A net under it. A screen that has not opened after twelve seconds brings up a note with Start the app again and a line of measurements for support. In our test phone that line pointed at the cause.
  • On a phone, the date field under Publish at no longer runs under the Publish now button.

Postfjord is on Google Play

The Android app is now on Google Play. Get it from postfjord.com/download and sign in with the account you already have.

Videos made on your device in the apps

In the iPhone, iPad and Mac apps, a video without video clips is now made on the device itself when you save it.

  • It is ready in seconds instead of waiting for our servers.
  • It looks the same, lands in Media the same way, and Edit design opens it again.
  • A video with clips, a GIF and every video saved in a browser are made on our servers, as before.
  • If the device cannot make it, or you leave the app while it works, our servers make it instead. You get your video either way.

The design editor is light for pictures

  • Light for pictures, dark for video. The design editor opens light when you make a picture, and turns dark when the design becomes a video.
  • Your choice stays. Search for Dark editor or Light editor with Cmd+K to change it. Pictures and video each keep their own choice on this device.

How it works: the design editor.

Postfjord starts light

  • Light from the start. Postfjord opens light on every phone and computer, also when the device is set to dark. Pick Dark or Auto under Appearance on the account page if you want something else. If you picked Dark before, it stays dark.
  • A new line on the sign-in page. It now says what Postfjord is: marketing automation for small businesses.

How it works: light or dark.

Postfjord for iPhone and iPad

Postfjord is in the App Store. Get it at postfjord.com/download.

  • The same Postfjord as on the web, with the same account, posts and designs.
  • New screens arrive by themselves. When we change the app, the change reaches your phone the next time you open it.

A slimmer post screen

The screen where you write a post shows less. Your pictures, a row of account icons, one text box, a time and one send button. Everything that was there before is still there, one press away.

  • Accounts are round icons. Grey is off, colour is on. Tap to switch. A ring around an icon means something on that account must change.
  • One text box. The numbered steps, the headings and the separate box for the AI are gone. The microphone and Bo sit in the corner of the box.
  • Bo has a menu. Press Bo for Write it for me, Rewrite, Shorter, Hashtags, Check post and Check in-feed. Write it for me uses what is in the box, and Bring my text back undoes it.
  • A plus for pictures. The + after your pictures opens Choose media. Design, My designs, Canva and Shopify products are under More there, next to Drive and Dropbox.
  • One send button. It says Schedule when a time is set and Publish now when not. The arrow on it holds the other one and Save draft.
  • Each account's own text opens from its preview card. No more row of tabs. A line under the box tells you when an account needs a look or has its own text.
  • Three dots at the top right hold Make a story, Make a reel, Make it a reel, Advertise, Start from an idea and Delete or Cancel schedule.
  • On a phone the preview opens from Preview under the text. It no longer sits at the bottom of the page.

How it works: the composer.

One account per platform in a workspace

A workspace now has one account on each platform: one Instagram account, one Facebook Page, one LinkedIn account, one Google Business Profile place and one blog of each kind. A post then goes to "Instagram", and there is only one Instagram it can mean.

  • One tick per platform. When Facebook shows several Pages, none is ticked for you: you tick the one that belongs to the workspace. Ticking another one unticks the first.
  • Postfjord asks before it replaces an account. Connecting another account on a platform the workspace already uses asks Replace the old account with the new one? A yes disconnects the old account and connects the new one. A no changes nothing.
  • Scheduled posts stay where they are. Posts already scheduled to the replaced account stay in the calendar and fail when their time comes, so open each one and pick the new account, or cancel it.
  • A Reconnect works as before. Connecting the account the workspace already has replaces nothing.
  • The rule holds for WhatsApp numbers, WordPress, Ghost, Wix and Shopify blogs too. A second brand or a second studio gets a workspace of its own.

Nobody has two accounts on one platform in a workspace today, so nothing changes for the accounts you have connected. Read more in Channels.

New post starts with the picture

New post no longer opens a form. It asks one thing: what will the post be?

  • Pictures, Video or Text only. Pictures and Video open your phone's photo library at once, or the file picker on a computer. Pick up to 20 pictures, or one video.
  • Straight into the editor. Your pictures open in the design editor, one page for each. A video opens in the video editor as a clip.
  • Next. The button at the top right of the editor says Next and takes you to the text, the accounts and the time. Press it right away and your pictures or your video go into the post as they are. The small arrow beside it still opens the Share menu.
  • Pick from Postfjord opens your media library, for something you already have.
  • From the calendar. Press + next to a day, pick the same way, and the post gets that day.
  • Share to apps is under the arrow on the send button on a phone. It hands the post's pictures to Instagram, TikTok or another app on your phone.

Opening a post you already have works as before, and so does every link that opens a new post with something in it.

How it works: the composer.

Postfjord for Mac

Postfjord is now a Mac app. Download it at postfjord.com/download.

  • Its own window and Dock icon. The same Postfjord as in the browser, out of your tabs, and you stay signed in.
  • A menu bar with shortcuts. Command N starts a new post, and Command 1 to 6 open Home, Calendar, Design, Inbox, Media and Analytics.
  • Exports land in a folder. A design or a video you export is saved straight to Downloads, or to a folder you pick under File.
  • It runs on macOS 13 or later, on Apple and Intel Macs. The file is signed by Postfjord and checked by Apple.
  • The download page is back, with the browser and the Mac app. The iPhone and Android apps get their place there when they are in the App Store and Google Play.

How it works: the Mac app.

Calmer questions and a clearer New design

The small boxes that ask you something look like the rest of Postfjord now.

  • The question is the heading. "Throw away this draft?" stands at the top, with one line under it that says what happens.
  • Short answers. The button says Throw away or Delete. It no longer repeats the whole question.
  • No warning sign and no grey strip. The two answers sit at the bottom right of the same box: a quiet Cancel and one filled button.
  • No ring around a button you did not reach with the keyboard. Open a box with the mouse or a tap and nothing is outlined. Press Tab and the ring shows where you are, as before.
  • New design shows the shapes. Video, Post and Story stand side by side, each in its real proportion, and a tap on one starts it. All sizes is a link under them and opens the full list in the same box.

The other boxes in the app got the same calm look: no coloured square behind the icon at the top and no grey strip behind the buttons.

How it works: the design tool.

Where Postfjord is featured, in the footer of the site

Under the social icons at the bottom of every page on postfjord.com there is a small box that says Featured on. It shows one software directory at a time, with its logo, two seconds each. Press it to open Postfjord's page there.

  • It shows only directories where Postfjord's page is open for anyone to read. Today that is G2, DevHunt, Crunchbase, SaaSHub, CodeHype, PeerPush, OpenHunts, Built by Indies, Glama and mcptry.
  • The box and the logos are served by the site itself. Nothing loads from the directories.
  • If your device is set to show less motion, you see the names as a plain line of links.

Templates for the spring holidays

The design editor has templates for seven more holidays: Valentine's Day, Women's Day, Ramadan, Eid, Easter, Mother's Day and Father's Day.

  • Each holiday comes as a set with its own colors and fonts: posts in several sizes, a carousel, stories and a reel cover.
  • The sets are made for a kind of business. Valentine's Day and Easter have one for shops and one for food. Ramadan is for restaurants and cafes, Eid for shops, Mother's Day for salons, and Father's Day for shops and barbers. Women's Day is for everyone.
  • They follow the same rule as the other holiday templates. They come first on All when the day is near, and sit at the end of the feed the rest of the year, where a search still finds them.
  • The sample text is in English and Swedish. The other languages show the English until you write your own.

The download page waits for the app stores

The page at postfjord.com/download and the Download the app link at the bottom of the site are hidden for now.

  • The page offered an Android beta that installs from a file, outside Google Play, and said the iPhone app was on its way. It comes back when the app is in the App Store and Google Play.
  • Nothing changes in Postfjord itself. It runs in any browser, installs on a Mac or PC from Chrome or Edge, and you can add it to the home screen of your phone.
  • If you already have the Android beta, it keeps working and keeps getting new versions.

Playful templates for creators

Creators have six new sets of templates in the design editor, made to look less alike than the ones before.

  • Each set mixes three typefaces and three colors on one page: a heavy heading, a plain or typewriter body, and a handwritten word.
  • Photos are cut into shapes such as a heart, an arch, a blob or a hexagon, with the same shape in color behind them. Stickers, pills and tilted cards carry the small words.
  • The sample text is for what creators post: a new video, a drop, a collab, a Q and A, a newsletter, a rate card, a milestone and a look behind the scenes.
  • The three reel covers keep their words inside the square your profile grid shows.
  • The sample text is in English and Swedish. The other languages show the English until you write your own.

Connect knows which browser started it

When you press Connect, Postfjord now notes which browser you pressed it in. On the way back from the platform it can tell whether the same browser finished.

  • Nothing changes for you today. The check is switched on later, once we have seen that it works on every phone and computer.
  • When it is switched on, a Connect that is finished in another browser than the one that started it connects nothing. You then read "This connection was started in another browser or on another device, so nothing was connected" and press Try again.
  • It covers channels, ad accounts, Canva, Calendly and Shopify. When it is switched on, the Android beta app asks you to connect accounts in your phone's browser. The account then shows up in the app too.

The reason: a link to a platform's sign-in page could be sent to someone else, and their account would wait in the sender's name. Finishing the trick took more steps, but now the first step stops at our door.

A simpler Create menu

The menu has fewer lines, and each one says what it opens.

  • Create now holds Editor, Templates, Media, Emails and Pages. Editor opens a new design. Templates is the page with the ready-made designs and your saved ones. AI video sits under Editor.
  • Posts moved into the calendar. Two small words at the top of the Calendar, Calendar and Posts, switch between the two.
  • Ideas is no longer a menu line. The microphone next to New post opens it, and one more press on the microphone there starts the recording. You can also show Ideas on the Home screen under Customize, or find it with search.
  • On the Pages screen the big button no longer says New email.

Export and Ready to share for videos

The video editor now ends the way Instagram Edits does.

  • The button at the top right is Export on a computer and Next on a phone. One press makes the MP4.
  • Ready to share opens when the video is ready: the video, then New post, Download, Play and Done. The video is already in Media.
  • The other ways to share (Email, Ad, Copy and more) are behind the small arrow beside the button.
  • Pictures keep the Share button as before.

A calmer Home

The home screen now opens with less on it.

  • Three plain numbers at the top: scheduled, unread and failed. They have no box around them, and each opens its list.
  • Under them, Needs attention and Coming up.
  • The other widgets are still there. Press Customize and pick them from the Hidden row.
  • Bo no longer sits next to the greeting.
  • A layout you saved earlier stays as it was. Reset to default brings you to the calm one.

Transitions like Instagram Edits, 29 new ones

The Transitions panel in Design now works like the one in Instagram Edits.

  • Each transition is a small tile that plays itself over and over, so you see what it does before you pick it. None comes first, and your pick has a ring around it.
  • A search box at the top, and the tabs Saved, Recent and All. Tap the bookmark on your pick to keep it under Saved.
  • New transitions: Fade, Zoom in, Zoom out, Reveal, Flicker, Blink, Pan, Quick pan, Blur, Shake, Zoom shake, Exposure, Flare, Light wipe, Clock wipe, Circle out, Oval in, Oval out, Spin, Slide bounce, Zoom bounce, In and out, Pan around, Scanner vertical, Scanner horizontal, Checkerboard, Slideshow, Horizontal stretch and Vertical stretch.
  • Slide, Wipe and Pan have one tile for each direction.
  • The saved video shows each transition the way the editor does. Videos you made before look the same as they did.

More in Design.

Sound effects for your videos

The Music panel in Design has a new tab, Sound FX, between Music and Voice.

  • 166 sounds in 14 kinds, from Transitions and Comedy to Game, Nature and Holidays, plus a For you list to start from.
  • Search them, tap one to hear it in the small player, and press the plus to put it where the playhead is.
  • Each sound gets a small block on its own row under the music. Drag it to move it, and click or tap it to set its volume, play from there or remove it.
  • The preview plays the sounds with your video, and the saved video has them mixed in.
  • Press the bookmark on a sound to keep it under Saved. Recent holds the ones you added last.

The sounds come from Freesound and are free to use under CC0. More in Design.

Many small fixes across Postfjord

We fixed the smaller things from the last code review. The ones you may notice:

  • Inbox: Try again after a lost connection never sends the same message twice.
  • Publish now: if it fails, a scheduled post gets its time back, so it still goes out as planned.
  • Instagram: carousels of videos go on where they stopped and no longer start over. Errors from Instagram are now plain sentences. If the first comment could not be posted, the post says so.
  • Scheduling to a channel that needs Reconnect is stopped right away with a clear line, through the API, MCP and Bo too.
  • Mentions: quiet sources are checked less often, and X keywords start at once after you connect X or edit a word.
  • AI video and Clean sound never charge twice, and give the money back when a clip does not arrive.
  • Email: a late complaint or bounce lands on the right email of an automation, and birthday emails are never skipped on a busy night.
  • Team: the Paused box no longer jumps back after you change it.
  • Pages can now name up to 1,200 pictures.

On a phone, a video's tools are the ones a video needs

Editing a video on a phone now starts from the things a video is made of.

  • The row at the bottom is Clip, Music, Text, Voice, Captions, Animate and Add.
  • Blanks, Shuffle, Colors, Sizes and Layers moved into Add.
  • The timeline shows your clips and music first, right under the time, and the layers below them. The clips and the buttons between them stay in view however many layers your video has.

More in Design.

On a phone, your video stays where it is

Editing a video on a phone is calmer now.

  • The video always shows whole, as big as it fits. Two fingers no longer zoom it or slide it out of view.
  • A finger that slides over a text or photo that is not picked leaves it where it is. Tap it first, then drag it. The rows on the timeline already worked this way.
  • Drawing still lets you zoom in with two fingers, and the whole video comes back when you are done.

More in Design.

On a phone, swipe the timeline to move through your video

The timeline on a phone now works like the video apps you know.

  • The playhead stands still in the middle. Swipe the timeline sideways and the video shows the moment under the playhead.
  • A swipe sideways only moves the timeline sideways. The rows no longer slide up and down with it.
  • While the video plays, the timeline moves along under the playhead.
  • A layer's ends drag once you tap the layer, so a swipe that starts on a short layer moves through the film.

More in Design.

A new Music panel, with Instagram songs for your Reels

The Music panel in Design now works like the video apps you know.

  • One search box at the top, and the tabs Saved, Recent, Trending, Original audio and Your audio.
  • Tap a song to hear it in a small player at the bottom, and press the plus to put it in your video.
  • Trending and Original audio are songs from Instagram. Instagram adds the song when it posts the Reel, and the editor plays a sample with your video so you hear roughly how it sounds.
  • A post made from the video gets the song on its Instagram Reel, ready to change or remove.
  • Press the bookmark on a song to keep it under Saved.

More in Design.

Select and delete many files in Media

You can now delete several files in Media in one go.

  • Open ... next to the filter and pick Select. Press the files you want, or Select all, then Delete. Postfjord lists what will go and says it can't be undone before it deletes anything.
  • A file that a scheduled post, an email or a live page still uses is kept, and the message says which and why. The rest are deleted.
  • Your main logo is never picked.
  • It works under Uploads, Designs and Logos, inside folders, and on a phone. On a computer, Cmd or Ctrl and a click on a file also starts Select.

Folders in Media

Keep the files for one video together.

  • Press ... next to the tabs in Media and choose New folder. Type its name at the top.
  • Drag a file onto a folder, or pick a folder under Folder when a file is open.
  • A file in a folder stays in its tab, so it shows up in posts and in the editor as before.
  • Files you upload while a folder is open go into it.
  • The design editor's Clip panel can show only the videos in one folder.

More in Media.

Look through a video by moving the mouse, and filter Media

Finding the right clip is quicker now.

  • Move the mouse across a video in Media or in the design editor's Clip panel to look through it, from start to end.
  • Filter next to the tabs in Media shows only Videos, Pictures or Sound.

More in Media.

More transitions and clip effects, like Instagram Edits

The Transitions panel and a clip's Effects panel have more of what Instagram Edits has.

  • Four new transitions: Cube turns the page away like the side of a box, Pixel breaks it into squares, Datamosh smears it like a broken file, and Morph melts it softly into the next page. Each has a tile that plays it over and over.
  • Six new looks under Styles: Glitch, Color echo, Prism, Chroma blur, Color shutter and Film grain.
  • Thirteen new layouts under Styles that show the picture more than once: Kaleidoscope, Clones, Grid, Grid collage, Mirror frames, Slice, Grid expand, Grid zoom, Stack, Stack collapse, Infinite scale, Infinite rotate and Popups.
  • Glitch in and Glitch out under In and out.
  • A clip plays at most four copies of its video, so the editor stays smooth on a phone.
  • The saved video looks the same as the editor.

More in Design.

The Clip panel is cards, with Opacity and sound fades

The Clip panel shows every setting for a video in one list, so you no longer switch tabs to find the sound.

  • One card for each kind of setting: Trim, Move and size, Sound, Speed, Opacity and More. The tool you press opens its card, and folded cards show what is set, like 1.0x or 100%.
  • Opacity makes the video see-through, in the editor and in the saved video.
  • Fade in and Fade out under Sound let the clip's sound rise at the start of the page and fall at the end.
  • A video in a box has X, Y and Rotate as numbers under Move and size, next to the handles on the page.
  • The same cards are in the Clip sheet on a phone.

More in Design.

Effects for video clips, like Instagram Edits

A video clip has an Effects panel, like the one in Instagram Edits.

  • Pick the clip and press Effects on its bar, or open the Effects card in the Clip panel.
  • Search, Saved, Recent, and the tabs For you, Styles, Outlines, Motion and In and out. Each tile plays its effect over and over on a small picture, and None comes first.
  • Motion has 27 moves: zooms, pans, drifts, shakes, handheld, sway, roll, tilt, spin, flips and swipe up.
  • In and out has 14 ways to start or end the clip: fades, blur, black and white, open, circle, soft mask, bounce, spin, blackout and shutter.
  • Outlines has Film matte, White frame and Blur frame. Styles has 22 light and color effects plus the 21 photo filters as video looks.
  • A tap puts the effect on the clip and plays the page once. A clip can have one of each kind.
  • The saved video looks the same as the editor. Split, Go on in a new page and Replace keep the effects.

More in Design.

A cleaner top in Choose media, and smoother video previews

Two small fixes in Media.

  • Choose media now opens with one wide Upload box and a More button. Google Drive, Google Photos, Dropbox, free photos, your designs and Create image are inside More. Nothing was removed.
  • Moving your mouse over a video in Media follows your mouse all the way, also for long videos shot on a phone. Before, the picture could freeze until you stopped moving.

Captions with 30 styles, two languages and a swear word filter

The Captions panel works like captions in Instagram Edits.

  • Three rows at the top: Generate from (the clip on the page or a voice from the Voice tab), Spoken language (Auto-detect or the language people speak) and Bilingual captions.
  • About 30 styles in a grid. Each tile shows "Pick a style" in its look, with outlines, shadows, boxes behind a line or behind the word being said, italic, lower case and new fonts. Bookmark a style to find it under Saved, and see your last picks under Recent.
  • Bilingual captions puts a translation under each caption in a smaller size, in English, Swedish, German, French, Spanish or Portuguese.
  • Censor profanity under Settings shows swear words with asterisks in the video and the .srt file, and keeps your words as they are.
  • Generate captions sits at the bottom. Words you fixed stay when you press it again.
  • Edit words, place, colors, size, Hide, the captions file and Save as .srt are still there, under Edit words and Settings.

More in Design.

Every layer of your video has its own row

The video timeline now shows every text, photo and shape of the whole film as a bar with its name, above the clips. Texts are purple, photos blue, shapes yellow and the music pink. Two layers that never show at the same time share a row, so the timeline stays short.

  • Click a bar to pick that layer, also on another page. Drag it, or drag its ends to change when it comes and goes.
  • Drag the top edge of the timeline to give the rows more room, or the video more. On a phone there is a small handle for it. Double click the edge to reset it.
  • One row over the timeline has play, the time, Split, Delete, Duplicate page, the timeline's settings and its zoom. Replace clips, Clip and In turn moved into the settings.
  • On a phone the rows always show, the timeline starts zoomed in so the names can be read, and two fingers zoom it.

More in Design.

Fixes for posting, email and sales

We went through Postfjord again tonight and fixed these things:

  • Instagram and Threads never post the same thing twice when you press Retry.
  • Reels that Instagram says are not ready yet try again by themselves.
  • Posts without a time now show in the queue, so you can find them and give them one.
  • Other tabs keep working after you press Update in one of them.
  • Brand settings no longer undo the changes Bo made to your brand.
  • Mailchimp sync now goes past 1,000 contacts.
  • Email campaigns that missed their time while sending was closed come back as drafts. They no longer go out late.
  • AI tools that hit a short error now say to try again, and no longer say your AI budget is spent.
  • Reviews that a customer edits now show the new text in Postfjord.
  • Shipping now works to every country Stripe accepts.
  • Signup forms on your own domain now send a Lead event, the same as forms on a Postfjord page.

New design, one tap from Design and Media

On Design and Media, the main button at the top now says New design. It opens a short list: Video, Post, Story and All sizes. You no longer have to pick a template first.

Video opens the editor on your clips, on a phone as well as on a computer, so one more tap puts the first clip in the film.

More in Design.

One more optional question on your first workspace

When you make your first workspace, the last step now asks where you first heard about Postfjord. You can leave it empty. Your answers on that screen help us see who signs up and what they need, so we build the right things next.

On a phone, the choices on each step now sit one under the other, so they are easier to tap.

What we keep and why: Privacy Policy.

The design editor is dark

The design editor now opens dark, like most video editors. Your design is the brightest thing on the screen, so its colors are easier to judge.

Want it light? Search for Light editor with Cmd+K, or in a video pick ... at the top and then Light editor. The choice stays on that device, and the rest of the app keeps its own look.

More in Design.

Advertise is open to everyone

Every workspace can now turn a published Facebook or Instagram post, or a design, into a Meta ad. Press Advertise on the post. In Design, press Share, then Advertise on Meta.

An owner connects the Meta ad account once under Channels. Meta charges that account, and Postfjord takes no share. How it works: Advertise a post.

Three templates read better

  • Shorter headlines: the garden story and the toy drive post now fit when you open them as a story.
  • Clearer cover: the podcast tips carousel has a darker cover photo, so the white headline is easier to read.

A lighter share card, words on our pictures and calmer courses

  • Share card: a link to postfjord.com now shows a light card with a real picture of the app.
  • Pictures in Google: templates, blog covers and the pictures on the start page now say what they show, so search engines can read them.
  • Academy: the course list and the course pages no longer have pictures at the top, so the words come first.

The press page says what Postfjord is today

postfjord.com/press has a new text to copy and new facts: Social, Chat, Mail and the design editor, the prices, the company and more about the founders. The list of channels and the prices now come from the app, so a channel shows up there when it opens to everyone.

New to download: photos of the founders in full size, pictures of the app, one by one or as one file, and Bo and the main gradient in the brand kit. The top of the page shows the logo.

A move icon for every layer on your phone

  • Move icon: when you pick something in a design on your phone, a small icon with four arrows shows beside the turn handle. Drag it to move what you picked.

Real pictures of the app on the help pages

The help pages now show real screens of the app, so you can see where a button is before you go looking for it. The drawn films at the top of seven help pages are now real pictures too.

Change the words in your brand report

You can now change the text in a brand report yourself. Press any text Bo wrote, and it opens so you can type. It saves when you press outside the box.

  • Rows: in a list, hold the mouse over a row, or press it on a phone, to see the cross that removes it. Add at the end of a list gives you a new row.
  • Write again: it asks first if you have changed that part, since a new version replaces your edits.
  • Use it in Postfjord: it uses your words. If you already used the report, press it again to send over what you changed.
  • Two people at once: if someone else changed the same text while you were typing, your words stay in the box and Postfjord tells you, so nobody's text gets overwritten without warning.

Five new Academy courses about Design

The Academy has a new Design group, with five free courses: Design essentials, Graphic design basics, Edit video in Design, Presentations people follow and AI tools in Design. Design posts that stop the scroll moved into the same group. Each lesson has a button that opens Design.

Real photos on the blog, and every course at a glance

  • Blog: every post now has a real photo on its card, on its page and when you share the link.
  • Academy: the top of the page now shows all 12 courses in four steps, Start, Make, Grow and Run, with the minutes for each. Click a course to open it.

A brighter Academy

The Academy has a new look. The top is in color, with a search box and buttons for each area, so you find a course in a few seconds. The courses sit on shelves for Start, Make, Grow, Run and Design, each card with a real picture of the part of Postfjord it teaches. A course page shows its color at the top, the lessons as numbered rows and the facts beside them.

Lessons you can try, not only read

Graphic design basics in the Academy is the first course with the new lessons. Each one starts with a quick question from the lesson before and shows how far you are in the course. The text is shorter, with real pictures of Postfjord and a short film of Your brand going onto a design.

Four lessons have a small tool to try right on the page: decide if eight color pairs are easy to read, blur a post to see what stands out, judge font pairs with your own headline, and line up three lines of text. Every lesson ends with a button that opens a practice post in Design.

Badges on My Academy, and confetti for a diploma

My Academy now shows seven badges, from First step to Every course, with a Designer badge for the Design courses. A badge you have not earned yet is grey and shows how far along you are. When you get a diploma, a little confetti celebrates it, and a new Share on LinkedIn button puts your diploma in your LinkedIn feed.

Every Academy course in the new lesson style

All 17 Academy courses now use the lessons from Graphic design basics: a quick question from the lesson before, shorter text, and real pictures of Postfjord where they help. The drawn films in a few lessons are gone. Two more lessons got a tool to try: the contrast check in Build your brand and Design posts that stop the scroll, and the squint test in Design posts that stop the scroll. The quick questions at the end are the same as before, so your progress and diplomas still count.

Find a template by what stands out, and a faster app

  • What stands out: under Filter in Design you can now pick Photo, Words or Space, on a computer and on a phone. What you pick shows as a small word under the row.
  • Fewer look-alikes at the top: a template that looks almost the same as another now comes later in the list. Search and filters still find it.
  • A faster start: the app no longer loads the templates until you open Design or an email. The calendar, the inbox and the post editor open with about half as much to download.
  • New templates: new stories, posts, carousels and emails with new page layouts, a wavy two color family, a calm magazine family and rich holiday stories, for Black Friday, Diwali, Christmas and more. Holiday ones show first near their day.

A voice for your film, cleaner sound, and captions from a file

Four changes to sound and words in video designs.

  • A voice for your film: open Music, press the Voice tab, write the words and press Make voice. Five voices to pick from. It lands where the playhead stands and plays right away. Show the words on the film turns the same words into captions at no extra cost. On the paid plans, on your AI allowance.
  • Clean up sound: pick a clip, press More and turn on Clean up sound. Less background noise and an even volume, in the editor and in the saved video.
  • Captions from a file: in the Captions panel, press Add a captions file and pick an .srt or .vtt file. The captions land at their times, and you fix them like any others. Save as .srt gives you a file back.
  • Captions in one press: the Captions button now writes the words at once, in big white letters with the word being said in yellow. Add captions is also the first line of the Moving tab in the Text panel when the page has a video.

A real filmstrip, a bigger video and a calmer screen

The video editor got easier to look at, on a computer and on a phone.

  • Filmstrip: each page in the timeline now shows the pictures of its own clip over its whole length, at its trim and speed. A page with no clip shows its own picture.
  • A new video starts at your clips: on a computer, Reel opens with your videos on the left, so the first clip is one tap away. Templates is still one press away.
  • Plus at the end: the plus at the end of the timeline now opens your clips, and the one you pick goes last in the film. Add a page after is still in a page's ... menu.
  • Bigger video: on a computer a video with text and music on it is about 40 percent taller, and adding more no longer makes it smaller. Layers and music fold to thin lines under the film. Press a line to pick that layer, or press the music to open its panel. The small arrow next to the line shows all the rows, with In turn.
  • App buttons cover this: in a video these bands now show only while you move something.
  • One menu at the top: in a video, Colors, Shuffle, Sizes, Version history, Comments and Save as template are in the ... menu at the top. On a phone, Pages, Version history and Comments are in it. A picture design looks as before.
  • Zoom menu: in a video, press the percent to zoom. Cover and Back to pictures are in that menu too, and Cmd+K finds them.
  • Lock page: in a video, Lock page moved from above the page to a page's ... menu in the timeline. Duplicate and Add a page after are there too.

Tools that follow what you pick, and clip slots in video templates

Two changes to video designs.

  • Tools follow what you pick: click a video on the page or its card in the timeline, and the bar over the page shows Trim, Split, Speed, Autotrim, Highlights, Move and size, Captions and More. Click a text and the bar shows the text tools. A click on the video when it stands still picks what is under the pointer, and the card in the timeline lights up. On a phone, a tap does the same and the bar at the bottom shows those tools.
  • What moved: Captions left the row at the top of the timeline and is now in the clip's tools. On a phone, Captions and Cover left the first bar and are in the tools you get when you tap a clip or a tile. Clip now picks the page's clip, and only opens the list on a page with no clip. Speed left the More button and got its own tab in the Clip panel, which shows one tab at a time. A click on the frame no longer jumps back to the start of the page.
  • Search: Cmd+K finds these tools by words like split, cut, speed, slow motion, fast, trim and stock video.
  • Sizes: the size list now says where a size goes: TikTok, Instagram Reels, Shorts and Stories for 9:16.
  • Clip slots: a video template with photos now shows a numbered row of slots with each scene's length. Pick or drop a clip on a slot, and it gets cut to that length. Pick another part with the trim strip. Replace all fills the slots in order from several clips. On a phone, tap a slot and pick a clip.

Look through the templates before you sign up

You can now look through our templates on postfjord.com/templates, without an account. Search by a word, or open a page for what you need, like Instagram carousels, TikTok videos, YouTube thumbnails, cafe menus, salon price lists or Black Friday.

Press a template and a small box asks you to sign up. When your account is ready, the editor opens on that template. Are you signed in already? It opens straight away.

There is also a new page about the video editor, with what it can do today.

Split a clip, change its speed, and add clips last

Four changes to clips in a video design.

  • Split: move the playhead and press Cmd+B or Ctrl+B, or press Split at the playhead in the ... menu on a page. On a phone it is under Length. It works on the page under the playhead, whatever you have picked. Undo makes it one page again.
  • Speed: press More in the Clip panel and pick a speed from 0.25x to 4x, or a speed curve. The page's length follows, and a mark on the page shows the speed. The sound follows an even speed. A curve plays without the clip's sound.
  • Add a clip: a new video goes last in the film, and a message says which page it became. Nothing already there moves.
  • No gaps: the film closes up when you delete, move or shorten a page, and the cover, the music and timed text stay in step. A clip fills a new size such as 9:16, and Show it all stays your choice.

Works the same in the editor and in the saved video.

The site shows the real app

The features page, every feature page, the Social, Chat and Mail pages and the start page now show real screenshots and short recordings of Postfjord, on a made-up coffee shop. The drawn films and mock-ups are gone from those pages, and the rows that were empty have a picture. A phone gets the same screen as a phone shows it.

The Product menu has a line under every item, in every language.

A lighter look on postfjord.com

The site now wears the same colour as the app's main button.

  • Buttons: main buttons are a gradient from blue into violet with softer corners. A button in the top menu stays quiet.
  • Headings: the big page titles and section titles wear the same gradient.
  • Tabs: the tab you picked on the start page has it too.
  • Cookie box: Accept and Decline look the same as before, and neither one stands out.
  • Pictures: the design and video editor pictures show the page, with no tip in front of it.
  • Template links: if you can only view a workspace, a template link now says that only editors can make drafts. Sign up from an email or page template and the form says your template opens next.

Music on Reels is open to everyone

Anyone can now add a song or a sound from Instagram to a Reel. Open the Instagram tab, pick Reel under Format, and press Add music. It works for an account connected with the Instagram + Facebook card.

Connected before today? Press Reconnect under Channels and leave every box ticked.

Post to Facebook Pages, and comments on Instagram only accounts

Meta approved the last permissions Postfjord asked for to post and to answer comments:

  • Facebook Pages. Post and schedule to a Page.
  • Instagram through Facebook. Post and schedule with the Instagram + Facebook card.
  • Comments on Instagram only accounts. They come into the inbox, and you can answer them there.

Did you connect before today? Press Reconnect on each account under Channels and leave every box ticked. Then the new permissions reach your account.

Templates for Instagram giveaways and TikTok

Open Templates and search for giveaway. You get posts, stories and carousels for each step: announce the prize, the steps to enter, last chance, the winner, and a thank you to everyone else. The prize photo carries most of them, and a few are all type. Swap in a photo of your own prize and change the words.

Each announce and rules template has a small line that says the giveaway is not sponsored by or connected with Instagram, because Instagram's promotion rules ask for that. You can edit it like any other text.

Search for tiktok or hook to find short videos in the formats people watch there: a hook, POV, a numbered list, before and after, a day in your life, storytime, a reply to a comment. The words stay clear of TikTok's own buttons and caption. There are still cover images in the same size under Reel covers.

Sending email needs a paid plan

On Free you write and save emails. Sending them needs a paid plan, and that now covers confirmation emails too.

  • Signup forms on Free: you can build and save a form, and it stays closed. Anyone who opens it sees that it is closed, and nothing is saved. On a landing page, the form block shows the same. It opens by itself when you move to a paid plan.
  • Automations on Free: a DM step with the confirmation email switched on is skipped. The DM does not ask for an email and goes on to the next step.
  • Ask to confirm and connected form apps on Free: no email goes out. The app says what is needed in one line.
  • Paid plans: nothing changes.

Free videos in the design editor and in posts

You can now search free videos from Pixabay, in the same place as the free photos.

  • In a video design: open Photos, press All media, then Free photos and videos, and pick Videos. Press a video once and it goes last in your film. A message says which page it became and when it starts.
  • In a post: press Choose media, then Free photos and videos, then Videos.
  • See it first: each video shows how long it is. It plays when you move your mouse over it. On a phone, tap its play button.

Each video is copied to your Media and counts toward your storage, like an upload.

Clips as pictures, words that read at once and your finished video in a phone

Six changes to making a video.

  • Clip list: Add a clip now shows pictures with each video's length, not file names. One tap puts a video last in the film, and the list stays open for the next one until Done. Free videos is a tab in the same list, and it comes first when you have no videos yet. Uploading is the first tile. This works in the phone's sheet too.
  • Headings on a video: Add a heading gives you your brand's heading font, big, in the lower third, coming in with Rise. Over a clip it is white with a soft shadow. Moving now comes first under Text in a video.
  • Animate: Animate for me is first in the clip's More and in a page's ... menu, and no text has to be picked. The panel shows three looks that move on their own tiles. The rest is under More animations. A film of clips alone gets its page changes animated, with no AI.
  • The finished video: after Save video it opens in a phone with Play, Download and New post. Pick it in Media to open the same view again. Editors keep working while it saves, and a line with See it waits if they changed something.
  • Highlights: each part has a picture, a short line and its length. A video where nobody speaks now gets a list too, from a few small pictures that Claude looks at. One run costs far less than a tenth of a US cent of your AI budget.
  • Words: one changed text now says "New text in 1 place." in every language.

Video templates with real film

Some video templates now come with real film.

  • Watch before you pick: move your mouse over a film template's card and it plays, without sound. On a phone, tap the small play mark. Tap the card to see it bigger.
  • Ready when you open it: the film is already in the design, with nothing to pick or upload. It takes up none of your storage.
  • Make it yours: change the words and colors as in any template. Drop your own clip in a slot and it takes the film's place, cut to fit, with its sound.
  • Save video: works the same as for any video, and your finished film goes in Media.
  • TikTok formats: Several TikTok templates now also come as film.

Email in every workspace

Email now comes with every workspace, on every plan.

  • In the sidebar: every workspace now has Email, with campaigns, automations, signup forms and contact import. You no longer need to ask for it.
  • Sending: to send an email, or a test to yourself, you need a paid plan and a saved sender under Email, Settings. Sending then opens by itself, the moment you save the sender.
  • Clear words: when you cannot send yet, the app says what is missing in one line, with a link to the place that fixes it.
  • Importing a list: you can import on every plan. A person at Postfjord still checks each import before your emails can reach those people.

A calmer top on the Design page

  • Fewer rows above the templates: the title, the search, the tabs and the kinds now sit on one center line, so the first template shows much sooner.
  • Help me pick and Dictate moved into the search: you find them on the right side of the field. On a phone, Help me pick is a small compass.
  • All, For you and My designs: these are the tabs now. Email moved to the row of kinds, beside Posts, Stories and Carousels.
  • Blank: the round buttons are gone. Press Blank at the end of the row for Post, Story, Reel, Email and All sizes. They work as before.
  • A tidier Filter: every choice looks the same, the style names are one word, and the panel has Clear all and Show templates. Coming up shows the seasons near in time, and All seasons shows the rest.
  • The language no longer counts as a filter: it starts in your own language, adds nothing to the number on Filter and shows no small word under the row.

Bo fills your designs

Bo can now write the words in your designs.

  • In the chat: say "make a carousel about why people should try yoga". Bo picks a template, writes every page and shows a card with Open in Design. Posts and stories work too. The design opens with those words, on a computer or a phone.
  • A design you saved: ask Bo to fill it and you get a copy with the new words. The one you saved does not change.
  • In the editor: under From Bo, Fill the pages puts what Bo wrote into every page of the design you have open. One Undo takes it all back.
  • Only words: pictures and shapes stay as they are, and you can swap a picture in Design. Bo does not publish or schedule anything from here. A locked text stays too, and Bo leaves out templates with sample charts, tables, prices or dates.

Video comes later. It costs from the same AI budget as Rewrite and is on the same plans.

Play a clip backwards, mirror it, and cut clips on the beat

Three new tools for clips in a video design. They work on a computer and on a phone.

  • Backwards: pick a clip, press More, then Backwards. The clip plays from its end to its start, without sound, and the page keeps its length. Postfjord makes a backwards copy of the video once, and the button shows how far it has come. You can keep working while it runs. Split, trim and Speed work on it too. The copy is in Media and counts toward your storage.
  • Mirror: next to Backwards. It flips the picture left to right, in the editor, the cover and the saved video.
  • Cut clips on the beat: in the Music panel, under Sync to beat. Every page ends on a beat, also a far one, and each clip's start follows. No page gets shorter than a second. Undo takes it back in one step, and turning Sync to beat off gives your own lengths and starts back.
  • What moved: Captions left the More tab, since it is already on the clip's bar.

The preview and the saved video show the same pictures.

See who got and opened an email

Press a number on an automation or an email's report to see the people behind it, like who it was delivered to or who bounced. A name opens the contact. On a contact, Emails they got lists every email they were sent. Where open tracking is on, you also see who opened an email. That part is an estimate, as Apple Mail can load an email by itself.

Adjust works on iPhone, and a tap on text types again

  • Adjust on iPhone: brightness, contrast, temperature, highlights, shadows and the rest did nothing in Safari on an iPhone. Now they all change the photo, as on a computer.
  • Type on a phone: tap a text that is already picked, or tap it twice, and you can write straight on the page.
  • A dark photo: Adjust now has Darken on a phone, and a slider for a dark layer a template lays over its photo, so a new photo can be made lighter.
  • Sizes: a size with something to check now says what it is, in words.
  • Texts from Bo: a text Bo writes for you comes in a box of its own with a Copy button.
  • From Bo: copy what Bo wrote, put it on the page or ask for more, without leaving your design. It is under Text on a computer and Add on a phone.

Peel apart finds the things in a plain photo

Peel apart could treat a plain photo as one big object, so nothing came loose. It now looks for each separate thing in the photo: a person, a plate or a bottle can become its own layer, up to seven. A thing it cannot lift cleanly stays in the picture, and a photo that fills the picture stays as the background.

Peel apart takes phone photos apart

Peel apart could look in the wrong place on a tall or wide photo, so a hand came out as a piece of pillow. It now finds each thing where it is, also a held or worn thing like a watch, and small things at the edge of the picture. Move a book and the pillow under it is painted in. Words printed on something in the photo become text in the closest font, and what was under them is painted away. While AI works, the picture stays bright with a thin line passing over it. The pieces belong to the design now, and no longer fill Your photos or Media. A piece no design has used for 30 days is removed, so it stops counting toward your storage. The lines round a lifted thing are mostly gone too: its edge now follows the thing in the photo, and what is painted behind it matches the photo round it.

Film backgrounds that move

Click an empty part of the page, press Background in the bar at the top, and pick one under Film. In a video the background has moving grain, a slight flicker and sometimes a soft light leak. In a saved picture you get one still from it.

Move Film strength for more or less of it, or press Turn film look off. The words stay sharp, since the look sits on the background and not on them.

There are also new video templates with this look: dark pages, serif titles with one word in color, thin frames round the photos. Open Templates, choose Video and search for film. Change the words and photos as in any other template.

More to draw in a chart, and seven decks that use it

Open a chart, press Edit chart and open Style.

  • Circles inside each other: on a hierarchy chart, pick Inside each other under Shape. Good for market size.
  • Phases: on a line or area chart, press Add phase, name it and pick where it starts and ends. It shows as a band behind the chart.
  • Highest and lowest: on a line chart, tick Mark highest and lowest and only those two points get a dot and a number.
  • Four colored fields: on a scatter chart, set Split at X and Split at Y, then tick Color the four fields. Low on both is green, high on both is red.
  • Break even line: on a scatter chart, tick Break even line and name it. It runs where X and Y are equal.
  • A scale under a bar: on a progress bar, tick Show the scale. Your number stands over its spot, with the ends and zero under the bar. Starts at takes a negative number, so a scale can run from -100 to +100.
  • X from and X to: a scatter chart can now set both ends of its X axis, under Axes.

The decks Cost of a customer, Campaign ROI, Risk matrix, Customer satisfaction, Product life cycle and Market size now use these. Q1 vs Q2 gets a round picture beside the name on its quote page.

A design you already saved stays as it is.

A calmer Media screen, with your logos on their own tab

Media now opens with your pictures. Everything that adds a file sits behind one Add button, and you can drop files anywhere on the screen. Logos have their own tab: open a picture and press Mark as logo, or upload from the Logos tab. On a link in bio page, the Top block shows your logo with a Change button, and Look opens with your design and a few closed rows.

Admin sees how far each person got

Admin, Users now shows how far each person got, from account to first published post, and when they last used the app. Press Details to see how they sign in, whether their email is confirmed and what each of their workspaces holds, counted.

Details also shows which page on the site the person came from and what they said about how they found us. Most used lists which features are used and which nobody touched, for the last 30 days, and Details shows the same per person. Only the feature's name and the day are kept, never what was written or made, and the privacy policy says so. The morning digest says how many new accounts came in the last 24 hours.

Move and size a video on the page

A video on a page no longer has to fill it. Press Clip, then Move and size under Size.

  • Drag it to move it. Pull its handles to size or turn it, on a computer and on a phone.
  • Corners rounds them.
  • Order puts it behind or in front of your text and pictures.
  • The saved video shows it exactly where you put it.

Show things one click at a time when you present

Pick a text, a photo or a shape, press the three dots and press Show on click. It stays away in Present until you click, and fades in when you do.

  • Click order: the three dots also open a list of your clicks, with arrows to change the order.
  • A small number on the page shows which click brings each thing up. It is only on your screen.
  • A chart draws itself in when its click comes.
  • Going back takes things away one at a time, then goes to the page before.
  • Saved pictures, downloads and posts always show everything.

It works on a computer and on a phone.

Share to apps sends every page of a carousel

On a phone, Send to phone is now Share to apps, which says what it does: it opens your phone's share menu so you can pick Instagram, TikTok or another app.

It now sends every page as its own picture, up to 10. It used to send only the page you were looking at, so a carousel of four came through as one picture.

A bigger video on your phone

On a phone, a video design now gives the video most of the screen.

  • More room for the video. One thin row holds play, the time, Undo and Redo. Under it are the pages and the music, and under them one row of tools you swipe sideways.
  • See it full size. Press the small arrow under the video. The video fills the width, with only play and a thin strip of the film left. Press the arrow again to go back. Nothing in your design changes.
  • Tap what you want to change. Pause the video and tap a text, a photo, a shape or a sticker. You get the same handles and tools as on a picture, and Animate is one of them. While the video plays, a tap only pauses it.
  • Tap a page or the music. Tap a page in the timeline to see its tools: Clip, Animate, Length, Transition, Timing, Captions and Cover. Tap the music to open its settings.

The phone editor gives you the right tools

Tap a text or a photo on your phone and the tools change to fit it.

  • A small menu at what you picked: Lock, Duplicate, Delete and the three dots, the same as on a computer. The three dots hold Copy, Paste, Copy style and the layer order.
  • Text: Edit, Font, Size, Color, Format, Effects and Position in the bar at the bottom.
  • Photo: Replace, Crop, AI, Erase, Adjust, Looks, Effects and Position.
  • Shape: Color, Outline, Effects, Transparency and Position.
  • One thing at a time: each tool opens only its own settings, so your design stays in view.
  • The check on the right lets go of what you picked and brings back Add, Colors, Sizes and Layers.

Swipe the bar sideways to see every tool.

Turn the words in a picture into text you can change

Got an old post with the wrong date on it, and no file to change it in? Pick the picture in the design editor, press AI, then Make editable.

Your words come back as real text, in the closest of our fonts, at the same size and color. The picture stays, with the old letters painted out. You get a short list of the words to check, as AI can read a word wrong.

Words that are turned or curved, or that none of our fonts comes close to, stay in the picture. It works best on flat designs. On a photo the part behind the words may need a second look.

Undo takes it all back in one step. A run counts on your AI budget. How it works: Make editable.

Make editable now takes the picture apart

Make editable used to give you the words and leave the rest of the picture as one flat image. Now the things in the picture come apart too.

  • A person, a product or a logo usually becomes a layer of its own that you can move. We paint the part behind it.
  • Things usually sit behind the text or in front of it, as in the picture. A moved text can slide behind a thumb.
  • A line that leans a little usually stays leaning. All capitals stay all capitals. An italic or bold word in a sentence usually stays that way, in one text box.
  • Click the empty part of a cut-out and you pick what you can see there, not the cut-out.

Things that could not be lifted out stay in the picture, and the list tells you which. A run costs a little more on your AI budget for each thing it tries. Undo all takes it all back in one step. How it works: Make editable.

For you shows your kind of business first, and holidays wait

For you now puts templates for your kind of business and your style at the top.

Holiday templates lie at the bottom of the feed until the holiday is 14 days away. Then they get their own row in All templates. You can still find them any time under Filter.

The Fjord design tools, with new short names

The tools that change a picture or a design for you are now the Fjord design tools. Press Fjord tools on the left, or in the bar over a photo, to see them in one place. Each tool is named for what it does.

  • Peel apart (before: Make editable) turns the words in a picture into text and lifts the things in it onto layers.
  • Erase (before: Magic eraser) takes something out of a photo and fills in the background.
  • Fill in (before: Generative fill) changes the part of a photo you paint over.
  • Rewrite (before: Edit with AI) writes new words on every page of a design.
  • Animate for me (before: Magic animate) picks an animation for every layer.
  • Expand, Translate, Remove background, Enhance, Edit with words, Change the background and Image to video keep their names.

The old brush that paints parts of a photo away, or back, is now Eraser brush, so it does not share a name with Erase. On a phone, the button that opens the blanks of a template is now Blanks, so it does not share a name with Fill in. Searching Cmd+K for Make editable still finds Peel apart. Nothing else changed: the same tools, the same prices, the same places.

Video and AI editing are open

Video in Design is now open to everyone, and the AI tools in Design are open on every paid plan.

  • On every plan: videos in Design.
  • On every paid plan: Make editable, Edit with words, Change the background, Enhance, Generative fill, Create with AI, AI video, Image to video and Translate.
  • Beta: Make editable, Highlights and Image to video say Beta on the button. They work, and you will still find rough edges.

The Design page shows the tools at work

postfjord.com/features/design-editor now shows the tools at work, with six short films.

  • Your brand and Shuffle: every design in your brand, in one press.
  • Sizes: one design in square, portrait, story and landscape.
  • Match a style: one page's look on every page.
  • Remove background and Magic eraser: on the paid plans.
  • Draw: a line held still at the end turns into a clean shape.
  • On a phone: the tools change with what you tap.

A calmer, sharper design editor

The design editor has less on the screen, and everything is still there.

  • Eight rows on the left: Templates, Elements, Text, Brand, Photos, AI tools, Layers and Sizes. Shapes, Frames, Stickers and QR code are in Elements, which has one search box for all of them. Your logo and saved templates are in Brand. Format is a tab in Sizes.
  • Layers opens a panel called Layers.
  • One main button: the one thing a screen is about now has color, fjord blue gliding into violet with white text. Everything else stays soft.
  • A neutral stage behind your page, so a warm template stands out. The dots show only while you drag.
  • The text bar: Effects, Animate and Position have their words back, the font button shows just the font's name, and the color button is an A with a color bar. Underline and strikethrough are behind ..., which closes when you pick something. The letter counter shows only when a text is over its limit.
  • A photo that fills the page: lock, duplicate, delete and ... stay below the bar, where you can reach them.
  • Panels: one width, so nothing jumps sideways, with the search first. Photos starts with search and Upload, then your photos.
  • Round white handles on what you pick.
  • Share: New post first, Download second, and the rest in groups.
  • On a phone: the same groups under Add, the same Photo panel as on a computer, a row of tools that shows there is more, and a shorter message when a template opens.
  • In this design now lists every color you use, also the ones in your brand.
  • The top bar: tooltips with the name and the shortcut, and a small icon for saving, with words only if something goes wrong.

Presentations that open like posters

Every presentation template got a new look.

  • The first page is a poster. Giant words, full colour, a photo behind the type or a person in front of it. Ten layouts, mixed so the row never looks the same twice.
  • More colour. Each kind of deck has its own colours: bright for sales, soft for people and teaching, dark with neon for pitches, black and paper for finance.
  • No page blends into the app. Pages have a colour of their own, in light and dark mode.
  • Section and statement pages. Decks now have a big line between the charts, so the story carries from page to page.
  • Bigger words inside. Titles and text are easier to read across a room.
  • Charts stay real charts. You still type your own numbers in the table, and the one bright colour marks the point to look at.

Trim a video clip with handles, and Autotrim

The Clip panel now shows pictures from your video in a strip with a handle at each end.

  • Drag the left handle to where the page starts and the right handle to where it ends. Drag the lit part to move both. The page shows that moment while you drag.
  • Autotrim takes the silence off the start and the end of the part that plays. Undo brings it back. It uses no AI.

Cut a long video into highlights

Press Highlights in the Clip panel, next to Autotrim. Claude listens to your video and suggests up to five short parts.

  • Each part starts and ends at the edge of a sentence, and shows its times, what is said and why it works.
  • Tick the ones to keep. They become pages in the order you tick them.
  • Add to design adds one page per part. Undo takes them all away in one step.
  • A film holds 90 seconds. The panel tells you when what you picked does not fit.
  • Captions are ready on each new page, with no second charge.
  • A film can use 600 MB of video files. Highlights says so before it listens to a bigger file, with no charge.
  • Trying again is cheaper. What it heard is kept for an hour, so a second try does not pay for the listening again.

It needs a paid plan, and the minutes it listens to count on your AI budget. It works on a computer and on a phone.

All AI tools in one place

Press AI tools on the left, or AI in the bar over a photo, and every AI tool is there.

  • Improve: Remove background, Magic eraser and Enhance.
  • Change: Edit with words, Change the background, Expand, Generative fill and Image to video.
  • Take apart: Make editable.
  • Whole design: Edit with AI, Translate the whole design and Create with AI.

Point at a tool on a computer and a line at the foot says what it does. On a phone, each row says it.

Bo opens clean, with the box in view

Bo's page now shows the chat and little else. The box to write in stays in view, on a phone too.

  • Suggestions: up to three short buttons right above the box. On a phone, swipe the row to see them all.
  • Routines, How Bo works, What Bo remembers and Help: press the three dots at the top of the chat.
  • Chats: each one shows its date. The list no longer shows a number, which got stuck at 30 even after you deleted a chat.
  • Drafts from your blog: every run now goes in one chat, so the list no longer fills up by itself.

Design videos finish, on paper too, and the music plays to the end

We made real MP4 files with moving text, word by word animation, loops, every transition, chart Build, moving stickers and paper backgrounds, and looked at the frames. Three things are fixed.

  • A video that moves on every page no longer runs out of memory while it is made.
  • Paper, grain and most pattern backgrounds no longer slow a video down. Before, a long video on paper could run out of time.
  • The music now lasts to the end of the video. Before, it could stop seconds early.

A template keeps its look when you add moving text

  • Adding a moving text to a template no longer changes the template's fonts and colors to your brand.
  • One Undo takes back the moving text and the switch to video together.
  • Blend says so when only the page is under a layer, so a white page can turn it white.
  • Your name and Sign out always show at the foot of the menu, also in a low window.

Translate a whole design

  • Edit with AI can translate a whole design: press a language and a copy opens with every page in that language, also chart words, table words and video captions. Your first design stays as it was. Words that do not fit shrink, or get a red frame.

A calmer Templates panel in the editor

The Templates panel in the editor now opens with a search box and your templates, with less above them.

  • Formats, For you and the other choices are under the filter icon in the search box.
  • Recently used shows the templates you used last, on this device.
  • Layouts is now part of Templates. Click a template and press Use on this page to change one page and keep your words. A size with no template pages, like a banner, keeps its simple layouts.
  • Templates start drawing before you scroll to them, so you see fewer empty cards.

Templates in your language

  • Filter in Design has Language: pick which language the words on the templates are in. Templates open in the language of the app.

All templates mixes every format again

All templates shows posts, stories, carousels and videos together in one feed. The pills at the top still show one format at a time.

  • A holiday gets its own row two weeks before the day. When the day is over the row goes away and those templates move to the end of the feed.
  • For your business looks at your kind of business and the first sentence of your brand description. A business named later in the description no longer counts.

Academy, Help and Admin are small icons at the bottom of the menu again, so there is no menu to open first.

Smoother scrolling through templates

Scrolling through the templates is lighter, most of all on a phone. Cards are added as you get near them and drawn one at a time.

Custom size and Match a style in the design editor

Two small tools for the design editor.

  • Custom size: type any width and height from 100 to 4000 pixels. It is under All sizes for a new design, and under Format or Sizes for one you already have, from a template or from a blank page.
  • Match a style: under Colors. Press a page or another of your designs, and the whole design takes its colors, fonts and photo look in one press. One Undo takes it back.

One language menu and clearer cookie choices on the site

  • The footer of postfjord.com has one language button instead of a row of languages.
  • On your first visit, the start page opens in your browser's language when we have it. Pick another language in the footer and the site remembers it.
  • Manage in the cookie box opens a window that shows what is always on, who provides each kind, and a switch for statistics.

Presentations and Present

  • Presentations is a new kind in Design: 45 decks in 16:9 with real charts and tables you can type in.
  • Present in Share shows any design one page at a time on the full screen. Charts draw themselves in.
  • After opening a template on a phone, the hint now says to tap a text and press Edit.

A photo's tools now say what they are, and moving text opens on one click

Pick a photo and the bar shows words instead of a row of icons: Crop, AI, Photo, Effects, Replace photo and Position. What does not fit goes under the three dots.

  • AI holds Remove background, Magic eraser and the other AI tools, each with a line that says what it does. Nothing starts until you pick a row.
  • Photo holds Filters, Adjust, Darken photo, Frame and Erase.
  • Effects has its own icon. The stars now mean AI everywhere.

While AI works on a photo or on the whole design, the picture dims and a band of light passes over it about every three seconds.

Moving text works on the first click:

  • A press on a tile always adds the text. A press on its letters used to get lost while the tile was playing.
  • The text's panel opens as soon as it is added, or when you click it once. Back shows the moving text gallery again.

Photos get their own animations

Pick a photo and press Animate. Three new tabs show, for photos only.

  • Photo: Photo flow, Photo rise and Photo zoom move the picture inside its frame. Add puts a Spin, Wipe or Zoom on top.
  • Effects: Shake zoom and Whip slide come in with force. Old TV, Color intensity, Ripple and Slow wave keep going while the photo shows, with a speed and an amount.
  • Reveal: Brush, Ink, Digital, Pixel, Stripes and Dots uncover the photo bit by bit.

All of it plays the same on the page and in the saved video, and works on a phone too.

More of the design editor on your phone

  • Colors on a phone now has the page background: colors, gradients, grainy paper and the rest of Backgrounds.
  • Tap a shape or a photo and open Fill and effects for gradients, patterns, textures, shadows and other effects.
  • Move gradient works with a finger. The sheet goes down, and you drag the point on the page.
  • QR code is under Add.
  • Shapes have No fill, an outline and rounded corners on a phone too, under Fill and effects.
  • Text has underline, strikethrough, uppercase and lists under Spacing.
  • Position shows the exact place and size, and transparency.
  • Save as template is under Add.
  • Mark some words in the text box to change only their color or style.
  • Layers has Select several, to align, group, lock or copy many at once.
  • In Pages, drag a page by its grip to move it, and lock the page you are on.
  • Tapping text or a photo on a phone now only selects it. Press Edit in the bottom bar to open its settings.
  • A photo that fills the page moves with your fingers: tap it, then drag to slide it or pinch to zoom.

Fine paper backgrounds

Backgrounds has a new group, Paper: a fine, grainy paper in 13 colors, and five dark gradients with the same grain.

  • Click one and it fills the page.
  • Tick In my brand colors to get the paper in your brand colors.
  • Fine paper is also a texture you can put on any shape. Move Strength for less grain.

Moving things are calmer too. Speed now has six steps, from Slowest to Fastest, and Medium moves slower than before.

Grain size makes the paper's grain finer or coarser. Move gradient lets you drag a gradient's first color to any spot on the page or shape.

For admins: Replace photo on a template in the feed swaps its photo right there, and Replace in Admin swaps as soon as you pick a photo.

Image to video makes a photo move

Pick a photo in the design editor, press AI and then Image to video. Let AI pick the motion, or say what should move. In 1 to 3 minutes the photo plays as a 5 second video in the same spot, and your design is a video. The video is saved in Media, and your old photo stays there too. Each one uses 42.3 cents of your AI budget.

Edit with words, Change the background and Enhance now end the same way. You see Done, then Done, Try again and Undo, right where the panel was.

Open on the Founder plan while it is tested.

Draw on your design

The design editor can now Draw, with a pen, a marker and a highlighter in any color and size.

  • Find it under Shapes, with the D key, or under Add on a phone.
  • A finger or a pencil draws on a phone or a tablet, and two fingers zoom. A resting hand leaves no marks once a pencil has touched.
  • The Eraser takes away a whole line, and Undo takes back one line at a time.
  • Hold still at the end of a line and it turns into a clean line, circle, oval, rectangle or triangle.
  • A drawing stays a layer you can move, turn, resize and recolor, and Split lines gives each line its own layer.
  • Saved pictures and downloads show the lines just as the editor does.

Drag a layer to animate it, or let AI animate the whole video

Two new cards in Animate.

  • Create an animation: drag a layer around the page, with the mouse or a finger. A dotted line shows the way, and it plays when you let go. Choose smooth or as drawn, upright or following the direction, and the speed. It looks the same in the saved video.
  • Magic animate: one press and AI picks an animation for every layer on every page. One undo takes it all back.

Comparison pages brought up to date

  • New pages: Postfjord compared with Canva and with HubSpot.
  • Buffer, Later, ManyChat, Kit and Linktree: prices and features checked again, and Design, Bo, Strategy, Mentions, Flow and the brand report added where they matter.
  • Corrected what was wrong: which plans have Team and the brand report, DM contacts on the overview page, and how TikTok posts and Mail work today.

Search numbers in the brand report

  • The competitor part of the brand report shows numbers for you and each competitor: about how many visitors a month come from Google, how many searches the site is found for, its biggest searches and how fast it is on phones.
  • Searches that have nothing to do with the business are removed from the lists.
  • A site too small to show up in search data says so, and Bo never makes up a number.

Animate a whole video in one press, and eight new ways to come in

Press Animate and pick a style: Simple, Elegant, Fun, Party, Business or Relaxed. Every layer on every page gets a fitting way in, with words and photos treated differently. The background stays still. One Undo takes it all back.

There are also eight new animations for a page or a layer: Blur, Trail, Swipe up, Drift, Tectonic, Roll, Neon and Scrapbook. The animations you already use look the same as before.

Change a photo with a sentence, change its background, or make it sharper

Three new AI tools for a photo in the design editor, on the paid plans. They sit under AI tools in the bar at the top, together with Expand and Generative fill. On a phone they are in the photo's sheet.

Edit with words changes a photo from one sentence, like "make the bottle lighter". Paint over one part and only that part changes.

Change the background keeps the person or thing in front and puts something new behind them.

Enhance makes a small or blurry photo 2 or 4 times bigger and sharper.

Each result is a new picture in Media, and the old one stays there. Undo or Use original brings it back. A run costs 4 cents, 4.1 cents and 8.1 cents of the monthly AI budget. How it works: Edit with words, Change the background and Enhance.

Four new Academy courses

  • Video and Reels: a hook in the first seconds, photos into a Reel, words that fit the screen, the first picture and the caption, and where to post it.
  • Build your brand: your brand kit, what you stand for, one voice in every caption, your look on any design, and keeping it the same across a team.
  • Social media from plan to results: a goal you can measure, a plan from that goal, a steady rhythm, reading the results, and changing next month's plan.
  • Work smarter with AI: Bo, what to hand over and what to keep, Edit with AI, and connecting your own AI app.
  • The help pages and the design course now name the real button for your brand look: Colors, then Your brand.

YouTube thumbnails

The template browser has a new kind, Thumbnails, with YouTube thumbnails in 16:9, the size YouTube shows them in. A blank thumbnail comes first.

  • Big words that fill the frame, in two colors, with outlines, 3D edges and boxes behind them.
  • People cut out of their photo stand in front of the words: surprised, pointing, laughing, holding a phone or a dumbbell.
  • Top 10 lists, before and after, this or that, podcast episodes, a screen you react to, a product on a sunburst and a vlog over a photo of a place.
  • Calmer looks too: a full photo with one huge word, black and white with one red word, soft pastels with the person in an arch, and a film look with a real place behind the person.
  • Phones, tablets and laptops in the photos show a picture on the screen, and before and after uses two photos.

There are sets for tutorials, podcasts, vlogs, gaming, reactions, music, tech, style, top lists, makeovers, travel, recipes, workouts and money. Each set mixes a few looks with their own colors and fonts, so no two in a row look alike, and Apply brand turns any of them into yours. The cut-out people and things are in the Photos panel too, ready for your own designs.

Vivid templates in bright colors

The design editor has a new family of bright, bold templates for when calm and beige is not your style. Every set has its own colors and fonts, and Apply brand turns any of them into yours.

  • Color blocks, Memphis shapes and pop art with halftone dots and comic bursts.
  • Duotone photos in two of your brand colors, risograph prints and soft gradient cards.
  • Stickers round a framed photo, cut paper waves, and quotes with highlighted words.
  • Before and after on two colors, schedule and price tiles, reviews as chat bubbles and a product on a plinth.

You get sets for juice bars, ice cream shops, taco trucks, farmers markets, dance and pilates studios, gyms, yoga, salons, nail bars, makeup artists, florists, shops, painters, handymen, podcasters, artists, travel creators, coaches, festivals, markets and music venues. Posts, stories, reel covers, carousels, pins and wide posts are all there. Find them under All templates or search for vivid, pop art or Memphis. New colorful photos come with them and sit in the Photos panel too.

A more varied template feed

The top of the design templates looked too much alike, with the same calm look and the same thin fonts card after card. Now the cards take turns. Two cards side by side never share a look, colors or a font, and in any six cards you see at most two of one kind of look and at most two with black and white photos. So bold words, a serif, bright colors, a collage and a dark photo follow each other, in All templates, For you and the templates panel in the editor. Holiday templates near their day still come first, and so do the sizes your post needs. No template was added or removed, only the order changed.

Templates in rows, one for each format

All templates now opens with rows you scroll sideways, so you find the right kind of template faster.

  • The first row is the holiday that is near, like Halloween is here or Christmas is coming. It shows only while that holiday is close.
  • For your business shows templates made for your kind of business, when we know it.
  • Then one row per format: Instagram posts, Stories, Reels and videos, Carousels, YouTube thumbnails and Landscape posts.
  • See all on a row shows every template of it. On the holiday row it picks that holiday under Filter, Season.
  • More templates at the bottom has every template, mixed so neighbors look different.

Holiday templates no longer fill the top of the feed. In a kind like Stories they take the first row, and the rest mix in. The rows also show in the Templates panel in the editor. On a phone, swipe a row with your finger.

Tables in the design editor

You can put a table on a design. Open Shapes, scroll to Tables and pick one of 15 styles: five color families, each with grid lines, a filled header row or banded rows. The colors come from your brand and follow it when you press Apply brand or pick a new color combo.

Click a cell and type. Tab and the arrow keys move between cells, Enter starts a new line, and a long text makes its row taller. Drag over cells to pick several, then merge them, fill them or change their text. Drag a border to resize a column or a row, add or delete rows and columns, and paste cells straight from Google Sheets, Excel or Numbers.

Font, size, bold, italic, alignment, cell padding and border color and width are in the panel for the table. In a video, Build in Animate fades the rows in one after another. Tables

More shapes and frames, and Recently used rows

Shapes has many more to pick from: banners and ribbons, flowchart shapes, wavy, zigzag and dotted lines, speech bubbles in new styles, badges and starbursts, arrows that curve or look hand drawn, hearts, clouds, drops and twelve more blobs. Each one takes your brand colors, and a gradient works on them too.

Frames adds a browser window, a TV, a smartwatch, a notebook page, a sticky note, a postcard, ornate round and arched frames, film strips and postage stamps, plus torn edges and more blob shapes for photos.

Shapes, Frames and Stickers now start with two short rows. Recently used holds the last 12 things you added from that panel. Recommended for you picks ones that match the look of the design you are working on. Both stay out of the way until they have something to show. Shapes and icons

Holiday templates come first when the holiday is near

The template feed now follows the calendar. About six weeks before a holiday, its templates move to the top of All templates, For you and the Templates panel in the editor, and they stay there until the day after. When two holidays are close, the nearest one comes first.

  • In early November you see Black Friday, Cyber Monday, Small Business Saturday, Giving Tuesday and Thanksgiving first. Christmas follows from mid November.
  • The rest of the year these templates sit at the end of the feed. Nothing is hidden, and a search for "Halloween" or "Christmas" finds them any day.
  • The day follows your workspace's time zone under Settings. Without one, it follows your device.
  • Holidays on a moving date, like Easter, Lunar New Year, Ramadan, Eid, Diwali and Hanukkah, use the right date for each year.

A size your post or design needs still comes first. Nothing new shows on the screen: only the order changes.

Moving text in Design

Open Text in the design editor and press Moving at the top. You get 13 ready texts that move: Wave, Bounce, Jelly, Pulse, Float, Shake, Rise word by word, Pop letters, Typewriter, Glide, 3D Pop, Count up and Glitch. Rest the pointer on a tile to watch it, and click to add it to the page in your brand font.

Glitch is new. The text jumps to the side now and then, and a red and a cyan copy split off for a moment. You also find it under Loop in Animate, for any layer.

In a video, the text plays once on the page as soon as you add it. In a picture it goes in at rest and moves when you make the design a video. On a phone, Moving is in Text styles, with two tiles a row. Moving shows wherever video is open for your workspace.

Moving text with finished looks

Moving under Text in the design editor has 67 ready texts now, and each one is a finished look: its own font, its own colors, an effect and a motion that fits the words. Think a sticker style "Hop on" that drops in letter by letter, a neon "Good vibes only" with a flash running through it, or a name with a role under it on bars that wipe in like on TV.

Many tiles sit on a gradient, and the looks use gradient letters, 3D sides in two colors, outlines with a colored copy behind them and a small last line for a name plate or a quote.

A row of groups sits under the search: Wave, Bounce, 3D, Glide, Echo, Tilt, Flip, Rubber, Glitch, Pop, Typewriter, Line, Highlight, Stack, Neon, Count, Flash, Drop and Stretch. Search finds a look by its words or its group, like sale or neon.

The text lands about three quarters of the page wide, at the nearest free spot, clear of the parts a story's app buttons cover. It stays editable: words, font, colors, effect and speed. Press your brand under Colors and it takes your colors.

New in Effects: Stack (your words repeated above and below), a Line and a Back color for 3D letters, an Offset shadow on Outline, and Fades to for gradient letters. New in Animate: Drop, Stamp, Highlight, Echo, Shatter and Line to come in, and Swing, Stretch, Flash, Tilt, Flip, Spin, Rubber band, Tada, Hop and Sweep to loop. They play the same in the editor and in the video you save.

Moving text now moves on the page and has its own panel

A moving text now plays on the page while you edit, not only in the video. Its entrance plays once when you add it, and its loop keeps going. If your device asks for less motion, it stays still with a small play badge.

Click a moving text and its panel opens on the left, in the same place as the Moving tab: a small player, the words (up to 150 letters), font, alignment, line spacing and color, text effects, Loop, Entrance, Fill (Flash and Sweep) and a speed slider. Every change shows on the page at once, and Undo takes it back one step at a time. Edit moving text in the bar opens it too. On a phone it opens as a sheet when you tap the text.

A new moving text now lands where it covers none of your texts. If the page is full, it gets smaller or goes to a free corner.

Add a moving text to a picture design and it turns the design into a video, so the text moves at once. A note says so, and Back to pictures takes it back.

Holiday season templates, from Black Friday to Christmas

The design editor has new templates for the busiest weeks of the year. Each set has its own colors and fonts, so a shop, a cafe, a salon, a studio and a trades business each find one that fits.

  • Black Friday: a red and black price poster with a ticker band and a price burst, a black and gold set for salons, midnight lime for studios and bright primary colors for creators.
  • Cyber Monday: a browser window on a grid with a code chip, for online shops and online courses.
  • Small Business Saturday and Giving Tuesday: gift tags on a string, warm colors and real local faces. Giving Tuesday has no sale words, only ways to help.
  • Thanksgiving: hours for the week, a catering menu with prices and a pie list.
  • Gift guides: carousels by budget, product grids for Pinterest pins and free gift wrap posts.
  • Holiday hours: cards for when you are open, closed or on call.
  • Christmas: ornaments and snow globes with your photo, a candy cane shop, a Christmas menu in evergreen and gold, a market night and a party run sheet.
  • Nordic Christmas: calm paper, arched photos, little pines and candlelight.

You get posts in square, portrait, wide and Pinterest sizes, stories with countdowns, reel covers and carousels. Find them under All templates or search for "Black Friday", "Christmas" or "gift guide". New holiday photos in color come with them, and they are in the Photos panel too.

Templates for Hanukkah, New Year and January

The holiday templates now run past Christmas, into the new year and on to Lunar New Year. Each set has its own colors and fonts, and each one comes to the top of the feed when its days are near.

  • Hanukkah: a menorah drawn in your colors with a flame on each lit candle, a latke menu, hours for the eight nights and a gift guide. Blue, silver and candle gold, with no Christmas red and green.
  • Boxing Day and the after Christmas sale: a bright red price poster, a countdown, easy swaps and returns, and winter coats in a snow globe.
  • Winter clearance: ice blue posters, a snow globe story and a cozy product grid for Pinterest.
  • New Year's Eve: a confetti page with the year in a glow and your champagne photo on a disc of rays, a party lineup, a five course dinner menu and party looks for salons.
  • New Year: gift cards drawn as a real card with a chip, a ribbon and a bow, a thank you post and a self care list.
  • January: stacked words with a hollow middle line, a punch card for a ten class challenge, a wide countdown to a free month, a resolution list on a notebook page and a weekly timetable, for gyms, yoga studios and coaches.
  • Dry January: a zero proof menu, a stamp card for the bar and a juice grid.
  • Lunar New Year: a red envelope with a gold seal and paper lanterns, a reunion dinner menu and gift boxes to share, for February 6.

You get posts in square, portrait, wide and Pinterest sizes, stories, reel covers and carousels. Search for "Hanukkah", "New Year's Eve", "gift card", "January challenge" or "Lunar New Year" to find them any day.

Halloween templates in four styles

The design editor has 25 new Halloween templates in four sets, each in its own style, so you can pick the one that fits your business.

  • Pumpkin party: pumpkin orange and violet, chunky capitals, 3D ghosts and pumpkins, a price burst for your sale.
  • Acid green night: a black page in a double frame, a big date and an acid green band, made for a costume contest or a party.
  • Black and white treats: black and white photos, a serif headline and one orange moon, for a bakery, a cafe or a restaurant.
  • Pastel boo: lilac, mint and peach with round photos and little ghosts, for a kids party or a cozy week in your shop.

You get sale posts, special hours, Happy Halloween greetings, event posters, stories, reel covers and carousels. Find them under All templates. 28 new Halloween photos come with them, and they are in the Photos panel too.

Collections of matching pictures

Stickers now opens with collections: sets of matching pictures in one style, the way a good design kit does it. There are more than twenty, with over a thousand pictures.

  • Hand drawn doodles, simple line icons, soft shapes and leaves, pastel shapes, retro badges and starbursts, sparkles and stars, halftone dots, bold shapes and lines, arrows and labels.
  • Food, beauty, fitness, coffee, plants, travel, money and business, school, tech, celebration and nature.
  • Each row shows a few. Click See all to open the whole set, or search to look in all of them.
  • A picture can have up to four colors. Pick it and change each color on its own in the bar. Shapes and icons start in your brand colors, and Original colors brings back how it was drawn, unless your workspace keeps colors to the brand.

Four free design tools on postfjord.com

There are four new free tools at postfjord.com/tools, in English, German, French, Spanish and Portuguese. Each runs in your browser with no account.

  • Color palette generator: make 2 to 6 colors, lock the ones you like and press the space bar for new ones. Copy the codes as CSS, download a PNG or copy a link that opens the same palette.
  • Color contrast checker: see the WCAG 2.2 contrast ratio of two colors, whether they pass AA and AAA, and the nearest colors that do.
  • Gradient generator: make a linear or radial gradient with up to five colors, copy the CSS, and download it as a square post, a portrait post or a story.
  • Font pairing tool: try the font pairs from the design editor on your own words and copy the CSS.

Each page ends with how the same thing works in the design editor, with your brand colors and fonts.

Color combos in Design

Apply brand at the top of the design editor is now Colors. It opens a panel with Your brand first, which works as Apply brand did, and about 180 color combos under it in groups: calm, bold, pastel, neon, earthy, retro, holidays, one color and dark. Search by name, group or a color like "green".

One click puts the combo on every page and leaves the fonts alone. Click it again and the colors trade places, so the background, the text and the blocks change. Every mix keeps text easy to read, and Undo goes back one click at a time. On a phone, Colors sits in the bottom bar where Brand was.

Thirteen more chart types

All charts in the design editor now has Area (stacked, overlapping, 100% and a stream), Funnel, Radar, Histogram, Waterfall, Heat map, Scatter, Bubble, Dot plot, Treemap, Packed circles, Pictogram and Radial bars.

They all use the same data table. A scatter takes a size and a color group for its dots and can draw a trend line. A line or an area with a Date column can put the dates on a real time scale. A waterfall floats each step on the running total, a histogram sorts your raw numbers into bars by itself, and a pictogram fills part of an icon when your number has a decimal.

Every new chart builds itself in a video, like the others. Charts

Charts with a real data table

Charts in the design editor have a new panel. The table under Data works like a spreadsheet: Enter goes down, Tab goes right, and typing in the gray row or column at the end adds one. Paste cells from Google Sheets, Excel or Numbers, and copy them back out. Each column is Text, Number or Date, and a cell that cannot be drawn turns red and says why.

All charts in Shapes adds Color per bar, Pie, Donut with total, Half ring, Progress bar, Gauge and Rings to the six charts you see first. The button at the top of the panel switches the type and keeps your numbers.

Colors get one circle each. Folded sections hold the legend, the scale and a goal line, how numbers are written (1,000.00 or 1 000,00, decimals, $ or %, K, M or B), the style and the text size. A corner drag makes the whole chart bigger, words included; a side drag gives it room and keeps the words as they are.

In a video, a new chart builds itself: bars grow, lines draw, pies fill and numbers count up. Build sits in Animate for every chart. Charts

A blank design first in every format

Pick a format under the templates, like Stories or Carousels, and the first card is a blank design in that size. Tap it to start from scratch. In My designs the tabs now sit at the top, above your designs.

Moving stickers

The Stickers panel has a new first section, Moving, with stickers that loop on their own.

  • Arrows that draw themselves, bounce or point, and words like SALE, NEW, WOW and LINK IN BIO.
  • Confetti, sparkles, falling stars, hearts, likes and a star rating.
  • Follow, Subscribe, Like and bell buttons, and faces that blink, laugh and blow a kiss.
  • Fireworks, balloons, a gift and a cake, shapes that pulse, underlines and circles that draw on, and speech bubbles that pop.

Point at one to watch it, click to add it. Colors and speed gives every color in the sticker its own swatch, and the colors can follow your brand. They play in the editor, in a video and in a downloaded picture as one still frame.

Solution and feature pages in the new look

  • Every solution, feature and comparison page on postfjord.com opens with a 3D picture that fits the page, next to the product picture.
  • The numbers on the solution pages sit on white cards.
  • The last box on a page, with Start free, is light with the same soft colours as the top.

Our own templates on postfjord.com

  • The start page shows a new mix of our post templates: bright colours, quiet minimal ones and black and white.
  • The design editor page shows one real template in the four sizes the editor saves.
  • The site no longer says how many templates there are.
  • The brand box on the start page fits every screen width.

Social, Chat and Mail pages in the new look

  • The Social, Chat and Mail pages open with the name, a short line and Start free on the light background, next to a 3D picture.
  • The film for each part plays right below, as a card.

A new start page on postfjord.com

  • The start page asks "What will you market today?" and shows the tools under one row of tabs: Bo and AI, Posts, DMs, Email and Pages.
  • Social, Design, Chat and Mail each have a card with a small picture of what they make.
  • Real templates for posts, emails and landing pages sit in a row you can scroll.
  • The apps Postfjord works with are listed with their logos at the bottom, each linked to its page.

postfjord.com is light now

  • Every page on postfjord.com has a warm white background, white cards and dark text. The top of each page has the same soft colours as the app.
  • Help pages, blog posts and the legal pages sit on a white card that is easier to read.
  • The footer stays dark and has the same links as before.

A pricing page that is quicker to read

  • Each plan on postfjord.com/pricing lists what you get with checks. A paid plan starts with "Everything in" the plan before, then shows what it adds in bold.
  • Solo, Studio and Agency have a soft purple tint, and Studio, our pick, has a purple frame.
  • The comparison table shows a check where a plan has something and a short line where it does not.
  • Design has its own group in the comparison: what every plan gets, like templates, every size and free photos, and what the paid plans add, like bigger downloads, AI in the editor and brand lock.

Drop a photo on a shape to fill it

  • Drag a photo onto a circle, ring, box or other shape on your page, and the shape becomes that photo. It keeps its size, place, shape and line. While you drag, the shape is marked with Fill this shape with the photo.
  • Double click the filled shape to move the photo inside it and zoom in.
  • Template photos can be cropped and zoomed again. Before, Crop said the photo was still loading.

Social, Chat and Mail

  • The three parts of Postfjord have new names: postsocial is now Social, postchat is now Chat and postmail is now Mail.
  • Their pages moved to /social, /chat and /mail, and their help to /help/social, /help/chat and /help/mail. Old links still work and take you to the new page.
  • Nothing else changed. Your posts, DMs, emails and settings are where they were.

Words and letters that move in Design

  • In a video, a text can now come in word by word or letter by letter. Pick a text, press Animate, pick Fade, Rise, Pop, Slide, Spin or Breathe and set Move.
  • Loops keep a layer moving while it shows: Wave, Bounce, Jelly, Pulse, Shake and Float. A wave by letter runs along the words.
  • Count up makes the numbers in a text count from 0, so "Over 1,250 members" counts up as it comes in.
  • Two new text effects: 3D gives the letters depth, and Gradient runs your text color into a second color.
  • The downloaded video and the preview in the editor show the same thing.

Design on a phone is easier to use

  • Drag a layer with your finger to move it. A picked layer has handles: drag a corner to size it, a side to make it wider, and the round arrow to turn it.
  • The box for a text's size is bigger, and tapping it no longer zooms the whole page on an iPhone. The font search and every other box in the editor work the same way.
  • The size slider and the buttons in a layer's sheet are big enough for a finger.
  • The top of the editor shows a tick when your work is kept, and a red cloud when it could not be kept. Before, the words were cut off.
  • A text's sheet has Spacing: italic, bold, letter spacing, line height and Shrink text to fit, as on a computer.
  • Add, then Text, opens the new text's sheet, so you can type your words at once.
  • A template that opens on a phone says to tap a text, not click it.

Design fixes from a full review

  • On a phone, a size you type goes to the text you typed it for, even when you tap another text next.
  • On a phone, a second finger on a line's end no longer stops Undo and saving.
  • Edit chart and Animate on a phone keep the layer in view above the sheet, and an error at the top can be closed.
  • Sheets on an iPhone keep their last row clear of the home bar.
  • A draft you delete stays deleted on this device.
  • Undo keeps your brand colors and fonts as they are now.
  • Changing a text's size in another size of the design no longer changes its spacing in the main one.
  • Undo while you type keeps the text box growing with the words, and bold text is no longer drawn extra bold.
  • Two fingers in the eraser or Magic eraser no longer paint a line between them.
  • Use original after Generative fill keeps what you had erased.
  • Save as template keeps stickers.
  • Schedule a post and Duplicate on a saved design take every page.
  • Videos and GIFs show the parts you painted back on a cut-out.
  • Downloads at 2x and 3x have sharp illustrations and logos.
  • Download picks the right file type after video is turned off, and works after picked pages are deleted.
  • GIF is no longer offered for banner and profile sizes, where it cannot be made.

A page about the brand report

  • postfjord.com has a page about the brand report: the three steps, what the report says and how one press puts it to work.
  • It is linked under Product in the footer and in the Product menu.

New Academy course on design

  • Design posts that stop the scroll is a new free course in the Academy: five short lessons with quick questions. They cover one message per post, text people can read on a phone, your brand on every page, photos that fit, and making a design move.
  • The first lesson has a short film that shows a busy post turned into one clear message.

A calmer Design page and menu

  • The Design page shows less at once. Under the question are the search and two small buttons, Help me pick and Dictate, then four round buttons: Post, Story, Reel and Email, plus All sizes. Square, Landscape and From a photo are first under All sizes.
  • My designs is a tab next to All templates and For you. Your saved templates are in it.
  • The templates have one row of filters: the kinds, and Filter on the right with goal, style and topic. What you pick shows as small words you can take off with the x.
  • The menu is shorter. Create, Automate and Results are one line each that opens its pages. The group you are in stays open.
  • All workspaces is in the workspace list, and Academy, Help and Admin are under More at the bottom of the menu. The app version shows when you rest the mouse on your name.
  • Nothing was removed. Everything is still there, one click further in or through Search.

Warm, handmade templates for makers and small shops

69 new social templates in 10 sets for bakeries, cafes, wine bars, taprooms, vintage shops, jewellers, potters, studios and markets. They look made by hand: grain on the paper, soft pastels next to deep brown, green or wine, a playful serif with a handwritten word, and thin borders round photos like an old newspaper ad.

You will find round stamps for a new batch, tickets with a tear line for workshops and tastings, a striped market awning, a week of opening days with the open ones filled in, menus with one price circled by hand, product labels, postcards for customer reviews and tilted photo prints with a date on the border. The sets mix posts, stories, reel covers, carousels, wide posts and Pinterest pins.

94 new photos came with them, from bread and coffee to potters, jewellers and market stalls. They are in the photo library too. How it works: Design editor.

A timeline row for each layer in design videos

The timeline of a design video now has a row for each layer on the page you edit, under the page tiles. A bar shows when the layer is on screen. Drag the bar to move it, or drag an end to change when the layer comes or goes. Bars snap to 0.1 seconds, to each other and to the playhead, and the arrow keys move a bar too.

In turn makes the words on a page come one after another, like 01, 02, 03, 04. Each one stays to the end, or goes when the next one comes. An animation plays in where the bar starts and out where it ends, the same in the editor and in the saved video. Videos are open to testers first. How it works: When each layer shows.

Version history in the design editor

The design editor now keeps earlier versions of each design. Press Version history at the top of the editor to see them by day, with the time, who made each one and how many pages it has. Click one to see it on the page. Restore this version makes it your design again, and Undo brings back what you had. Make a copy opens it as a new design.

A version is kept when you save, when you close the editor and every 10 minutes while you work. Postfjord keeps the last 30 versions of each design, and they do not count toward your storage. How it works: Version history.

Use a whole template set at once

  • A template that belongs to a set now has Use the whole set in its preview on the Design page. One click makes every design in the set, each in its own size, with your business name and website filled in.
  • You also get a matching email banner in the same look, ready for your newsletter.
  • The designs wait in My designs as drafts, newest on top, so you open each one, change the words and photos, and save it. The editor never throws them away to make room. If a set does not fit under the 50 designs in progress you can keep, the preview says so and makes nothing. How it works: Use the whole set.

Templates fit in every size they open in

Templates now open cleanly in each size they offer:

  • No "Text does not fit" on open: a post opened as a 9:16 story or a 1:1 post fits its words there, in English and Swedish, in your brand's fonts. Small labels in spaced capitals shrink a little when a font runs wide, so they stay on one line.
  • Rows stay apart: the date and place rows on the market and ticket templates no longer run into each other in 1:1, and the arch photo cover keeps its title under the photo.
  • Words on photos read: where small white words sit on a photo, the photo is a little darker, so the words read on bright photos too.
  • Clearer names: templates that shared a name in the gallery have their own now, such as Homeowner review and Holiday week hours story.

Pick templates by style

  • A new row of words over the templates in Design: Minimalist & Earthy, Bold & Powerful, Classic & Luxury, Warm & Organic and Bright & Energetic, each with three small color dots. Pick one and you see only those templates. It works with the business goals, the kinds, the categories and the search.
  • Your style under Settings, Brand kit: pick the style that fits your business, with three templates to show it. For you then shows those templates first. Until you pick one, we guess it from your brand colors, fonts and kind of business.
  • All templates now mixes the styles near the top, so the first screen shows a bit of each. A set of templates always stays together.

Find templates by what you want and what is going on

  • Three new words over the templates in Design: Sell more, Save time and Build trust. Pick one and you see only the templates for it. They work together with the kinds, the categories and the search.
  • The template search now knows what a small business types. Try free slots, cancellation, last spots, sold out, restock, fully booked, new address, renovation, holiday hours, lunch menu or gift card. The same words work in Swedish, like lediga tider, fullbokat or presentkort.

Template fonts load the first time

  • A template that used a font for the first time could open with A font could not load and every text in a plain font. It now opens in its own fonts.
  • Script words in templates, like the handwritten word above a heading, now show in their own font on the template cards and in the large preview.

Templates bring a caption and a comment word

Press Share, then New post, on a design made from a template, and the post's text starts with a short caption: the headline, the ending and your call to action, with your business name and website filled in. Change it or delete it before you schedule.

Twelve templates now ask for a comment word in the picture, like Comment GUIDE on the quick win carousel, Comment LIST on the checklists and Comment PRICING on the pricing tips. The editor shows the DM bar as soon as you open one, and the caption says the word too: "Comment GUIDE and we send you the full guide in a DM". How it works: Design editor.

Sync to beat in design videos

Design videos with music now have Sync to beat in the Music panel. Postfjord finds the beat of your song and shows it as small ticks along the music under the timeline. Turn it on and every page change moves to the nearest beat, while the video keeps its length. Layers too also starts the layers that come in later on a beat. Move or trim the music, or add or remove a page, and the page changes follow. A transition starts on the beat. Turn it off to get your own lengths back, and any length you set by hand while it was on stays, or press Cmd+Z to undo it in one step. Videos are open to testers first. How it works: Sync to beat.

A tidier start in Design

The Design page starts in a new order:

  • Search templates sits next to the Templates heading, right above the tabs, so it is where you look for a template. The results show right under it.
  • The tabs are All templates, For you, Your templates and Email. All templates is open when you come in.
  • Continue where you left off, Your team is working on and Saved designs sit under the tabs, in small rows that scroll sideways, before the templates.
  • The Email tab has All, so you can see every email template at once, or pick one kind. Start a design

Ad texts from Claude, wide banners and Send to phone

Three changes to Share in the design editor:

  • Advertise on Meta now suggests three ad texts from the words on your design and your brand: a short one, a longer one and one about your selling point. Tap one and it goes in the box above the ad, where you can still change it. Advertise a design
  • Email and Landing page ask first when your design is not wide: keep it as it is, or make a wide banner. The banner is added to your design as a size of its own and saved with the others. A wide banner for an email or a landing page
  • Send to app is now Send to phone, and its tip says what it does: it makes a picture of the page and opens your phone's share menu.

Calm stories, reel covers and email templates

80 new social templates in 11 sets, most of them stories and reel covers. Reel covers put the title inside the square a profile grid shows, with a "Part 01" label for a series. Stories use a full photo with a small label and a thin line under the title, or plain paper with a box to answer a question in. There are highlight covers with one line icon in a circle, launch teasers with a strip of words across a dark photo, titles that mix plain and italic letters, and a second Japanese series with half a sun on a horizon, an arch and a caption turned on its side.

Each set has its own calm colours and two fonts. One new font came with them: DM Mono.

20 new email templates fit any business: a letter, a lookbook, a journal, a price list and a menu in two columns, a dark private sale and invitation, a welcome with a code, a thank you, a first week plan and a one question feedback note. Six new calm email colour sets came with them: oat, stone, charcoal, indigo, moss and dusk. How it works: Design editor.

Say it, see it

Say an idea out loud and get a finished carousel. On the Design page, press Dictate under Say it, see it and talk for up to a minute. Fix any word in the box, then press Make my carousel.

Postfjord picks a carousel template that fits your kind of business, picks a recipe that fits your idea, and writes every page from your words. The carousel opens in the editor. One press of Undo gives you the plain template back.

The same box sits on top of Edit with AI in the editor, where it writes your idea into the design you have open.

QR codes, GIF downloads and Rewrite with AI on one text

Three new things in the design editor:

  • QR code on the left adds a code for any web address, your website to start with, in your brand colors. Click it later to change the address. QR code
  • GIF is a new file type under Download for videos and for designs with more pages, which play as a slideshow. It keeps the first 15 seconds and downloads by itself when it is ready. GIF
  • AI in the bar above a text rewrites just that text: shorter, longer, punchier, more formal, friendlier, fixed spelling, translated, or what you ask for. On the paid plans. Rewrite one text with AI

QR codes keep their shadow and stay readable

Small fixes to QR codes in the design editor:

  • A shadow you add to a QR code now shows in the saved picture, not only in the editor.
  • Apply brand and Shuffle keep a QR code readable. If the new colors are too close, the code turns to your brand's dark text color on its light paper. QR code
  • Dragging the margin slider or a color picker is one step for Undo.
  • Mockups previews your design's main size, the same size it downloads, even while Sizes shows another.

The pricing page shows what each plan includes

  • The pricing page now says what each plan includes: bigger plans buy more room, and a few tools that cost more to run come with the plans that pay for them.
  • AI in the design editor (write, remove backgrounds, erase and expand) is on every paid plan.
  • The brand lock, which keeps a client's fonts, colours and logo fixed for the team, is on Studio and Agency. The plan cards for Studio and Agency say so too.

Plan a week keeps sample words out of your pictures

  • Plan a week with this set now draws the week in your brand kit with your business name and website. The solo founder sets, whose templates show what to write in [brackets], no longer make a week, so no picture leaves with bracket words. The line after a week is made says to open each post, press Edit design and change the sample prices, offers and reviews before you schedule it. How it works: Plan a week with a set.
  • If planning a week stops part way, the picture of the post that stopped is taken out of Media again, and Make the remaining makes only the days still missing.
  • My designs no longer says it is empty while your drafts are still loading.
  • A review face from the photo pack on a landing page loads a small copy of the photo instead of the full one.

Plan a week with a template set

  • A template that belongs to a set now has Plan a week with this set in its preview on the Design page, and My designs offers it for the sets of your open drafts.
  • Pick the week (next Monday by default; another day moves to the Monday on or after it). Postfjord makes four designs from the set: inspiration on day 1, tips on day 3, social proof on day 5 and an offer on day 7.
  • Each becomes a picture in Media and a draft post at 10 am on your calendar. Nothing is published: add a caption, pick channels and schedule each one. How it works: Plan a week with a set.

Photo filters, blend modes and photo colors in the design editor

Photos in the design editor get Filters: 21 looks, from Vivid and Golden hour to Film, Noir and a Duotone in your brand's colors. You see each look on your own photo, and Strength makes it softer or stronger. A filter sets the photo's Adjust sliders, so you can fine-tune it after, and None takes it off again. Adjust also gets Fade and Grain. Filters work on a photo that fills the page too.

Every layer can now Blend with what is under it: Multiply, Screen, Overlay, Darken, Lighten, Color, Luminosity, Soft light, Hard light and Difference. You find it under Transparency.

The Color panel shows Photo colors: the main colors of the photos on the page. Click one to use it, or save them to your brand kit. The saved picture and a video look the same as the page. How it works: Filters, Blend a layer and Colors.

Eight windows became pages

  • Picking a page template, connecting a channel, reviewing the week, advertising a post or design, your products for sale, resizing a picture, a flow's failed replies and the admin's site and customer details now open as pages of their own instead of windows over the screen.
  • Each page has a back link to where you came from, fits a phone, and has its own address you can bookmark or send to someone in your workspace.
  • Old links still work: they take you to the new page.
  • Two places keep a window, because you are in the middle of editing there: picking a product in a page's Products block, and failed replies while you edit an automation.

56 landing page templates that match your posts

Landing pages have 56 new templates in the calm, editorial and black and white looks of the design editor's template sets.

  • Same look as your posts: each template has the colors, the two fonts and the photos of one set in the design editor, so your posts, page and emails look like one brand.
  • Matches your posts: if you made posts from a set, its page template says so and comes first in its group.
  • For every kind of business: an intro offer and a class schedule for studios, a menu for cafés, treatments for salons, a quote form for trades, a creator home, a digital product, work with me and a free guide for coaches, a supper club, a talk, a retreat, a portfolio, a shop, a launch, a newsletter and a waitlist.
  • Ready to fill in: every name, price and date is in [brackets], in English, Swedish, German, French, Spanish and Portuguese. The page cannot go live until you have written your own.
  • No photo twice: every photo on a page is a different one, also when a set has only a few.
  • Readable buttons: a light brand color that would hide on the template's paper is not used for the button.
  • The template previews now use the same fonts as the published page.

How it works: Templates that match your posts.

Landing pages fade in as people scroll

New landing pages and link in bio pages move a little, the way studio sites do.

  • Each part of the page below the first screen fades in and rises a few pixels when a visitor scrolls to it.
  • Photos in a frame settle from a small zoom, and a photo that loads late fades in instead of popping in.
  • Pricing and review cards lift under the mouse, and buttons press in when tapped.

The first screen shows at once, so pages load just as fast. People who turned off motion on their phone or computer see the page standing still. Turn it off or on under Look, Motion. Pages made before today stand still until you turn it on. An AI app or the API can turn it off or on with motion.

How it works: Motion.

Layouts show pages from the template sets

Layouts in the design editor now shows single pages from the template sets, in your design's size. Click one and it takes the place of the page you are on, so you can change a carousel one page at a time. Change one page with Layouts

Design editor fonts, template looks and free photos on landing pages

Landing pages now use the same fonts, colors and photos as the design editor.

  • Template looks: 98 looks with the colors and fonts of the design templates, from calm cream and black to bold color. One tap and your page matches your posts. Small print like dates and captions stays easy to read in every look.
  • Fonts: pick a heading font and a text font from the 224 free fonts, or start with a Font pair that sets both. Device fonts are still there as the fastest choice. A page loads only the fonts it uses, in small web files with just the letters it needs, from Postfjord, never from Google, and the words show at once while a font loads. The font list closes with Esc or a tap outside it, and the arrow keys move through the fonts.
  • Free photos: next to your own photos, press Free photos for more than 700 photos and textures, many in black and white. It works for the small picture on a row in Links too. Postfjord hosts them, so they use none of your storage, and each comes with a short description for screen readers.

How it works: Change what is on the page.

Photo heroes, galleries, pricing and section backgrounds on landing pages

Landing pages have new blocks that make a page look designed.

  • Photo top: the Top block has a Photo layout. Your photo fills the screen and gets darker, with the words on the left, in the middle or at the bottom.
  • Photo and text: rows of a photo next to a few lines, changing sides from row to row.
  • Gallery: up to 24 photos as a grid, in columns or as a strip people swipe.
  • Slider: photos and quotes people swipe through, one at a time.
  • Numbers, Pricing, Reviews and Features: big numbers, 2 to 4 plans with one that stands out, customer cards with name and photo, and short points with an icon from the design editor.
  • Background and spacing on every block: a soft shade, your accent color, ink, or a darkened photo, from edge to edge, and less or more room above and below. Words keep their contrast on every background, also inside boxes in a color you picked, and even A little darker keeps white words easy to read on a light photo.

All of it is plain HTML and CSS: the first photo on the page loads at once and the rest as visitors scroll, review photos load small, sliders and galleries need no script, and a keyboard reaches them.

How it works: Make the page look designed.

101 calm paper templates for hours, menus, schedules and more

The design editor has 101 new templates in 14 sets, each on a light paper with one muted accent: oat and rust, sage, dusty rose, fog blue, salt and sea, wheat, butter and ink, terracotta, and three dark ones in pine, forest night and burnt orange.

They cover the posts people asked for most and had the fewest of: opening hours, class schedules, menus and price lists with dotted lines and clean prices, before and after with the before photo in black and white, checklists with round boxes, timelines, big numbers, quotes in a thin frame, and this or that polls. There are posts, stories, reel covers and carousels for every kind of business, and each one opens in your own brand with Apply brand.

Mockups in the design editor

Mockups are new in the design editor's Share menu. Put your page on one of 14 scenes: a phone in hands or on a desk, a laptop, a tablet, a framed poster, a wide frame, a flyer, a tote bag, a mug, a book cover, a shop window, a street poster, a shop sign and a billboard. Your page sits at the right angle, and on print scenes the paper or cloth shows through. Every scene shows your page in the list, so you can compare them before you pick. Download a JPG of about 1920 px wide, or save it to Media for a post. Mockups

237 calm templates in sets that fit together

The design editor has 237 new templates, in 33 sets. A set is six to nine templates in one palette and one style: a few posts, a carousel or two, stories and a reel cover. Put them side by side and your feed looks planned.

The new looks are quiet. Full photos with the words on top, many in black and white. Thin frames, small labels in the corners, page numbers like 01 / 05, and serif or clean capitals. The colors come from mineral paints and film stills: sand, oat, clay, olive, stone, espresso, cream with teal and rust, and a dark chocolate page. There are also creator sets with big lowercase words in butter or pink over a photo, a handwritten note, small tags and a message card.

Every carousel starts on a full photo or a plain colored page. 119 new photos came with them: portraits in natural light, chairs, lamps, ceramics, linen, hands, coffee and nature. All of them have alt text in English and Swedish. How it works: Design editor.

73 classic and luxury templates

Ten new template sets with the look of an expensive magazine: large thin serif headlines, small spaced capitals, black and white with a touch of champagne, gold, navy, emerald or wine.

They are made for clinics, estate agents, interior architects, jewellers, fashion and bridal shops, hotels, photographers and stylists. You get magazine covers, property listings, before and after posts, quiet price lists, lookbooks, carousels, stories, reel covers, wide posts and Pinterest pins.

Find them under Design, All templates. The editor's photo library also has 98 new photos of interiors, jewellery, weddings and fashion.

72 wide templates for LinkedIn, Facebook and YouTube

The design editor has 72 new templates drawn for 16:9, the wide picture LinkedIn, Facebook and X show in full and YouTube uses for a thumbnail. They come in nine sets, each in one palette: announcements, quotes, events and webinars, hiring posts, launches, blog share cards, numbers, before and after, team intros and offers.

Find them under All templates, or pick Landscape next to Posts and Stories. Start a Landscape design and the Templates panel shows the wide ones first.

Open one in a square, a portrait post or a story and it is drawn again for that size, with words as large as a post made for it.

Three Japanese minimal template sets

Three new template sets in a Japanese minimal style: off-white or warm grey paper, one red sun or a black brush ring, short words stacked in a narrow column, thin rules and small numbers. One set is for a tea house, one for a ceramics studio and one fits any business.

Each set has posts, carousels, stories and a reel cover that look good side by side. Some pages use a red or persimmon orange block with the title in it. 26 new photos came with them: bowls, tea, branches, bonsai, raked gravel and maple leaves. How it works: Design editor.

Infographic templates

The template picker has a new category, Infographics: 57 templates in nine sets for numbers, charts and steps. One big number with its source, a progress ring, "4 out of 5 clients" with a row of icons, column, bar, line and donut charts, numbered steps, a timeline, two columns to compare, a checklist and carousels with one number or chart on each page.

The charts are real charts. Click one, press Edit chart and type your own numbers: the bars and rings follow. There are posts, stories, carousels and wide 16:9 posts for LinkedIn, in earthy, bold, calm dark, warm and bright colors.

Search for infographic, stats, chart, numbers or steps to find them. How it works: Design editor.

Help me pick a template

  • The Design page has Help me pick under the search. Pick your goal this week (Sell the last spots, Launch something new, Get more reviews or Say hi to new followers) or write it in your own words.
  • Postfjord shows the 3 templates that fit your kind of business and that goal, each with a headline written for it in your brand's language.
  • Click one and it opens with that headline in place, ready to change. It is on the paid plans and uses your AI budget. How it works: Help me pick.

Expand a photo, or change part of it, with AI

Two new AI tools for a photo in the design editor, on the paid plans.

Expand makes a photo bigger in a new shape and draws what is around it. Pick Whole page or 1:1, 4:5, 9:16, 16:9 or 2:3, so a wide photo becomes a full story with nothing cut off.

Generative fill changes one part of a photo. Paint over it and write what should be there, or leave the words out to take it away.

Each run costs 4 cents of the monthly AI budget. The new picture lands in Media, and Use original brings the old photo back. How it works: Expand and Generative fill.

Templates with words to swap

40 new social templates in 6 sets for a solo founder, in calm earthy colours and black and white: posts, stories, carousels and reel covers. Instead of example words they say what to write, in [square brackets], like "[The problem your customer has], solved in 20 minutes". They cover the posts a small business needs most: a launch, last spots, fully booked, sold out and back in stock, prices, a gift card, tips in 3 steps, myth or fact, a word and what it means, a five star review, a result in one number, why you started, opening hours, before your visit, questions and answers, where to find you, a move or a renovation and the lunch menu.

Four new layouts came with them: a glossary word, seats as circles for the spots left, myth on top and fact below, and a quote under five stars. They have the tag Words to swap in the template picker. When you save, send, copy or download a design that still has words in [brackets], Check before you save names each page that has some. How it works: Design editor.

1,385 templates in five styles

The design editor now has 1,385 templates in 207 looks. Four new styles join the calm, earthy ones: Bold & Powerful, Classic & Luxury, Warm & Organic and Bright & Energetic, each in posts, carousels, stories, reel covers, wide 16:9 and Pinterest sizes, with new photos to match. There are also 57 infographic templates with charts you fill in yourself. Pick a style above the templates, or set Your style under Settings, Brand kit, and For you shows it first.

Edit with AI says what it needs, and bold library fonts load again

Edit with AI in the design editor: the example in the empty box now reads as an example, a picked recipe is filled in and moves you to the box, and Rewrite pages tells you what to write first instead of staying grey. Bold text in fonts that have no bold of their own (Lilita One, DM Mono, Patrick Hand, Libre Caslon Display and others) loads again, so the "A font could not load" note is gone.

103 editorial black and white templates

Fourteen new template sets in a magazine style: black and white photos, one serif headline, small capitals and mono numbers, thin rules and a lot of paper. There are sets for a boutique, a bookshop, a gym, a trattoria, a hair salon, a joinery, an interior studio, an electrician, a photographer, a coach, an evening venue and three that fit any business.

New layouts come with them: a full photo with the headline low on the left, a photo window on paper, a giant word that runs over the edge of the photo, headlines that mix straight and italic letters, three tall photos with one in colour, a paper box over a photo and a photo cut as an arch. The carousels keep one thin rule and a page counter on every page. One carousel cuts a wide photo across the first pages, and one starts with a contact sheet of six frames.

Thirteen new colour combinations too, among them the first dark ones: Film Noir and Mocha Charcoal. How it works: Design editor.

Drag photos into frames again

In Chrome and Safari, the photos in the design editor's Photos panel could only be clicked in. Dragging one did nothing. Now you can drag a photo from the panel onto the page again. Drop it on a photo or a frame and it takes that picture's place and keeps its shape, also when the photo is selected. Drop it near the edge and it fills the page. Drop it anywhere else and it lands where you let go. While you drag, the photo it will replace is tinted and labelled Replace this photo.

Home and My designs in Design

The top of the Design page is now one calm band:

  • What will you make today?, then two buttons: Home and My designs.
  • A big Search templates in the middle. The results show under the round buttons.
  • Say it, see it is one short line with a Dictate button.

Home shows the templates right under the round buttons. My designs shows the designs you were working on, your team's designs, your saved designs and your templates, each in a grid with larger pictures. The back button in your browser goes from My designs to Home. Start a design

Comments on designs

You can now leave comments on a design, the way you do in Canva. Press Comments at the top of the design editor, then click the spot on the page where your note goes, or comment on a layer so the pin moves with it. Type @ to mention a teammate. Everyone in the workspace can reply in the thread, resolve a comment when it is done and reopen it later. For you shows the open comments that mention you.

On a phone, the speech bubble at the top opens the comments, so you can read and reply there too.

Pins show only in the editor. A saved picture, a video or a download never has them. How it works: Comments.

A DM for the comment word in your design

When a design says Comment BOOK below or Kommentera BOK, the design editor sees the word and offers the DM in one step. Press Set up the DM, write the DM text, paste the link and pick the account. It is the same comment automation the composer makes, and it answers the post you make from the design: Share, then New post, and the post has it.

Live preview shows a phone next to the canvas with page 1 as the post. Type a comment as a follower and see the reply and the DM that would follow. Nothing is sent. How it works: A DM for a comment word.

Charts in the design editor

Charts are new under Shapes in the design editor: column, bar, line, pie, donut, a progress ring and a big number. Type your labels and values in a small table, up to 12 rows, and add a sign like $ or % before or after each value. A chart starts in your brand colors and font, and you can change its colors, font, labels and values in the chart panel. Numbers can be written 1,250 / 3.5 or 1 250 / 3,5, and charts work on a phone too. It looks the same in the saved picture and in videos. Charts

AI in Design is on the paid plans

Edit with AI, Say it, see it, Remove background, the Magic eraser and the ad texts in the design editor now need a paid plan. On Free the editor shows a note with a link to upgrade. Everything else in the editor still works on Free. Edit with AI

Edit a whole carousel with AI

The design editor has Edit with AI on the left. Write what each page should say, one line per page, and press Rewrite pages. Claude writes new words on every page and the template keeps its look.

Need more pages than the template has? Postfjord copies its middle pages for the extra lines and removes the ones you do not need. Photos, shapes, colors and fonts stay as they are, and longer text shrinks to fit its box.

One press of Undo brings back the old words and pages. On a phone it is under Add.

Make a picture from a few words

Create with AI is a new tab in Photos in the design editor, on the paid plans.

Describe the picture, pick a style (photo, illustration, 3D, watercolor or minimal flat) and a shape (square, portrait or landscape), and you get four to pick from in a few seconds. Click one and it goes on the page and into Media.

Each time costs 1.2 cents of the monthly AI budget, also when the safety check stops all four. Messages about what went wrong now show in your editor's language. How it works: Create with AI.

Colors and gradients that match your design

The color panel in the design editor has more to pick from:

  • Colors that match this design: 28 colors made from the colors in your design, or from your brand when the design has none yet. Each row is one color from light to dark, so it is easy to find a lighter or darker one. The last rows are calm colors that go with it. Colors
  • Gradients from this design: up to 14 gradients made from your own colors, a color to a lighter one of itself or two of your colors together.
  • More gradients: 21 in all, with calm ones like Sand, Clay, Sage, Olive, Stone, Ink to paper and Dusk rose.
  • Change a gradient background: press Background and change its colors, direction and angle under the colors, as on a shape. Gradient there starts one from the color the page has now. Gradients
  • A gradient's first color can now be changed without losing the gradient, on a shape and on the background.

When the brand is locked, the panel still shows only your brand's colors.

Calm, minimal templates and 400 more photos

  • 22 new templates in three calm looks: editorial pages in greige with black and white photos and big capitals, warm pink and terracotta with round photos and curved words, and soft arches with a script word over a photo.
  • Most of them are carousels of four to six pages, plus posts, stories and a reel cover, for shops, studios, cafes, beauty, creators, coaches and events.
  • 9 new short videos in the same looks, where video is on for you. In the editorial one, each photo gets its number and then its line, one after the other.
  • The templates now have about 570 photos to draw from, up from 169. We host them, and you may use them in your posts.
  • All templates shows the picture first. Hold the mouse over a card to see its name, and a carousel turns its pages while you look.

Brand report

  • Brand report on the Strategy page: answer three short steps, and Bo writes a full report on your brand identity, archetype, story, strengths and weaknesses, competitors, ideal customers, content strategy and campaign ideas.
  • Bo suggests ideal customers and competitors from a web search, and values and archetypes from your answers. You keep the ones that fit.
  • The page fills in one part at a time while Bo writes, and carries on if you leave and come back.
  • Use it in Postfjord puts the report into your brand voice, your strategy and the team handbook, and asks Bo to plan your first week of posts.
  • On the Studio and Agency plans: 2 reports a month for each workspace on Studio, 5 on Agency.

Lock the brand in designs

The owner of a workspace can now lock the brand in the design editor. Go to Settings, Brand kit, Lock the brand in designs and turn on what to lock: fonts, colors, the logo, or text that fits its box. Then everyone else in the workspace can pick only the brand fonts and colors, the logo stays where it is, and text gets smaller instead of running over its box. A line at the top of the editor says what is locked. The owner can still change everything, and while the lock is on only the owner can change the brand kit.

It comes with the Studio and Agency plans. On Free and Solo the section shows with the switches off. How it works: Lock the brand in designs and When the brand is locked.

Bold templates for coaches, founders and podcasters

75 new templates in a bold style: night black pages, one loud colour and huge capitals. They are made for coaches, consultants, software founders, podcasters and personal brands, in eleven sets you can use whole.

Each set mixes feed posts, carousels, stories, reel covers, wide 16:9 cards for LinkedIn and YouTube, and a few tall 2:3 pins for Pinterest. You will find hot takes, big numbers, client quotes, podcast episode covers, webinar cards and launch countdowns.

92 new photos come with them: portraits, stages, microphones, desks and cities at night, mostly in black and white. They are in the photo library too. Open Design, pick All templates and look for the bold sets.

72 bright and playful templates

The design editor has 72 new templates in a bright, happy style: sun yellow, coral, bubblegum, sky blue and lime, chunky rounded headlines, rounded photos, and stars, bursts, speech bubbles and stickers. They are made for kids' clothing shops, gyms and dance studios, juice bars, ice cream shops, creators, festivals, community groups, run clubs and nail bars.

They come in eleven sets, each in one palette. You get polls with two photos, giveaways with three steps, class schedules, opening hours, festival line ups, "ask me" stories, reviews in a speech bubble, tip carousels, reel covers, wide posts for LinkedIn and Facebook, and pins for Pinterest.

Find them under All templates. 92 new colourful photos come with them, and they are in the Photos panel too.

Banners, pins and profile pictures in Design

  • All sizes in Design has five new sizes: a Pinterest pin (2:3), a YouTube channel banner, a Facebook cover photo, a LinkedIn background photo and a profile picture.
  • The editor shows what each platform cuts off. On a YouTube banner and a Facebook cover the parts some screens do not show are striped. On a LinkedIn background a dashed circle shows where your profile photo sits. A profile picture shows the round crop.
  • Every template works in the new sizes, and Sizes and Format list them, so you can turn a post into a pin or a banner.
  • A post to Pinterest now gets the 2:3 version of a design, the shape Pinterest shows best.

60 backgrounds and 60 font combinations

Two new things in the design editor:

  • Backgrounds: about 60 ready backgrounds under the page color. Retro halftone dots, worn prints, grainy gradients in earthy colors, paper, soft glows, sunbursts, rings, 70s stripes and waves. One click fills the page, and In my brand colors shows each one in your colors. Shapes get four new patterns (Sunburst, Rings, 70s stripes, Groovy waves) and a Grunge texture. Backgrounds
  • Font combinations: 37 new ones, 61 in all, now in groups: Elegant, Modern, Bold, Retro and groovy, Script accents and Editorial. Some have a handwritten word across the heading. PT Sans joins the font list. Font combinations

AI pictures run on their own, and Captions joins AI in Design

Expand, Generative fill and Create with AI now run on their own machines. A busy moment with AI pictures no longer slows down Save or Download in the design editor. A workspace can make up to three AI pictures at the same time. A large photo is made smaller before it is expanded or filled, so it never runs out of memory.

Make captions for a video and the preview of Magic eraser are on the paid plans now, like the rest of AI in Design. On Free you see a note with a link to upgrade.

A saved design keeps its version history and its comments however many versions come after it. Comments on a design in progress go with it when it is deleted before it is saved. How it works: Design editor.

See a template before you use it

  • Each email template has Use and Preview on it. Click the picture or Preview to see the whole email over the whole screen, on a computer or a phone.
  • Go from template to template with the arrows, and press Use this template when you find the one you want.
  • Nothing is made until you pick a template, so you no longer have drafts to delete after looking around.

Better photos in the templates, swapped by our team

  • Our team can now swap any photo in the email and design templates for a better one, and the new photo shows up right away.
  • A template you open after a swap has the new photo. Emails you already sent, drafts and designs you made keep the photo they have.

A lighter, warmer app

  • The app's background is now almost white with a hint of warmth, and cards are white. The blue-grey is gone.
  • Buttons are soft: a pale sand colour with dark text, in place of the solid blue and yellow ones.
  • In dark mode the app and the menu are a warm dark grey in place of navy.
  • The top of each screen has a soft wash of colour, like the start of Design.

New email is a page, the text tools sit at the top, and square buttons

  • New email opens a page with the templates, not a box on top of your list. Back to emails takes you back.
  • In the email editor, the text tools sit in a bar at the top of the email, like in Design. The email no longer moves when you click a text.
  • The + between two blocks, and a slash in an empty text, open the Blocks tab on the left. A blue note says where the block goes. Click a block to put it there.
  • Tabs, filters and choices you click have square corners across the app. Round shapes are left for labels that show a status or a count.

GitHub Copilot, Windsurf and Notion Agent in the app directory

Three more AI apps have their own card under Settings, Apps, in AI apps and agents, and their own steps in the help.

  • GitHub Copilot: Copilot Chat in VS Code and the Copilot CLI connect with a key you make on the card. On Copilot Business or Enterprise, an owner of the organization turns on MCP servers in Copilot first.
  • Windsurf: Cascade connects with a key. Add Postfjord to its MCP config file and turn it on in the MCPs part of the panel.
  • Notion Agent: signs in with your Postfjord login, so you paste no key. It needs a Notion Business or Enterprise plan, and a Notion admin turns on custom MCP servers first.

See MCP server for every step.

Clearer tools for AI apps

  • Ten tools that read your workspace now also describe what their answer holds. AI apps that check answers, such as VS Code, can read them without guessing. The ten are the channels, brand profile, calendar, a post, the media library, a picture or video, analytics, email contacts, emails and Inbox conversations.
  • Every field an AI app fills in now says what goes in it. Email addresses must look like an address before Postfjord gets them.
  • Calendar notes work without dates. An app that leaves them out gets today and the 30 days after.
  • Deleting a post now tells the app which post went and what status it had.

More AI apps can connect to the MCP server

  • Apps that run on their own servers, such as Perplexity, Mistral and AWS AgentCore, can now connect to Postfjord with a sign-in. Before, Postfjord turned them away.
  • The analytics tool now takes any number of days and uses the nearest range: 7, 30, 90 or 365. Before, an app that asked for 14 days got an error.
  • An app that does not say how it signs in now also gets a secret when it connects, as the sign-in standard says. Perplexity stopped without one. Apps that never use the secret keep working as before.

Faster answers for AI apps

  • Postfjord now packs its answers to AI apps and the API when the app asks for it. The list of tools an AI app reads when it connects drops from 164 KB to about 31 KB, so it arrives sooner, most of all far from Europe.
  • The first call after a quiet spell starts sooner, because Postfjord loads the AI tools while it checks the key.

Postfjord in Cursor

  • Cursor now gets a shorter list of 25 tools: posts, the calendar, media, analytics and Inbox replies. Cursor uses about 40 tools across every server you add, and with all of Postfjord's it could see the tools but never used them.
  • The Cursor card under Settings, Apps gives the new link. If you set up Cursor before, add ?tools=core to the end of the link in ~/.cursor/mcp.json.

New pictures for the feature cards

  • The feature cards on the postfjord.com start page have new pictures: big numbers and simple shapes, one per feature, in place of screenshots.
  • All eleven features now have a card, Inbox included.

Drag drafts and cancelled posts in the calendar

Drafts with a date and cancelled posts now move in the calendar too. Drag one to another day, or onto an hour in the week, and it gets the new date. It stays a draft or cancelled, so nothing is published until you open it and press Schedule. Scheduled posts move as before. See Calendar.

A brighter start in Design

  • Design opens with fewer things on top: the question, the search and one row of round buttons in colour.
  • All sizes lists every format by where it goes, like Instagram Story, YouTube thumbnail or Pinterest pin, and opens a blank page in that size.
  • The search shows how many templates there are, and the template categories are coloured cards with a template on each.

Hours in the calendar week

  • On a computer, the calendar week has a row for every hour, and each post sits in the hour it goes out.
  • Drag a post onto an hour to move it there. A line shows the new time, in steps of 15 minutes, before you let go.
  • Click an empty part of an hour to start a post at that time. A picture dragged from the row of pictures onto an hour starts a post then too.
  • A red line shows the time now on today, and hours that are over turn a little greyer.
  • Hours where your posts did best in the last 90 days carry a small Good time tag, from the same numbers as Best times to post in Analytics.
  • The day's notes, bookings and emails sit in an All day row above the hours. On a phone and in the month, the calendar works as before.

Calendar

Use my brand keeps each template's design

  • With Use my brand on, an email template keeps its own design and takes your brand color for its buttons, links and lines. It used to paint the whole email in your brand colors, which could make every template look the same.
  • If your color would be hard to see on a template's background, that template keeps its own button color.
  • Your logo and your name show in the pictures, as before.

How it works: Email campaigns.

YouTube numbers kept 30 days, and Ghost articles that go live after a retry

Postfjord keeps the public numbers from YouTube for 30 days. Every night, numbers older than that are deleted first, before anything new is read. This now also covers a channel that needs Reconnect and a night when YouTube does not answer.

When an article to Ghost got no clear answer, Postfjord looks for it on the site before it sends it again. If it finds the article as a draft and you have since set it to publish, Postfjord now publishes it. Before, it stayed a draft.

How it works: Analytics and Ghost.

Post to Tumblr

You can connect your Tumblr account under Channels and schedule posts to your main blog with your other channels. Press Connect and sign in on Tumblr.

A post holds text, a link, up to ten pictures or a video. The hashtags in your text become Tumblr tags. Analytics shows your followers and the notes on your newest posts.

How it works: Tumblr.

Publish blog posts to your Shopify store

You can add the blog of your Shopify store under Channels and publish blog posts to it with your other channels. Connect your store under Settings, Apps, Shopify first, then pick the blog.

A blog post has a title, a body, an excerpt, tags and a cover picture. Send it as a published post, or as a draft that you finish in Shopify.

Postfjord now asks Shopify for permission to write blog posts. It changes no product, order or customer. It writes only the blog posts you send. A store connected before is asked once: press Approve in Shopify when you add the blog.

The help page has the steps.

See the money your emails, automations and pages bring in

Analytics has a new view, Revenue. It shows the sales and bookings from your email campaigns, email automations, DM automations and pages, for this month, last month or the last 3 months, next to the months before.

Under the money, your email campaigns from the last 90 days sit next to the median for your industry: open rate, click rate and unsubscribe rate, each marked good, normal or weak. The numbers come from MailerLite's public benchmarks, and the source is linked.

A purchase now counts for an email when it comes within 5 days after the click. Change the number under Settings → Apps → Link tags. It applies from now on.

Contacts get a new Buying filter: Due to buy again and At risk, worked out from how often a person buys. Save it as a segment and send a win back email.

How it works: Analytics, Link tags, sales and results and Contacts.

Email templates in their own colors, and a For you that is yours

Every email template now shows its own design: its own colors, typefaces and layout. Before, every template took your two brand colors, so they all looked alike in the small pictures. The email you pick opens looking exactly like its picture.

Want them in your colors? Turn on Use my brand at the top of Start from a template. Every picture switches to your colors before you pick. Postfjord remembers the choice in this browser, and the Templates tab in the editor follows it. A new workspace is asked for its logo and colors only when it turns this on.

For you is now your own: first Use again, with your latest emails and saved templates, then the templates for your kind of business, then the ones for this time of year, then the ones for any business. All templates has every category, and Your templates only your own templates and emails.

The logo at the top of a template is the size it gets in the email, 120 pixels wide unless you picked a size under Email settings, and it no longer sits in a band of its own. Without a logo, your business name stands there. A row of templates always ends with a whole template, and a long name takes two lines.

How it works: Email campaigns.

All the templates now come with Swedish words too. When your email language is Swedish, a template opens with a Swedish subject, preheader, text and buttons, and its [brackets] are Swedish.

Try another look and keep your words, text tools over the text, and design pictures for your email

The email editor works more like Canva.

  • More like this: the Templates tab shows the templates closest to your email, each with your own words in it. One click gives your email that layout and look. Your subject, preview text, headings, texts, buttons and photos come along, and one Undo goes back.
  • Text tools over the text: click a heading or a text and its tools float right above it. Kind, font, size, color, highlight, bold, italic, underline, alignment, lists, line spacing and clear formatting are all there.
  • A toolbar on every block: layout, corners and spacing next to move, duplicate and delete.
  • Design on a picture: make an email header, banner, square or product collage in the design editor, and it goes straight into the email. Press Design again to change it. Design in Canva works the same way where Canva is on.
  • Email in the design editor: the Design page has an Email tab with the email templates. A pick opens a new email in the email editor.
  • Share: send a test, copy the HTML, or open a new Gmail or Outlook draft and paste your email in.

How it works: Email campaigns and Design editor.

Seven free email tools on postfjord.com

postfjord.com/tools has new free email tools. Open any of them and get a result at once, with no account: a subject line tester, a spam word checker, an email signature generator, an email ROI calculator, a seasonal email calendar with over 90 moments, and email benchmarks by industry with the sources named.

The SPF, DKIM and DMARC checker was already there. It now asks Google's public DNS when Cloudflare's cannot be reached.

Everything runs in your browser. Nothing you type is sent to Postfjord or saved.

Deliverability in one place, a daily blocklist check, and an address check on import

Sending health under Email settings is now Deliverability. It shows your bounces and spam reports for each of the last 12 weeks next to the line where Postfjord pauses a campaign, every campaign Postfjord paused by itself in the last 90 days and why, your own domain's records with one line on how to fix each, and whether your domain is on a blocklist. It never shows a "delivered" number, because a delivered email can still land in spam.

Postfjord checks the blocklists once a day and emails the owner when their domain shows up on one.

When you import contacts, Postfjord now checks every address before the first email. Spelling mistakes in the domain, throwaway inboxes, inboxes nobody reads and domains that cannot get email come in without email. For team addresses like info@ you choose.

How it works: Reach the inbox and Import contacts.

Blogs have their own group under Channels

Channels now shows two groups. Social has Instagram, Facebook, LinkedIn and the other social accounts. Blogs and websites has WordPress and the other sites that get articles, so your blog is easy to find.

Nothing changes for a channel you already connected. It keeps its posts and its place in the calendar.

On postfjord.com, the blogs have their own group on the integrations page too, and a page of their own under features.

How it works: Channels and WordPress.

Write blog articles with headings, links and pictures, or let Bo draft them

  • An article for WordPress, Ghost, Wix or a Shopify blog is now written in an editor of its own. The bar above it has headings in two sizes, bold, italic, links behind words, lists, numbered lists, quotes and pictures from Media. Cmd+B, Cmd+I and Cmd+K work too.
  • Paste from Google Docs or Word and the headings, bold, italic, lists and links come along.
  • Full screen gives the article the whole screen while you write. Press Done or Esc to go back.
  • Put up to 20 pictures in the text. They go to your blog with the article: to the site's media library on WordPress, Ghost and Wix. A Shopify blog shows them from your Postfjord library.
  • Write the article with Bo makes a draft from your post, with a title, headings, a short summary and tags. Bo uses only what the post says and never adds links of its own. An article you already wrote is only replaced after you say yes.
  • ChatGPT, Claude and the API can write articles with headings, bold, links and pictures too.

How it works: WordPress, Ghost, Wix and Shopify blog.

Publish articles to WordPress

You can connect your own WordPress site under Channels and publish articles to it with your other channels. Type your site's address, your user name and an Application Password that you make in WordPress.

An article has a title, a body, an excerpt, tags and a cover picture. Send it as a published article, or as a draft that you finish in WordPress.

The help page has the steps.

Publish blog posts to Wix

You can connect the blog of your Wix site under Channels and publish blog posts to it with your other channels. Press Connect, pick your site on Wix and allow Postfjord.

A blog post has a title, a body, an excerpt, tags and a cover picture. Send it as a published post, or as a draft that you finish in Wix.

The help page has the steps.

Social media sizes, an API reference and an agent guide

  • A new free tool, Social media sizes and limits, shows the picture shapes, video lengths, character limits and hashtags of every platform Postfjord posts to, in five languages. It is built from the same limits Postfjord checks before a post goes out.
  • The REST API reference lists every call with its parameters, body, answer and a curl example.
  • Build an agent on Postfjord shows the first calls an agent should make, the loop from idea to a published post, recipes and how to retry safely.
  • The glossary explains 36 words from social media, DMs, email and AI agents, and /compare puts Buffer, Later, ManyChat, Kit and Linktree side by side with Postfjord.
  • The footer links all of them.

Connecting an AI app starts on the right workspace

  • When you connect ChatGPT, Claude or another AI app and you have more than one workspace, the sign-in now starts on the workspace Postfjord opens for you. Before, it always started on the first one.
  • A line above Allow names the workspace the app gets and what it may do, so you see it before you press. See Connect your AI app.

Publish articles to Ghost

You can connect your Ghost site under Channels and publish articles to it with your other channels. Make a custom integration in Ghost and paste its API URL and Admin API key.

An article has a title, a body, an excerpt, tags and a cover picture. Send it as a published article, or as a draft that you finish in Ghost.

The help page has the steps.

A page for developers

  • postfjord.com/developers gathers what you need to connect an app, an agent or your own code: the hosted MCP server, the REST API, the open source agent tools on GitHub and where Postfjord is listed.
  • The site's footer has a Developers column with the developer page, MCP setup, the REST API document, AI agents, Meta Muse and GitHub.
  • Every connect step on the site and in Settings, Apps now gives the MCP server's own address, https://mcp.postfjord.com/mcp. The older address keeps working.

Channel cards list only what can work

  • The list on each card in Settings, Channels now leaves out what the platform does not allow. Threads, TikTok, YouTube and WhatsApp no longer show a red cross for something no app can do.
  • LinkedIn comments and analytics now say Coming later. LinkedIn opens them together with company pages.
  • On a phone or a narrow screen, the card's name is no longer cut short. Connect and Reconnect move under the name when they do not fit, and an error on a connected account gets a line of its own.

Times follow the workspace time zone on clock-change days

A time you pick is read in the workspace time zone, whatever zone your laptop is in. That was already true on most days. On the two nights a year the clocks change, a few times could land an hour off. They now land where you meant them.

A time that does not exist, like 2:30 on the night the clocks jump forward, becomes 3:30. A time that happens twice, when the clocks go back, means the first one. The composer, the calendar, Bo's week plan, Bo's routines, evergreen posts, Flows and bulk scheduling all use this rule.

A post you open again shows its time in the workspace zone, also when the zone changed after you scheduled it.

How it works: Composer.

Channels that stay connected when a platform is busy

When TikTok asks Postfjord to slow down while it renews a connection, your TikTok channel stays connected. Postfjord tries again a few minutes later. Before, the channel could show Reconnect even though nothing was wrong.

The same goes for Bluesky when the address of your account's server cannot be looked up for a moment. The post waits and goes out on the next try, and the channel stays connected.

If a post to Bluesky or Mastodon got no clear answer and you then edit it, Postfjord still checks first whether the post went out. It never sends it a second time. If you changed the pictures or the video and the post may already be there, Postfjord asks you to check the account before you press Retry.

How it works: Channels.

Safety limits and clearer stop words

  • STOP counts when it is the message: "STOP", "Stop!" or "stop please". A sentence like "Can I stop by tomorrow?" no longer stops automations. A lone Cancel counts as STOP.
  • STOP in a comment on your post now stops comment automations and DMs to that person in the workspace, the same as STOP in a DM. The person writes START to get messages again. Nobody on your team can switch it back for them.
  • The page that confirms a signup to your emails waits for the person to press Yes, confirm. A mail filter that opens the link confirms nothing.
  • The waitlist form is gone now that anyone can sign up. Earlier waitlist entries stay.
  • A workspace can have up to 500 posts scheduled at once.
  • One person keeps up to 50 designs in progress in a workspace.
  • Disconnecting an ad account lists any rejected ads that could still be approved, and stops them first if you go ahead.
  • The thank you page after a purchase shows once Stripe says the payment went through. Until then it says We are checking your payment.
  • What Bo remembers holds up to 120 lines of up to 300 characters, and every change goes through Postfjord.
  • Refreshing Analytics works once every five minutes per workspace. Connecting Calendly, Acuity or Cal.com asks you to sign in again if your last sign-in was a while ago.

Storage that holds when you upload many files at once

When you upload many files at once, each one now counts toward your storage as it lands. A file that no longer fits shows as failed with "Storage limit reached". It is not kept and does not count. Before, a big batch could pass the limit.

A video must be an MP4, MOV or WebM file. Postfjord checks the file itself, and a file that is only named like a video shows as failed and is removed. Another video type gets a message before it uploads.

A font you upload counts toward your storage from the moment the upload starts, and up to five can be on the way up at once.

Your name on your account can be up to 100 characters. Invitations show at most 60 of them.

How it works: Media library.

Safer signup forms and link checks on pages

The labels and button of a signup form on your page get the same check as the rest of the page. A label that asks for a password, a card number or a PIN stops the publish.

When your page has no title for Google, its big heading names the page in shared links. That heading now gets the same check as the title, so a heading like "Instagram Support" stops the publish.

A signup form shows only on your own address. Under another workspace's address it says the form does not exist.

Google is asked about each link once a day, and a workspace can have up to 300 new links checked a day. Past that, the check says so and you publish again the next day.

When you save or remove your Meta Pixel or Google Analytics with many pages, the save no longer runs out of time. Pages it did not reach are named in the message, as before.

A client review link can save up to 300 answers.

How it works: Landing pages.

Ads you can always pause, and safer media

An ad Meta said no to is now checked again until its last day. If Meta says yes later, the post shows Ad: Running within 30 minutes, and you can pause or stop it in Postfjord.

Postfjord's access to your Meta ad account lasts about 60 days. When an ad would end after that day, Start and Resume say so. Press Connect again on the Meta ad account card, then try again. That way Postfjord can always pause your ad.

When a workspace is suspended, its running ads are paused right away, not up to 30 minutes later.

Pressing Start twice on a slow connection can no longer make the same ad twice.

A file you delete while it is still processing stays deleted. Deleting the same file twice at once frees its space once.

A reel that stops part way now shows as failed within the hour, and you can start a new one.

A very long, thin picture can no longer slow down email images, text on images or share pictures.

How it works: Advertise and Media library.

Fixes to the jobs that run by themselves

The nightly statistics now reach every workspace. A night that runs out of time starts with the workspaces it missed the next night.

A shop that sells only through landing pages now gets the No purchase in 90 days tag on buyers, like a Shopify or Stripe shop. See Customer tags.

An owner whose seat the plan paused gets no monthly report email while paused. The switch stays on, and the email comes again once the seat is back. Before, the pause turned it off for good.

A routine you change while it runs keeps your new time, and a routine you switch off then stays off. A workspace can still have 10 routines, also when several are saved at once. Busy hours run their routines sooner.

Bo's Sunday drafts and his look at your edited drafts no longer skip the same workspaces each week.

Stopping a Flow from Bo that never went live, from an AI app or the API, throws it away with its drafts. If going live stopped half way, what it switched on is stopped first. How it works: Flows.

Stop counts in more ways, and automations wait their turn

More ways of saying stop now count. "Please stop sending me these messages" counts at any length, and so do "unsubscribe me", "take me off your list" and "Cancel". On WhatsApp, the Stop promotions button counts too. A comment that says STOP gets no DM from a comment automation. "Thank you, don't contact me again" counts as stop too.

A reply you write in the Instagram or Messenger app pauses automations in that thread, as a reply from the inbox does.

Messages to an account whose connection ran out still arrive in the inbox. The thread says the account needs to be connected again. When you connect an account that ran out in another workspace, it moves here, and its messages arrive only here.

One person can start automations 10 times an hour. A reply to a comment that the hourly cap held back is sent when the cap lifts. A wait or follow-up holds back while another automation waits for the same person to answer.

How it works: Automations.

Say an idea from any screen, then turn it into a post, a carousel, an email or a page

Press the microphone next to New post, or press I on your keyboard, from any screen. Postfjord starts listening at once. Press stop and the idea is saved to Ideas. A note at the bottom says Saved to Ideas, with Undo and Open. You can type in the same box and press Enter instead.

A new idea is a private note unless you pick Team. Only you see a private note, and Bo never reads it. Postfjord remembers your choice on that device.

Open an idea and press Turn into. Next to the three ways to a post you now find Carousel, Email, Landing page and Keep as note or Share with team. Each one makes a draft. Nothing is posted, sent or published until you do it yourself.

On Android and in Chrome on a computer, press and hold the Postfjord icon and pick New idea.

How it works: Ideas.

Faster replies, tags and scheduling

When you reply in the inbox, your message shows in the thread right away while it is sent, and the box is ready for your next words. If it does not go out, the message stays in the thread marked Not sent, with Try again and Edit, so you never lose what you wrote.

Adding a tag, assigning a conversation and closing or reopening it now change on screen the moment you click. If the change does not save, it goes back and the thread says why.

When a post is already saved as a draft, Schedule takes you to the calendar at once. If scheduling then fails, a note at the bottom of the screen says so, and Open post takes you back to the draft. Save draft no longer waits for a second save when the draft is already saved.

Posts and pictures you have opened before show sooner, since Postfjord reads them from this device first and then checks for anything newer.

How it works: Inbox and Composer.

Safer signup forms, domains and campaigns

A signup form that gets more than 200 signups in one hour now pauses for an hour and emails the owner. Then it opens again by itself. If it happens twice in a day, it is switched off as before. One device that keeps trying no longer counts toward the limit, so it cannot stop your form.

If another Postfjord workspace sent from your domain before, or its CNAME records were already in your DNS when you added it, your domain asks for one more DNS record, a TXT record that starts with _postfjord. Only someone who can change your DNS can add it. A domain starts sending only after Postfjord has read its DNS once.

A workspace on Free sends from its Postfjord address. Your own domain stays set up and is used again when you are on a paid plan.

A picture in an email must come from your Media library or Postfjord's photos. The checks name a picture from anywhere else, and the email waits until you pick it again.

When you cancel a campaign while its first small group is still being judged, the group is judged anyway.

A re-permission automation sends its later emails only to people who answered its first one.

A review link is not emailed to an address that bounced or marked our email as spam. You always get the link, so you can send it yourself if the email does not arrive.

How it works: Signup forms, Send from your own domain.

See what your team is designing

The Design page now shows your teammates' designs in progress under Your team is working on. Each card shows the design, who is working on it and when it last changed. It updates by itself while they work.

Only the person who made a design in progress can change or delete it. Pick one and press Make a copy to open your own copy in the editor. Their design stays as it is.

Before, a design in progress was only visible to the person who made it. Now everyone in the workspace can see it, viewers too, like posts and Media. How it works: Design editor.

Taking your account back closes more doors

When you press This was not me in an email about a new sign-in or about two-step verification, Postfjord now also removes any Google sign-in that someone linked under another address than yours. Before, that person could sign in again with it.

When we put your email address back after someone changed it, a two-step code they turned on while the account had their address goes too. The email about it went to them, so you could not have turned it off yourself.

In both cases your calendar feed and your booking address for Other booking system get new addresses within 15 minutes, in every workspace you are in. We email you which ones changed, so you can add the new ones to your calendar app and booking system. How it works: Account.

A password reset now removes your passkeys a second time once every device is signed out, so one added in that moment does not stay. After five reset links in an hour, one address gets at most one more every 10 minutes.

Clearer rules for free months, buying and app limits

Free months for sharing your link. Your free month is now worth one month of the cheaper plan, yours or your friend's. You can get up to 12 free months a year. If your friend gets their payment back, through a withdrawal or their bank, both free months are taken back. Your friends still get their own month as before. How it works: Give a month, get a month.

Start my plan now. To buy a plan, the X add-on or the Keyword pack, tick the box that starts it now. The plan starts the moment you pay, and if you buy as a consumer and withdraw within 14 days, you get back the price minus the days you used. How it works: Plans and billing.

Credit after a refund. Credit left from a switch to a cheaper plan is removed when you withdraw from the plan, or when a plan payment is disputed with the bank. The money already went back to you.

App limits count what was read. The lists apps and AI tools read now count only the records each call read, against the same 250,000 a day per workspace. A short list costs little. How it works: MCP server.

Music on Instagram Reels

A Reel can now have music. Open the Instagram tab of a post, pick Reel as the format and press Add music. The list starts with what is popular on Instagram, and you can search for a song or an artist or pick a sound from other Reels. Play a sample, press Use, and set how loud the music and your video's own sound should be.

Instagram adds the music when it posts the Reel, so the sample in Postfjord is the song alone. Music works for Instagram accounts connected with Facebook. How it works: Composer.

Publishing and suspension fixes

  • The Free plan's 15 posts a month now hold when many posts are sent with Publish now at the same time. A post that fails without going out anywhere gives its place back.
  • A post that went out on one channel and is retried on another counts once, so the retry is never stopped by the monthly limit.
  • Publish now on a post dated later moves its date to now, so a retry happens in minutes and not on the old date.
  • Cancel from the API, MCP or Bo is refused for a post that is already being published, so the answer always matches what happened.
  • In a suspended workspace, a scheduled email whose time comes moves back to a draft, so it never goes out late. Links in sent emails, sign-up forms and client review links stop working until the suspension is lifted.

Bo first in the menu, and a new Automate group

The menu on the left has a new order. Bo is now the first line, right under New post. Automations and Flow have their own group, Automate, after Create. Mentions moved from Inbox to sit under Analytics, since it shows what people say about you elsewhere. Comments stays under Inbox. Ideas is now its own line at the top of Create, since an idea can become a post, an email, a page or a design. Every page has the same address as before.

In the design editor, a saved design's menu now has Schedule a post. It opens a new post with every page of the design, in order, as a carousel.

Safer team changes

When you remove someone from a workspace, more of what they set up stops with them. Invitations they sent that nobody opened yet are revoked, their client review links stop, and an ad account they connected with their own login is disconnected. Running ads are paused first, and each ad says why. Removing someone now asks you to sign in again if you last did it more than 10 minutes ago, as changing a role does.

Client portal links and team alerts keep working, since they are for your clients and your team. When an owner leaves, the portal links they could copy are marked under Settings, Client portal, and alerts they connected say so under Settings, Apps.

You can now close a review link before its 30 days are up: open one of its posts and press Close review link.

A workspace can send 30 invitation emails a day, and a suspended workspace sends none. You can save or delete 3 workspace templates a minute and 30 a day.

When someone deletes their account, every workspace they were in gets the same clean-up, and the seat count stays right.

How it works: Workspaces and members.

Clearer picture limits and a second try for stuck uploads

A picture you upload to the media library can be up to 50 MB. The app now says so before the upload starts, instead of 500 MB for every file. Videos can still be 500 MB and PDFs 100 MB.

Some picture formats take a lot of memory to open, so they now have their own limit: a progressive JPEG up to 26 megapixels, an interlaced PNG up to 52, a WebP up to 39, a GIF up to 22 and an AVIF up to 10. A bigger one shows as failed with a message that says what to do. A standard JPEG or PNG can still be up to 268 megapixels. A very long, thin picture (about eight times wider than tall, or taller than wide) also shows as failed: crop it closer to the shape you will post.

A file that is still processing after six hours now gets one more try by itself. Before, it stayed on processing. If the second try does not work either, the file shows as failed, and you can delete it and upload it again. How it works: Media library.

Dictation shows it hears you, knows your names and keeps what you meant

While you dictate, a small sound wave next to the timer moves when you talk.

Add your studio, teachers and products under Brand voice, Words for dictation, and dictation spells them that way.

Correct yourself while you talk, "at 2, no, 3", and the text says "at 3". Say "number one, number two" and the items come out as a list. Say "new line" and you get one.

Dictation gets your words right more often

Dictate now listens for your workspace's language, the one under Brand voice. Before, it guessed the language, and a short Swedish sentence could come out as nonsense.

It also runs on a larger speech model, so names and fast speech come out right more often. A three minute dictation costs about two cents from the AI budget.

Nothing you dictate gets lost

Your browser keeps the recording until its text is in. If the connection drops, a Try again button shows up next to Dictate, also after a reload. The clock button next to Dictate lists your last ten dictations, so you can add one again.

Send a design to Instagram and other apps

The Share menu in the design editor has a new button on phones: Send to app. It opens your phone's share menu with the page you are looking at, so you can pick Instagram (Post, Story or Reel), TikTok, Messenger or another app. Add music and tags there and post. Nothing is added to Media.

On a computer the same button is Open on phone. It gives you a link to open on your phone. How it works: Design editor.

Download on a phone saves your pictures to Photos

In the design editor, Download on a phone now puts a JPG or PNG in your Photos, as Canva does. Press Download and your phone's share menu opens with one picture for each page, in page order. Tap Save images and they are in Photos. You no longer get a ZIP file in Files.

On a computer, Download works as before: one file, or a ZIP with all pages. A PDF or an MP4 downloads as before everywhere. Nothing is added to Media. How it works: Design editor.

Your designs go in as carousels, and Publish at always shows the time

In Choose media the Uploads and Designs tabs now always show in full, also on a phone. Under Designs each design is one tile with its name and number of pages. Tap it and every page goes into the post, in order, as a carousel. Pick single pages still lets you take just one page. How it works: Composer.

When Write it myself is on, the composer now says so where Bo's brief used to be: "Bo is off because Write it myself is on." Press Turn Bo on to get Bo and the AI buttons back without leaving the post.

A scheduled post opened from the calendar or the queue sometimes showed an empty Publish at field. It now always shows the time the post goes out.

Music on Instagram Reels is open to testers first. A Reel with a song picked goes out without the song if music is not open for the workspace, and the post itself still goes out.

See what works on each channel at a glance

Every card under Settings, Channels now has a short list under its name: posts, Reels, Stories, DMs, comments, analytics and more. A green check means it works today, a yellow clock means it is coming and says why, like Waiting for Meta, and a red cross means it does not work.

The longer texts on the cards are still there. Press Details on a card to read them. Channels explains the marks.

A calmer post editor

The post editor shows less at once. Channels, media, text, the time and the buttons to save, schedule or publish are where they were. The rest now sits under More options, below the text: the link, the link in bio, the video page, Gives and Asks, the pillar, the DM automation and the line about what each channel's tab holds.

Nothing was removed. When More options is closed, a small tag shows each thing you set in it, like DM: Guide or Link: yourstudio.com. When something in there needs a look, it opens by itself.

A few long help lines are shorter too. The full story is on The composer.

Bo plans several posts on one card

Ask Bo for "3 posts for next week" and you get three separate posts on one card. Each post has its own channels and its own picture: a design you saved, or a picture from your library. Bo picks a different day for each, at the times your posts do best, in your workspace's time zone, and never two within an hour of each other on one channel.

Press Approve all to put them in the calendar. Skip leaves a post out, Show text shows every word it sends, and Open takes you to the post. Say "drafts" and they are saved as drafts on their days instead.

Bo can no longer save two posts in one draft, or leave a note like "[Add screenshot]" in a post. When a picture is missing, Bo asks you once or offers one of your designs. How it works: Bo.

Bo reads the help pages before he explains the app

Ask Bo how to do something in Postfjord, like "how do I schedule my posts before a vacation", and he now looks it up in the help pages first. He names the screen and the button the way the help page does and gives you the link. When the help pages do not cover it, he says so instead of guessing. How it works: Manager.

The help pages now also match the new menu: Ideas is the first line under Create and Mentions sits under Analytics. A saved design's Schedule a post and the My designs button in Choose media are described too.

Bo knows your designs

Bo now sees the designs your team saved in Design: each one by name, with its pages, its sizes, who saved it and when. Ask "use the carousel I made in Design and schedule it next Wednesday on Instagram" and Bo puts every page on the post in the order you made them, in the size that fits the channel, and asks for your yes on a card that shows the design's name, its pages and the time.

A design with a missing page is never posted short: Bo tells you which design and how many pages are missing. The media list Bo reads marks which design, page and size a file belongs to, and shows each page once, so the same slide is never attached twice.

Bo can also look at up to four pictures at a time to tell slides apart by what is on them. It counts toward your AI budget like any other answer.

Bo now reads "next Wednesday" from today's date in your workspace time zone, and never puts notes like [Add screenshot] or two posts into one draft. How it works: Manager.

Refunds and cancellations count in more cases

A Shopify refund now comes off your numbers even when Shopify no longer lets Postfjord into the store. Postfjord then uses the amount in the refund itself. A store connected through the Postfjord app also keeps its connection when nothing happens in it for months. How it works: Shopify.

A post to X that failed and is tried again after the X add-on has ended is no longer sent. Add X again under Account, then press Retry.

If you cancel your plan, the cancellation always counts, also when Stripe sends it in the same second as another change.

Bo shows every word before you approve, and apps get clearer limits

Cards show everything that changes. When Bo asks before something goes out, the card now holds every word in full: the whole post, each account's own text, its hashtags and first comment, every reply a running automation gives, and each field of your brand profile or content strategy. Before, long text was cut after a few lines and some parts were not on the card at all. Switching on an email automation lists each email by its subject.

Old cards refuse instead of guessing. A card to switch on an email automation refuses when one of its emails was edited after the card was made. So does a card to launch or throw away a Flow that changed since, and a card for last week's pillar suggestion. Ask Bo again and you get a card for what is there now.

Bo opens only links you wrote. Bo reads a page, copies a picture or writes posts from a blog link only when you wrote that link yourself, in the chat or in a routine you saved. A link that comes from a page, a message, a comment or an email is never opened, also when a routine runs on its own.

A time says its time zone. Apps and AI apps that schedule a post give the time with its offset, for example 2026-11-02T09:00:00-05:00. A time without one is refused, so a post meant for 9 in the morning never goes out at 5.

Publish again works. An AI app that publishes a page again after a change, or schedules an email again after you cancelled and edited it, now does it. Before, the second request within 10 minutes came back with the first answer and changed nothing.

Limits for apps. The lists apps read share an allowance of 250,000 records a day per workspace, and a page of posts or media holds at most 200. Email drafts from a brief and drafted Inbox replies have a per-minute limit per workspace.

Connected AI apps. An app you use every day is no longer forgotten after 90 days. An app Postfjord does not know cannot call itself Claude, ChatGPT, Gemini or Postfjord: it is shown as "An MCP app".

What Bo remembers. Saving Edit as text keeps a line Bo or a teammate added while the box was open. If a line in the box was changed somewhere else, nothing is saved and you are told why.

Fairer limits on AI and photo tools

Each AI call now sets a few cents of the monthly AI budget aside while it runs. When calls already running hold the rest of the budget, a new one asks you to try again in a minute. Very long texts sent to Claude are cut to a sensible length first. More in Plan and AI budget.

Dictation measures the sound itself. A recording longer than three minutes is turned down, and so is a voice message to us longer than two.

The website scan for your brand kit works three times a minute and 20 times a day per workspace. Remove background, Magic eraser and its picking work up to 500 times a day per workspace. A picture from the image editor counts toward your plan's design pictures for the day.

AI video stops a shot at the model before it gives your money back, and charges each shot once.

The help assistant now reads only the parts of the help pages that fit your question, so answers come faster.

A new workspace starts on the dashboard

After you create a workspace you now land on the dashboard, whatever goal you picked. The Get started checklist shows the order: connect a channel, set your brand voice, then the first thing for your goal. Collect contacts gives a step for your first page, Send email one for your first email, and the button opens the templates. Before, Collect contacts and Sell something opened an empty Pages screen. How it works: Getting started.

A zoom slider and page buttons in the design editor

The zoom at the bottom right of the design editor has a slider from 10 to 500 percent, and its menu has 125, 75 and Fill, as in Canva.

Above the top right corner of the page sit Lock page, Duplicate page and Add page, and a bar under the page adds a page too. Taking the page lock off leaves what you locked one by one locked. How it works: Design editor.

Make one word bold, italic or another color

In the design editor you can now style some words of a text and leave the rest as it is, as in Canva. Double click the text, pick the words, and press Bold, Italic or the color in the bar. Cmd+B and Cmd+I work while you type, and Cmd+Z takes the last style back. With no words picked, Bold, Italic and the color are for the next letters you type, so you can write the next word in bold. Before, these buttons always changed the whole text. Click the text once, without typing, and they still do. On a phone the text's color changes the whole text, words colored on a computer too. The weight under Spacing changes the whole text the same way. The saved picture shows the words the way the page does. How it works: Design editor.

Keep typing while you change the size or font

While you type in the design editor, the size, the font, capitals, how the lines line up, List and Spacing in the bar no longer stop your typing. They change the whole text, and their names say so. In a square or circle you just added, you can set the size and the font before the first letter.

Pick several texts, or a group of them, and the bar shows the font, the size, the color, bold and italic for all of them. Pick several shapes and it shows one fill for all.

Font combinations in the Text panel have a search box: type sale or Playfair to find one. How it works: Design editor.

Make any text in a template as big or as small as you want

In the design editor, the size you pick is now the size the text gets, from 8 to 400. Use - and + in the bar, type a number, or drag a corner of the text. Before, text in some templates shrank to fit its box and would not grow past it. Now it stops shrinking and grows with its lines. To turn shrinking on again, open Spacing and set Shrink text to fit to Shrink. How it works: Design editor.

Underline, lists and stroke styles in the design editor

Texts in the design editor have Underline and Strikethrough, for the whole text or for words you pick while typing. Cmd+U underlines. List puts a bullet or a number before each line you start with Enter. Cmd+B, Cmd+I and Cmd+U on several texts make them all the same.

A shape's Stroke style draws its line solid, in long or short dashes or in dots, and sets how thick it is. A new line gets a color that stands out from the shape.

The saved picture shows all of it the way the page does. How it works: Design editor.

Type where you click, and new text that grows as you type

Click a picked text in the design editor to type, and the cursor lands where you clicked. The first key no longer wipes the text, and a double click picks a word.

Add a text box sits at the top of the Text panel. A new text lands in the middle of the page with its words picked, so yours take their place. It stays on one line and grows wider as you type, then wraps before the edge of the page. Drag a side to make the lines wrap sooner.

Click the size to pick from a list of common sizes, and - and + change it by 1. Spacing has letter spacing from -200 to 800 and line height from 0.5 to 2.5, as in Canva. How it works: Design editor.

Colors open on the left in the design editor

Every color button in the design editor opens the Color panel on the left, as in Canva: for a text, words you picked, a shape's fill and line, an icon and the page.

Search for a color by name, like blue, or by its code. The panel shows the colors your design uses, your brand colors, a grid of 28 default colors and, for shapes and the page, a few gradients. The + gives you any color: drag in the square, slide along the colors or type the code. In Chrome and Edge a dropper picks a color from anywhere on your screen.

Press Escape, the X or the same button again to close the panel. The tool you had open before comes back. How it works: Design editor.

A new Share menu in the design editor

Share in the design editor now opens Share design: round buttons for Save, New post, Email, Landing page, Advertise on Meta, Download and Copy picture.

Download has its own view. Pick the file type from a list that says what each one is for, then the pages, the size in pixels and a see-through background for a PNG. Under the Download button, Post it straight from Postfjord opens a new post with the design.

On the Free plan a download is the design's own size and never see-through. A crown marks those two, and a card shows what the paid plans add. Every paid plan downloads up to three times the size. How it works: Design editor.

Older clips and songs play, and Undo shows its page

A few fixes in the design editor. Clips and music you uploaded long ago play again in a video. Before, a song older than your newest files could show as "Music no longer in Media". Undo and Redo now go to the page they change, so you see what comes back. Remove background, Make captions and the Magic eraser are each one step for Undo, and they no longer stop you while you type or crop. If the clip changed while captions were made, the editor says so and adds nothing. How it works: Design editor.

Position, Layers and Font open on the left in the design editor

Position opens on the left in the design editor, with two tabs. Arrange has the layer order, lining up with the page, and the width, height, place and turn, with a lock that keeps the shape. With several layers picked they line up with each other, and X and Y move them together.

Layers is the other tab. It shows a small picture of each layer, and pointing at a row outlines that layer on the page. Overlapping shows only what lies over or under the layer you picked.

Font has two tabs, Font and Text styles, and the fonts your design uses come first. Effects for a shape or a photo open on the left too. How it works: Design editor.

Upload photos straight from the design editor

Photos in the design editor now has Upload at the top. Pick photos from your computer or phone and they go to Media and onto the page in one step. A photo you click or upload comes in small, in its own shape, and you drag its handles to make it bigger. Drag a photo to the edge of the page to make it fill the page. "Text does not fit" no longer shows on text that is drawn in full, which happened after a font loaded late or a curved text got longer. How it works: Design editor.

Adjust for photos, and a bar on one line

Adjust replaces Filters for photos in the design editor. You get the seven filters plus Temperature, Tint, Brightness, Contrast, Highlights, Shadows, Whites, Blacks, Vibrance, Saturation, Sharpness, Clarity and Vignette, each from -100 to 100, with Auto-adjust and Reset adjustments. Photos you adjusted before look the same.

A photo you click in the Photos panel comes in at about four fifths of the page's width, and a photo you drag can hang over the edge.

When the bar at the top has more tools than fit, the last ones go into ... at its end, so the bar stays on one line. How it works: Design editor.

Every setting of a layer in one bar, as in Canva

The design editor has no panel on the right anymore. Everything you can change about what you picked is in the bar over the top of the page, so the page gets more room.

  • A text has Spacing for the weight, the line height, the letter spacing and Shrink text to fit, and a button for capitals. Text in a template shows how many letters fit, and the bar says when a text does not fit.
  • A photo has Filters for brightness, contrast, color and the seven filters.
  • One layer has Position, to line it up with the page or type its place, size and turn.
  • Layers and Sizes are tools on the left, like the rest. With nothing picked, the bar has Layers and Keyboard.

How it works: Design editor.

Lines and text in shapes in the design editor

Lines in Shapes, and the L key, add a real line. Drag either end to put it anywhere, and hold Shift for steps of 45 degrees. The bar sets its color, solid, dashed or dotted, its weight and rounded ends. Each end can get an arrow, a triangle, a circle, a square, a diamond or a bar, and Swap line ends turns them round. The line can run straight, elbowed or curved, and Position gives it a length and a weight.

Click a picked shape again to type in it, or press R or C for a square or circle that is ready for your words. They sit in the middle and wrap at its sides, and the shape grows taller when they need room.

The saved picture draws both exactly as the page shows them. How it works: Design editor.

Canva's keys and menus in the design editor

Press T in the design editor to add a text that is ready to type in. R adds a square, C a circle and L a line. Hold Alt while you drag a layer to drag a copy, and Cmd+Enter adds a page.

Right-click a layer for Layer, with the layer order and Show layers, and for Line up with the page. Right-click an empty part of the page for Copy style, Paste, Duplicate page and Add page. Alt+1 shows the layers.

The small menu over what you picked starts with Group for several layers and Ungroup for a group. Duplicate, lock, delete and More live there now. Transparency goes from 0 to 100 for every layer, and Cmd+] and Cmd+ work on Swedish and German keyboards too. How it works: [Design editor.

Circles stay round, and the page background stays put

A circle in the design editor stays a circle when you drag a corner, and becomes an oval from a side. A corner keeps the shape of a photo or a shape too, as in Canva. Hold Shift to stretch it freely.

A drag across the page no longer picks the photo that fills it, or a gradient, pattern or texture behind everything, so Delete never takes your background along. A click on that gradient, pattern or texture picks the page. A plain color picked for the page replaces any of them.

Right-click a photo for Set image as background. Right-click several layers for Line up with each other. A text's side now snaps to the page and other layers. A photo with Sharpness below 0 no longer gets a pale edge in the saved picture. How it works: Design editor.

Picking, turning and moving in the design editor work like Canva

Click the gray around the page to pick nothing, and the bar goes away. Click an empty part of the page to pick the page: it gets a frame, and the bar shows the background, the size and the keys.

The round handle for turning sits under the layer, and the small menu sits just above it. At the bottom of the screen the handle moves above the layer. A short text keeps its side handles, a little smaller. A thin layer, like a line, also gets a Move handle.

While you drag a handle, a label by the pointer shows the size, like w: 499 h: 554, or the turn, like -45°. Click a group, then one part of it, to pick just that part. Several layers picked at once get a dashed frame, and the lines that show where a layer snaps are pink. How it works: Design editor.

Crop photos like you do on your phone

Crop in the design editor now works the way it does in Canva or in Photos on a Mac. Drag a corner or an edge of the frame to cut the photo, and the photo stays where it is. Pick a shape like Square, 4:5 or 9:16 and the frame takes it at once. Rotate turns the photo inside the frame to make a horizon level, and the photo grows just enough to keep the frame full. 90° and the flip buttons are there too. A grid helps you place things, and the rest of the page goes dark so you see what you keep. Done or Enter keeps the crop, Cancel or Escape puts the photo back. It works on photos in a shape and on a photo that fills the page as well. How it works: Design editor.

Crop tools in the panel on the left

On a computer, the crop tools in the design editor now open in the panel on the left, as in Canva. The shapes show as small cards, and Zoom, Rotate, 90°, the flips and Start over sit under them, with Cancel and Done at the bottom. Nothing covers the photo while you crop. The tool you had open comes back after Done or Cancel, and your zoom on the page stays as it was. Escape in the Rotate or Zoom number only leaves the number, and Enter after a click on a crop button means Done. On a phone the crop tools stay in the bar under the page.

A word in its own color, weight or slant now has the same space around it as the other words in the text. How it works: Design editor.

Buttons with more depth

The main buttons in Postfjord now have depth: a soft fjord tone from light to dark, a faint shine on top and a shadow under them, in the light and the dark theme. In the dark theme they keep white text and get a thin light edge, so they stand out on the dark background.

Anyone can sign up

The waitlist is gone. Create an account, confirm your email and make your first workspace straight away, on the Free plan with no card.

A few parts are marked In testing while the platforms review them: posting to Facebook Pages and to Instagram through a Page, comments on accounts connected with Instagram only, and YouTube. To post to Instagram today, connect it with the Instagram only card.

See which channel your followers are on

The Followers card on the home screen now shows each channel's mark and name, such as Instagram or Facebook, under the account name. When several accounts have the same name, you can still tell them apart at a glance.

Delete your own reply to a comment

Under each reply your team posted to a comment, in Inbox, Comments, there is now Delete reply. It removes the reply on Instagram or Facebook and in Postfjord. The comment stays, and with no reply left it shows under Unanswered again. How it works: Inbox.

Held-back messages, notes on app drafts, the weekly summary and old privacy policies

  • Automations show Held back when messages did not go out right away. All numbers now says why: slowed down by the sending limit, later steps skipped, or repeat comments from someone already answered. See Automations.
  • Drafts made by another app now say so when you open them: a note tells you an app made the draft with your API key (for example Zapier, Make or n8n) or an AI app made it (for example ChatGPT, Claude or Gemini), so you read it before you schedule it.
  • Weekly summary: Monday's email now lists up to three posts that did better than usual last week. See Posts that did better than usual.
  • Privacy Policy: every version is now kept. The version of 20 October 2026 is at postfjord.com/privacy/2026-10-20.

An email when someone becomes an owner

When someone becomes an owner of a workspace, or stops being one, Postfjord now emails that person and every other owner of the workspace. The email says who made the change and what owners can do: connect channels and ad accounts, invite and remove people, change the plan and delete the workspace.

If nobody on your team made the change, open Settings, Members, change the role back and write to hello [at] postfjord.com. How roles work: Workspaces and members.

Bookings get their own box on Home and show in the calendar

Home has a new Bookings box under At a glance. It tells you how many new bookings came in since you last looked, marks each new one, and lists the latest bookings with the time and who booked.

The calendar now shows your bookings and your emails on their days, next to your posts and notes. A booking opens the conversation with the person who booked, and an email opens the email or its report. How it works: Count your bookings and Bookings and emails in the calendar.

People who book become contacts

When someone books through Calendly, Cal.com, Acuity or your own booking system and is not a contact yet, Postfjord now adds them as a contact with their name, email address and the tag Booked. Before, the booking was counted but the person was not kept.

They have not said yes to your emails, so they get no newsletters or email automations from you until they confirm. Addresses that unsubscribed, bounced or were blocked are never added. You can turn it off under Settings, Apps, with Turn off next to People who book become contacts. How it works: Count your bookings.

The Advertise window shows the cost like a receipt

The last step of Advertise now lists your choices like a receipt, with the most the ad can cost at the bottom in large numbers. The start button says the amount too, for example Start ad · max $70, and the ad account it is paid from sits next to it. Three short lines say what is safe: the card is your own, nothing is charged before Meta approves the ad, and you can stop it any time.

The title and the close button stay at the top while you scroll, and the buttons stay at the bottom. On a phone the window rises from the bottom of the screen.

When Facebook has not yet allowed Postfjord to advertise posts from your Page, the window now says so and shows three steps to connect again, instead of saying the ad account was lost. How it works: Advertise a post.

Ads now name who they promote and who pays for them, as EU law asks of every ad shown in the EU. Meta refused ads without it. A Facebook Page post that Meta would only read with the Page's own key is now checked with it, so it can be advertised.

Connect your ad account again without leaving the app

The Meta ad account card under Channels has a Connect again button. Use it when Facebook needs a new yes, for example after a box was left unticked. You no longer have to disconnect first, and running ads keep going.

In the Postfjord app on your computer or phone, Facebook now opens in the same window and brings you back to where you pressed Connect. Before, it could open in another browser profile, where the ad account could not be picked. How it works: Advertise a post.

The review link shows everything your client approves

  • Each post on the review link now shows every picture, the link, and for each channel its own hashtags, first comment, title, pictures, format, link and settings, such as who can watch on YouTube and TikTok. An approval covers all of it, so your client sees all of it.
  • A channel you switched off for a post is no longer listed on the link.
  • Approve all lists each post with its first picture, its channels, how many pictures it has and more of its text, so your client can tell the posts apart before pressing Yes.
  • The email about your client's answers no longer says a held post goes out as planned when they answered through an older link. It says the answer changes nothing on the post.
  • Picking a brand voice template keeps the website you saved or scanned.

Comments on each post in a client review

  • Each post on a review link now has a comment thread. Your client writes a comment or a question under the post, with no account.
  • You see the thread on the post in Postfjord, under Comments on the review. Anyone who can edit posts replies there, and your client sees the reply on the same link.
  • What your client writes with Ask for changes shows in the thread too.
  • Their comments go in the same email as their answers. Your replies send them no email.
  • A comment never approves a post or lets a held post go out. Only Approve does that.
  • When you send a post for review again, your client comments on it on the newest link. The older link keeps the earlier comments to read.
  • A comment is plain text up to 1,000 characters, a post can have 50 comments on a review, and a link can write 20 comments in 10 minutes.
  • How it works: Send posts to a client for review.

One email about your client's answers

  • When your client answers posts on a review link, you now get one email about all their answers, not one email for each post.
  • The email goes about 10 minutes after their last answer, or about 30 minutes after their first if they keep answering.
  • It lists the posts they approved, then the posts they asked to change, with what they wrote.
  • For a held post it says what happens next: it goes out at its time, it needs a new time, or Retry sends it to the other channels.
  • If they ask to change a post that goes out soon, or approve a held post that goes out soon, the email comes before that post's time.
  • Each post in the email shows its text, or its channels and time when it has no text, and a link that opens it.
  • The post in Calendar still shows the answer at once. How it works: Send posts to a client for review.

Clear reason when a Facebook Page has messages turned off

  • When a comment automation on Facebook cannot send its DM because messages are turned off for the Page, Failed now says so and tells you how to turn them on. Before, it only said that Meta did not accept the message.
  • Failed also says when the public reply under the comment was sent.
  • A private reply you send from the comments inbox gives the same explanation.

Brand voice shows four clear ways to start

  • Settings, Brand voice now asks How do you want to start? with four choices: Write it yourself, From your posts, From your website and From a template. Writing it yourself is picked from the start, because your own words work best.
  • Each choice opens only what it needs: one button for your posts, an address field for your website, a list of business types for a template.
  • The language of your posts has its own place at the top, apart from the four choices.
  • A draft shows a green note with what was read and what it cost. Nothing is saved until you press Save.
  • A profile that starts from your business type's template says so and has a Clear and write my own button.
  • See Brand voice.

Your client can approve all posts at once

  • When two or more posts wait for an answer, the review link shows Approve all above and below the posts. Your client sees the list of posts by date and presses Yes to approve them.
  • Each post is approved as your client saw it. A post you changed while their page was open is not approved, and the page tells them to look at the new version.
  • A post your client already answered, such as one they asked to change, keeps its answer.
  • One link can use Approve all 20 times. After that the button is gone and your client approves each post on its own. Reloading the result page does not use it again.
  • You hear about the approvals in one email with the rest of their answers. How it works: Send posts to a client for review.

More fixes in the design editor

  • Dragging a corner or a side handle past the opposite edge, with the shape kept, stops at the smallest size. Before, a photo or a group of layers could shrink to a dot or fly off the page.
  • A text size you type is kept for the text you typed it for, even when you click another layer right after.
  • After you drag a slider, Undo, Redo and Delete work at once, without a click on the page first.
  • Scrolling in the More menu scrolls the menu, not the page.
  • Escape closes the Share menu and leaves your selection alone.
  • Shadows, patterns and photo frames keep their size in the main size when you change a colour in another size.
  • Duplicate page keeps the page colour that follows your brand.
  • Grouping layers that were already in a group no longer leaves a group with one layer.
  • Distribute keeps the first and last layer in place when a wide layer holds a smaller one.
  • Downloading a picture that is still being saved says so instead of showing a general error.

Start a new client from a copy or a template

A new workspace can now start as a copy of one you own. Pick what comes along: the brand voice, the strategy, DM and email automations, email and design templates, Flow drafts, saved replies and tags. Everything arrives switched off or as a draft, so nothing is sent until you turn it on.

Accounts, contacts, messages, numbers, media, members and API keys never come along, and neither do email addresses or links to the old client's website and pages. The new client connects their own accounts and adds their own logo and colors. Email starts off in the copy, even when it was on in the old workspace, since Postfjord switches email on by hand for each business.

You can also save a workspace as a named template under Settings, General, Templates and copies, and start each new client from it. A template holds no personal data and stays with your account when the workspace is deleted. If a long list did not fit, Postfjord tells you what was left out. How it works: Workspace templates and copies.

Vintage stickers from museums

Stickers in the design editor has a new set called Vintage. It holds about 80 old pictures from The Metropolitan Museum of Art, the Smithsonian and the Rijksmuseum: birds, flowers, butterflies, shells, teacups, fans, frames and flower patterns. Most have no background, so they sit right on your design. Every picture is public domain, and you can search them in English or in Swedish. How it works: Stickers.

67 video templates in the design editor

The design editor's start screen now has video templates, for every kind of business.

  1. 67 videos, from 7 to 15 seconds, in story, wide and square sizes.
  2. They come in 30 moving looks. Words slam in, a number counts up, a price drops, a flip clock ticks down, a coupon tears, polaroids drop onto a pile, a film strip rolls, a chat types out, a poll fills and stars light up for a review.
  3. Pick the video picture next to Kind to see only videos. A card plays when you rest the pointer on it.
  4. Use template opens it as a video in the editor. Change the words and photos, then press Save video for the MP4.
  5. In any video, a word or photo you change on a page now changes on the next pages too, where they still showed the same thing. Pages you changed yourself keep their own.

Video templates show where video is open for your workspace.

How it works: Design editor.

126 templates for eight kinds of business

There are now 126 templates, 50 more than before. For you knows eight kinds of business: shops, studios and fitness, cafes and restaurants, hair and beauty, trades and services, creators, coaches and events. Trades, coaches and events got their own templates for the first time, like a hiring post, open slots this week, a free first call and a party program. Four new looks let the photo carry the post: a photo with a short caption, a photo in an arch, a photo in a wide white border and two photos laid over each other. How it works: Start from a template.

362 templates in 79 looks

There are now 362 templates, up from 126. Every kind of business got more: shops, studios and fitness, cafes and restaurants, hair and beauty, trades, creators, coaches, events and the ones for everyone. They use 40 new looks, so a post can look like a coupon, a receipt, a price tag, a ticket stub, a calendar page, a map pin, a chalkboard menu, a text chat, a lock screen, a poll, a question box, a scrapbook page or a handwritten note. Each one has English and Swedish words with real prices, times and dates, and a name in all six languages. With no website in your brand, words like "Apply at" now read "Apply via link in bio". A double click on a template's text lets you type again; before, the keys were lost until you closed the editor. How it works: Start from a template.

Templates from All templates keep their fonts

A template you open from All templates now keeps its own look in the editor. Heading font and Body font in the font list name the fonts the text is in, and picking one no longer switches the text to your brand font. The colors at the top of each color list are the template's own too. Press Apply brand to give it your colors and fonts, as before. How it works: Start from a template.

Template fixes and search by look

Seven of the new template looks now hold up in every size. The halftone and magazine cover looks work as a story or reel cover. The circled number keeps its label in 16:9. The giant word in a story no longer loses half its letters or leaves an empty band. The sticker board fills the whole story. A chat keeps its headline in a square post, a lock screen shows all three notifications there, and the poll sticker no longer covers the question. Search also knows what each template looks like, so chalk finds the chalkboards and poll finds the polls. How it works: Start from a template.

Click through the hole in a ring

In the design editor, a shape, an icon or a hand-drawn line is now picked where it is drawn, not anywhere in its box. Click the hole of a ring, the empty corner of an icon or the middle of a hand-drawn circle, and you pick the text or photo under it. A photo cut to a circle or a heart is picked inside that shape. A thin line can still be picked a few pixels off. Once a layer is picked, you can drag it from anywhere in its box, as before.

Apply brand reads the page the same way: a text inside a ring takes the color that reads on the page under it, not on the ring.

Saving a design with blurred photos and soft shadows is faster now, and a blurred photo in the saved picture keeps its color right to its edges. Before, it faded to a pale band at the edge.

Stickers on a phone

On a phone, Add in the design editor now has Stickers. It opens every sticker set with the same search as on a computer, and a tap puts the sticker in the middle of the page. How it works: On a phone.

30 looks under All templates

Under All templates each template shows in one of 30 looks instead of 12. There is cream with a serif, black and neon, pastel pink, earthy terracotta, bold red, calm sage, black and gold, candy colors, retro 70s, ocean blue, a wedding script, bright colors for kids, a western saloon, pixel arcade and more. Press Apply brand on any of them to give it your colors and fonts. When your heading font is handwritten, template headlines stay in normal letters, since script in capitals is hard to read. How it works: Start from a template.

363 new stickers in the design editor

Stickers in the design editor has three new groups. 3D emoji gives you 222 round, shiny emoji, like hearts, stars, gifts, arrows, food and faces. Pictures for your business has 108 drawings we picked by hand for shops, studios and gyms, food and drink, hair and beauty, trades, creators, coaches and events, plus Christmas, Easter, Halloween, Valentine's Day and the seasons. Doodles has 33 drawings of people dancing, reading, running and more. Search finds them by name in English, and a kind of business like shop or food shows its pictures. How it works: Stickers.

More than 15,000 icons in the design editor

Icons in the design editor now come in more styles. Under Shapes, the menu above Search icons picks one: Phosphor with lines, filled or two tones, Tabler with lines or filled, and Google Material Symbols, rounded, with lines or filled. A style loads the first time you pick it. Search finds an icon by its name or a word that describes it, and common Swedish words work too. Every icon takes your brand colors, and the saved picture and video look the same as the page. How it works: Shapes and icons.

Device, paper, letter and retro frames

Frames in the design editor has more to choose from, in groups:

  • Devices: a laptop, a desktop screen, a tablet and a phone with a home button, light or dark. Your photo goes on the screen.
  • Paper: torn edges at the top, at the bottom or all round, a deckled edge and a taped photo.
  • Nature: a daisy, a leaf, a cloud, a sun and a drop.
  • Blobs: six new soft shapes.
  • Letters and numbers: A to Z and 0 to 9. Put a photo in each letter to spell a word.
  • Retro: a gold oval, a gold frame, film strips with 3 or 4 photos and a contact sheet.

Each one shows a small fjord until you drop a photo on it, and the saved picture looks the same as the editor. Search frames finds one in English or Swedish. How it works: Frames.

Over 220 free fonts in the design editor

The font list in the design editor has 113 new free fonts, so there are now over 220 to pick from. There are tall narrow fonts for big headlines, fine serifs and magazine serifs, brush and pen scripts, round and chunky fonts, and retro fonts like pixel, neon, western and typewriter. Each one sits under its type: Modern, Elegant, Bold, Playful, Handwritten or Retro. Search finds them by name or by a word like condensed, slab, brush or pixel. How it works: Pick a font.

Meta approved reach, insights, Instagram only and Threads

Meta approved more of what Postfjord asked for. Here is what you get today:

  • Reach and insights. Analytics shows reach per day and profile views for Instagram and Facebook.
  • The Instagram only card is open to everyone. Connect an Instagram account without a Facebook Page and post, schedule and answer DMs from Postfjord. Comments on this card still wait for Meta.
  • Threads is open to everyone. Connect it on the Threads card and post or schedule.
  • Comments in the inbox. Comments from Facebook Pages and from Instagram accounts connected through Facebook come into the inbox, and you can answer them there.

Did you connect Instagram or Facebook before today? Press Reconnect on each account under Channels. Then the new permissions reach your account.

Posting to a Facebook Page, and to Instagram through the Instagram + Facebook card, waits for Meta's next review. Post to Instagram with the Instagram only card until then.

One AI app for all your clients

When you connect ChatGPT, Claude or another AI app with a sign-in, you can now let it work in all your workspaces. Tick the new box on the Postfjord screen, under what the app may do. Agencies with one workspace per client then ask one chat things like "which clients have empty days next week?" or "draft next week's posts for each restaurant client".

The app gets one summary of every workspace: days with nothing scheduled in the next 7 days, posts that failed and posts waiting for a client's approval. It works in the workspaces where you are an owner, and in each it may do what you picked. The first time it works in a workspace, that workspace's owners get an email, and they can revoke it there under Settings, Apps. Revoke it in the workspace you connected it in and it stops everywhere, and shows as revoked in every workspace it worked in.

A key you paste still works in one workspace. To give an app you connected before the new box, connect it again. How it works: Work across your workspaces.

Illustrations, people and little extras in Stickers

Stickers in the design editor has three new sets. Illustrations has about 100 bright drawings, like a cafe, a farm, rooms of a home, food, pets and Christmas. People on the move has 33 colorful people walking, talking and sitting, from Humaaans by Pablo Stanley. Little extras has about 80 fun bits from Kenney: speech bubbles, faces, thumbs up, gold sparkles, check marks, stars and arrows. All of them are free to use, and you can search them in English or in Swedish. How it works: Stickers.

Hand-drawn arrows, circles and highlighters

Under Shapes there is a new group, Hand drawn: 47 lines that look drawn with a pen. There are arrows that curve and loop, lines under a word, circles around a word, brackets, stars, sparkles, hearts, boxes, checks and crosses, wavy lines and highlighter strokes. Each one takes your brand colors, and the pen gets thicker when you make it bigger. Search by name in English or Swedish. How it works: Shapes and icons.

Video clips, captions and a cover in design videos

A page of a design video can now play a video of your own. Press Clip in the timeline, pick a video from Media or upload an MP4 or MOV, and pick where it starts. The page is as long as the clip, and a shorter page cuts the end. Fill or fit the page, keep the clip's sound or turn it off, and continue a long video on the next page.

Captions writes down what is said in the clip, with the moment of every word. Fix any word, then pick one of four looks: Highlight, One word, Box or Pop in, in your brand's colors and fonts, at the top, middle or bottom. On a 9:16 video they stay clear of the buttons Reels, TikTok and Shorts put on top. The saved video has them burned in, the same as the editor shows. Making captions uses the AI allowance, a little for each minute of sound.

Cover picks the picture at the playhead as the video's cover in Media, and Instagram Reels and TikTok use it when the video is posted. Videos are open to testers first. How it works: Video clips and Captions.

More fonts, looks, stickers and backgrounds in the design editor

The design editor got a lot more to choose from today.

  1. Fonts: over 220 fonts in the picker, up from about 110. New ones include condensed and heavy headline fonts, fine serifs, scripts and brush fonts, and retro fonts like pixel, neon and typewriter. Search for a style word like slab, script or pixel to find them.
  2. Template looks: templates now come in 30 looks, up from 12. Each look has its own colors and its own headline font, like black and gold, candy colors, 70s retro, ocean blue, Scandi or a 50s diner. When a headline font is handwritten, capital letters become normal letters so the text stays easy to read.
  3. Stickers: 363 new stickers in three groups. 3D emoji, pictures for your kind of business and the seasons, and doodles of people.
  4. Backgrounds: gradients can have a middle color or a soft glow. Any filled shape can get a grain, paper or speckle texture. There are two new patterns, confetti and halftone dots, and seven edge shapes like waves, hills and torn paper.

How it works: Design editor.

30 real textures for page backgrounds

Under Photos a new Textures button shows 30 real textures: white paper, brown kraft paper, cardboard, linen, burlap, felt, plaster and concrete. Click one and it fills the page behind your text and shapes. They come from ambientCG and Poly Haven, and you may use them in your posts at no cost. How it works: Photos.

A shorter start, a template feed and 97 new free photos in the design editor

The Design page starts with a shorter top: the sizes and From a photo are small tiles in one row. Under the categories every template is now in rows of the same height that you scroll down, and under All templates each one shows in its own colors and fonts, so you see many styles. Apply brand in the editor gives a template your colors and fonts. Templates no longer place your logo or name: add your logo under Logo where you want it. An empty frame shows a small fjord picture where the photo goes. The free photos under Photos have 97 new ones, and you can show only the ones for your kind of business, like Food and drink or Trades. How it works: Start from a template.

Soft glows, paper textures, halftone and wave edges in the design editor

Backgrounds in the design editor can look like more than one flat color. A gradient can have a middle color, so it runs through three colors, and the new Soft glow lets two colors glow from the corners over the fill. Under Gradients and patterns there are gradients in three of your brand colors, five new ones for anyone, and a new Textures row with Grain, Paper and Speckles. Shapes get the same: a Texture under Fill, and two new patterns, Confetti and Halftone. Shapes has a new group, Edges and waves, with seven edges that go across the whole page. The saved picture looks the same as the page. How it works: Textures.

Hold posts until the client approves

When you send posts for review, Hold posts until the client approves keeps each post back until your client approves it. It is ticked already in a workspace with more than one member. Until the client approves, the post is marked Held in Calendar, and Publish now refuses it too.

If you change a post after the approval, it is held again until the client approves the new version. A new time keeps the approval.

If the post's time comes before the answer, it does not go out. It becomes a draft on the same day and you get one email. Once the client approves, pick a new time. To let a post go without their answer, an owner opens it and presses Stop holding.

Your client can also press I trust you, no need to wait for my approval from now on on their review link. Then new reviews hold nothing, the app says who turned approval off and when, and whoever sent the review gets an email. Posts that already wait still wait for their approval. An owner can turn approval back on in Send for review. How it works: Send posts to a client for review.

AI video from your own people and places

AI video is a new row under Design. Save a person, a place or a product once, from Media or made with AI from a description. A campaign picks which of them its videos show, with its brand colors and a product photo.

Write an idea and Claude writes 2 to 4 short shots that name your pictures, so the same person and place appear in every shot. Change any shot, pick Seedance 2.0 Fast or the cheaper Kling 3.0 Standard, and see the price before you press Start. Each clip lands in Media, a bad shot can be made again alone, and Join into one video puts the shots together for a Reel.

Everything is paid from the monthly AI budget, only for what gets made, with at most $20 a day per workspace. Open to the Founder plan first. How it works: AI video.

All your workspaces on one page

If you post for several businesses, All workspaces shows them side by side: what goes out today, what waits for the client to approve, what failed, the unread chats and how the month stands against your strategy's rhythm. Press a number and that screen opens in the right workspace.

It lists the workspaces where you are an owner or editor. The ones where you are a viewer stay off the page. Failed counts the same posts as the Failed tab in Posts, and Waiting for approval counts only posts the client can still answer.

You find it under the workspace switcher in the menu, and as a widget on Home that you can move or hide like the others, once you are an owner or editor in two or more workspaces. How it works: All workspaces on one page.

Held posts count right on All workspaces and in the AI overview

A post held until your client approves it does not go out at its time, so All workspaces no longer counts it in Going out today or in this month's planned posts. When a held post went out on some channels before it was held, it now counts under Waiting for approval while the client's review link still works. If the client asked for changes, or the link was closed or ran out, the next step is yours, so it is not counted as waiting for them.

The workspace overview your AI app reads works the same way. A held post leaves its day empty, and a held post that went out on some channels counts as a pending review or as changes asked for, not as a failed post. Once its review link has closed or run out, it counts as failed again, since the team has to act on it. How it works: All workspaces on one page.

Agency branding on the review link and the report

Agencies can now put their own name and logo next to the client's. Add your agency once under Account, Agency branding: a name, a logo, an accent colour and an address for replies.

Then choose per client workspace. With Prepared by on, the review link, the review email, the monthly PDF report and its email show the client's brand with your agency's name and logo beside it. Replies to a review email go to your address once it is verified: your sign-in address is verified already, and any other address gets a code by email.

Every workspace starts with only the client's brand, as before, and goes back to it when it moves to a new owner. The emails still come from Postfjord, with Postfjord as the sender name. How it works: Agency branding.

Advertise a Facebook or Instagram post

You can now turn a published Facebook or Instagram post into an ad without leaving Postfjord. Press Advertise on the post, pick a goal, a city and how far around it, the money per day and the days. Before you press Start the ad, Postfjord shows the most it can cost and Meta's own preview.

Meta charges the card in your own Meta ad account. Postfjord does not charge for ads. An owner connects the ad account once, under Channels.

Each ad shows on its post with what it spent, the people it reached and the clicks, updated every 30 minutes. You can pause, resume or stop it there. How it works: Advertise a post.

Advertise a design, and pick who sees your ad

You can now advertise a design straight from the design editor. Press Share, then Advertise on Meta, write the words above the ad, the link and the button, and pick a Facebook Page or Instagram account to run it as. The ad is shown only as an ad and is not posted on your Page or profile.

When you pick who sees an ad, from a post or a design, you now have three groups: People in a place, People who know you (people who engaged with your Page or Instagram in the last year) and Let Meta find people in a whole country.

Meta charges the card in your own Meta ad account. Postfjord does not charge for ads. How it works: Advertise a post or a design.

3D icons and Noto emoji in Stickers

Stickers in the design editor has two new sets. 3D icons holds 150 shiny 3D icons, like a heart, a megaphone, a gift, a calendar, a shopping bag, money and a trophy, most of them in two colors. Noto emoji holds about 150 emoji from Google: faces, hands, hearts, food, flowers and party things. You can search both sets in English or in Swedish. How it works: Stickers.

Ten new template looks in the design editor

The design editor has ten new template looks: a magazine cover, a big number, a menu with prices, a countdown, a quote with a round portrait, a week schedule, a product spotlight, meet the team, a checklist and a big news banner. Templates now come in your brand's language, set under Settings, Brand, instead of the language the app is in. How it works: Start from a template.

Ten photo-led template looks in the design editor

Ten new templates let your photos carry the post, with few words: photo grids with a label or a text tile, a photo dump, a post in an Instagram frame, a camera view, a taped photo, an editorial cover, a sale on a paper card, a film strip and a weekly recap. How it works: Start from a template.

Magic eraser in the design editor

Pick a photo in the design editor and press Magic eraser. Paint over something with Area, or pick Foreground for the person or thing in front, and press Erase. It is taken out and the background is filled in. The result is saved as a new picture in Media, and Undo brings the photo back. Each erase uses 1 cent of the plan's AI budget. How it works: Magic eraser.

Magic eraser and Erase on the phone

The Magic eraser and Erase now work in the design editor on a phone too. Tap a photo and both are in its sheet; the page moves up so the photo stays in view above the panel. How it works: Magic eraser.

Magic eraser picks things and text for you

The Magic eraser in the design editor has two more ways to pick what goes. Element: click a thing in the photo and Postfjord finds all of it; click more things to take them too. Text: Postfjord finds the text in the photo and boxes each line; every box goes, and a click on a box keeps that text. How it works: Magic eraser.

Tidier settings in the email and page editors

The email editor and the landing page editor now share more of the same settings panel.

  • Look on a landing page comes in groups. Style, Color, More colors, Letters and Size and shape fold, as in the email editor. A closed group shows what is set in a small tag.
  • Blocks on a page too. What a block says comes first. Its layout, shape, size and alignment sit under Size and shape below it.
  • More colors use your brand colors. Boxes, Button text and Links show your brand colors by name, with Automatic first.
  • Cards and pictures in emails. How the cards look now sits under Size and shape, below the cards. A picture's shape and badge no longer have a second heading there.
  • A taller sheet on your phone. Drag the handle on a block's settings up to see more groups, and down to close them. A tap on the handle works too.
  • Pictures for more choices. The survey scale (1 to 5 or 0 to 10), Who sees this and a page's share buttons are pictures to tap now.

How it works: Email campaigns and Landing pages.

Share menu in the design editor

The Save button in the design editor is now a Share menu:

  • Save puts the pictures in Media, as before.
  • New post with this design saves and opens a new post with the pictures in it. Several pages open as a carousel.
  • Download gives you a JPG or PNG, a ZIP of every page, a PDF (the file LinkedIn takes for a document carousel) or the MP4 of a video.
  • Copy picture puts the picture on the clipboard, ready to paste.

Every choice saves the design to Media first. How it works: Share, download and post.

Download without saving, share to email and pages, designs in their own place

  • Download in the design editor's Share menu no longer adds a copy to Media. Pick JPG, PNG or PDF, all pages, this page or the ones you choose, a size from half to three times, and a see-through background for a PNG.
  • Share to sends a design to a new post, a new email or a landing page, saved in Media on the way.
  • Saved designs on the Design page shows every design, with Duplicate and Delete on each.
  • Media has two tabs, Uploads and Designs, and so does the picture picker in posts, emails and pages.

How it works: Share, download and post.

An opacity button in the design editor

Pick anything in the design editor and the bar at the top has a checkered Opacity button. It makes the layer see-through, also several layers picked at once. A text or a logo keeps at least 10%, so it never disappears. How it works: The editor at a glance.

Erase and restore parts of a photo in the design editor

Pick a photo in the design editor and press Erase in the bar at the top. Paint over the photo to take parts away, or switch to Restore to paint them back. On a cut-out, Restore brings back what Remove background took, like a hand it cut off. The strokes stay with the photo, so you can change them later, and the saved picture looks the same as the page. How it works: Erase.

Smaller fixes in the design editor

  • The Rounded frame is rounder, so it no longer looks like Square next to it.
  • An empty frame shows Add photo and its shape in the bar, without tools that do nothing until a photo is in it.
  • In a story, the before and after template has bigger arches and less empty space.
  • On a phone, the Frames and Shapes sheets show their title once, and the template search fits the screen.
  • A font you used that is not in the list any more keeps its tick in its type tab.
  • Curved text no longer says Text does not fit when it fits along its curve.
  • Downloading a saved design you have not changed no longer adds a second copy to Media.

Read my website reads your menu pages and picks a look-alike font

Read my website under Brand kit now also opens one or two pages from your menu, like About or Classes, and adds the strong colours it finds there to your brand colours. Your main colours still come from the home page.

A font that is not free, like Futura or Avenir, now gets the free font that looks most like it (League Spartan, Figtree) instead of a plain serif or sans serif. The scan says which one it picked. How it works: Brand voice and brand kit.

Your website's fonts and more brand colors

Read my website under Settings, Brand kit now brings more of your look:

  • Your real fonts. When your site uses a font from Google Fonts that is not among Postfjord's free fonts, Looks right copies it into your own fonts. Your designs then use the same heading and body fonts as your website. The body font is now the one most of your text is set in, not the first small label on the page.
  • More colors. The scan keeps up to six extra colors from your site and a pale section color, where it kept three before. Under Colors that go with yours it suggests up to three more, made from your own colors. Untick the ones you do not want. A kit holds up to twelve extra colors.
  • More variety in designs. Templates and Shuffle in the design editor now use those colors: big areas keep your calm colors, and the strong ones go to small parts, one at a time.

How it works: Get your look from your website.

Suggested brand colors that match your look

Colors that go with yours under Settings, Brand kit now suggests up to six colors, where it suggested three. They start with your own color in other tones, a deeper and a paler one, the way a designer builds a palette. The new colors after that are as calm or as bright as your accent, so a soft sage brand gets soft colors and never bright blue or green.

How it works: Get your look from your website.

Text effects in the design editor

Pick a text and click Effects in the bar at the top. You can give it a shadow, lift it off the page, make it hollow, splice it, outline it, echo it, glitch it or make it glow like neon. Each effect shows as a small picture in your text's own font, and sliders change how far, which way, how thick and how strong. Background puts a rounded color behind the text, with or without an effect.

The saved picture looks exactly like the editor. On a phone, tap a text and then Effects. How it works: Text effects.

Ideas and the Creative Dock are one page

Ideas and the Creative Dock are now one page, called Ideas, under Posts in the menu. Bo is your assistant and nothing else, so it is clear where each thing lives.

On a computer your ideas are on the left. Press one and it opens on the right, with everything the Dock had: saving as you type, undo and redo, focus, Check grammar only, the word count, Copy, Dictate and the room left on each channel. When nothing is open you see the daily prompt.

Make a post now has three choices: Write it myself, Let Claude write it and One for every channel.

Your drafts from the Dock are in the list as private pages, marked Only you, with every word kept. Nobody else sees them, as before. Ideas Bo saves for you are marked From Bo. Write it myself, the daily prompt and Sound are under Settings on the Ideas page.

On a phone the list comes first. Tap an idea and it fills the screen, with a back button on top.

Links to the Dock open Ideas, and the Ideas card next to Bo's chat is gone. How it works: Ideas.

Frames and grids in the design editor

The design editor has Frames on the left. A frame is a place for a photo in a shape: a square, rounded corners, a circle, an arch, a heart, a star and 12 more, a polaroid or a phone. Drag a photo onto it and the photo fills the frame and takes its shape. Picking a frame and clicking a photo in Photos does the same.

Grids fill the page with frames for a collage: 11 layouts from one photo to six. Spacing and Corners change a grid you picked. A frame with no photo is left out of the saved picture, and Save says so first. It works on a phone too, under Add, Frames. How it works: Frames and Grids.

Six templates with frames and grids

Six new templates in the design editor use frames and grids: a polaroid collage post, a polaroid party story, a moodboard post and a moodboard story on a grid, and a before and after in arches or in circles. Each is drawn in your brand and in every size. Drop your own photo on any photo in them to swap it, and the shape stays. In a moodboard, Spacing and Corners under Frames change the grid. There are 56 templates now. How it works: Frames.

More kinds of fonts, and bold display fonts that load

The font list in the design editor has 110 fonts now, and they look more different from each other. New ones include Unbounded, Instrument Serif, Black Ops One, Bagel Fat One, Rubik Bubbles, Creepster, Yellowtail, Rock Salt, UnifrakturMaguntia, Special Elite and Bungee Shade. Twelve plain sans fonts that looked almost like Inter are out of the list. Designs that already use them still show them.

All now takes the fonts in turns from each type, so the list starts with a mix of looks.

A click on a font changes your text at once, and the panel stays open for the next click. The page no longer changes when the pointer only rests on a font.

Fixed: a bold heading set in a font that only comes in one weight, such as Anton, Pacifico or Lobster, showed in a plain font with the message "A font could not load". It now shows in its own font. How it works: Pick a font.

See a font on your design before you pick it

In the design editor, rest the pointer on a font in the font list, or step through it with the arrow keys, and the text you picked shows that font on the page. Click to keep it. Close the list without clicking and the text keeps the font it had.

The font list now sits in one place: the bar at the top. It is no longer repeated under Edit. How it works: Pick a font.

More than 90 fonts and a font picker that shows them

The design editor has 93 free fonts now, up from 16. The font list is new too. Click the font name and every font shows its name written in that font, so you see the look before you pick it. Search by name, or pick a type: Modern, Elegant, Bold, Playful, Handwritten or Retro. Your brand fonts come first, then the fonts you used last and your own uploaded fonts.

The same list picks your heading and body fonts under Settings, Brand kit. The previews are pictures we make ourselves, so opening the list never sends your address to Google. How it works: Pick a font.

Fonts in their own panel, and on your phone

On a computer, the font list now opens as a panel on the left of the design editor, the full height of the screen, and stays open while you try fonts. Scrolling the list no longer changes your text: the page shows a font only when you move the pointer onto it, and only once that font has loaded, so the page does not flicker.

On a phone you can change the font now. Tap a text, then tap the font name under it. Tap a font and your text changes at once. How it works: Pick a font.

Font combinations in the design editor

Open Text in the design editor and you will find 24 font combinations: a heading with a matching line or label, like a sale, a grand opening, a quote, a countdown or a workshop. Click one and it lands in the middle of the page as a group, in your brand colors. Two of them use your own brand fonts. Double-click a text to change the words. On a phone, tap Add and then Text styles.

New text now always gets a color that reads on the page. Before, a heading added to a page in your brand color could come out in that same color and not show. How it works: Font combinations.

Copy style, flip, a right-click menu and templates in the design editor

Four things in the design editor that make everyday work faster:

  • Copy style: pick a text, photo or shape, press the paint roller, then click another layer. It takes the same font, size, colors and spacing, or the same filters on a photo. Alt+Cmd+C and Alt+Cmd+V do it from the keyboard.
  • Flip: turn a photo or a shape over, left to right or upside down. A group flips as one, and text stays readable. The saved picture looks the same as the page.
  • Right-click: a menu on any layer with copy, paste, duplicate, delete, copy style, flip, layer order, group and lock, and on the empty page with paste, add text, the background color and pages. The arrow keys move through it, and Shift+F10 opens it.
  • Templates on the left: swap the template on this page, or add its pages to your design, without leaving it. The editor asks before it replaces a page you changed, and Undo takes a swap back.

How it works: Design editor.

Drop a photo on the background to swap it

In the design editor, drag a photo onto the photo that fills the page and the page gets the new picture, wherever you let go. Before, only a drop near the edge of the page did that, and a drop in the middle added a small photo on top. The page shows Fill the page while you drag, so you see what will happen before you let go.

To add a second photo on top of the background, click it in Photos. A locked background photo is never swapped. How it works: Drag photos onto the page.

Videos in the design editor, with transitions, Match and move and music

A design can now be a video. Pick Reel or story video 9:16, Video 16:9 or Square video 1:1 on the start screen, or press Make it a video under the pages of a design you have. A timeline takes the place of the pages: drag a tile's edge to set how long a page shows, and press Space to play it on the page.

Pick how one page changes into the next with the round button between two tiles: ten transitions, among them Match and move, which glides the same layers from page to page. A wheel built as a group turns on its own circle. Layers can also fade, rise, pop or type themselves in with Animate, and Add music puts a song from Media under the video.

Save video makes an MP4 that lands in Media, and Edit design on that video opens its pages and music again. Videos are open to testers first. How it works: Make a video.

Stickers in the design editor, emoji, colorful shapes and people

The design editor has a new Stickers tool with more than 400 pictures: about 200 colorful emoji, 115 soft gradient shapes and 93 hand-drawn people. Search them by name, click one to add it, and give it a shadow, a frame shape or effects like any photo. The saved picture looks the same as the page. They are free to use in your posts. How it works: Stickers.

A new start in the design editor

The design editor now opens on What will you make today?, with a big template search, a blank page in each size or one from a photo, and the designs you were working on, all at the top. The templates follow under them. On a phone the sizes and your designs scroll sideways. How it works: Start a design.

Shapes, badges, arrows and 150 icons in the design editor

Shapes in the design editor has many more to pick from: stars, sparkles, price bursts, seals, price tags, ribbons, arrows, lines with an arrow, speech bubbles, blobs and shapes like hearts, arches and half circles. Under them are more than 150 icons for shops, food, beauty, fitness, events, time and place, with a search.

Each one lands in your brand's accent color, keeps its shape when you drag a corner, and follows your brand colors like any shape. The saved picture looks the same as the page. How it works: Shapes and icons.

A design that fails to save leaves nothing behind

When a design with several pages could not be saved as pictures, for example because a photo did not load, the pages made before the error stayed in Media. Saving again then made them a second time. Now every page is made first and nothing lands in Media until all of them are ready, so a failed save leaves Media as it was. Press Save again when the editor says to try again.

Remove background in the design editor

Pick a photo in the design editor and press Remove background. The person or thing in front stays, the background goes, and the cut-out is saved in Media as a new picture in the same frame and crop. It takes about 20 seconds and works in every browser and on a phone. Each cut-out uses 1 cent of the plan's monthly AI budget. How it works: Remove background.

Photo frames and gradients in the design editor

Photos in the design editor can now be cut to a shape: a circle, an arch, a blob, a heart, a star, a price burst, a seal, a hexagon, a speech bubble and more. A photo with no shape can get rounded corners, and any photo can get a line around it in any color. Find it under Frame when a photo is picked.

Gradients are here too. With nothing picked, Gradients and patterns puts a gradient background on the page, first in your brand colors, then a few more. Any shape can have a gradient fill, across or from the middle, at the angle you like. The saved picture looks the same as the page. How it works: Photo frames and Gradients.

Design has its own place in the menu

The design editor has its own line in the menu now, called Design, right under Posts. Media sits under it, so the editor and the pictures it saves are side by side. Media is still in Settings too.

The Design page shows the editor's start: a blank page in each size, from a photo, video sizes where video is on, the designs you were working on, the templates and your Saved designs. Pick any of them and the editor opens over the whole screen. Save, and the pictures land in Media as before. Close, and you are back on the Design page.

On a phone, Design is in Menu and can be one of your four favourites in the bottom bar. The small words Design and Media at the top of each page take you between the two. Search (Cmd K or Ctrl K) finds Design too.

The Design button in a post, Create image in Media and the media picker work as before. How it works: Design editor.

Shadows, photo effects and patterns in the design editor

Photos and shapes in the design editor can now have a shadow: soft, lift, hard or glow, with your own color, softness and distance. Photos also get Effects: warmth, blur, a vignette and duotone in your brand colors.

Shapes and backgrounds can have a pattern: dots, grid, stripes, diagonal stripes, checks, waves, zigzag, plus signs or a grain texture, in any color and size. With nothing picked, Gradients and patterns in the bar puts a pattern background in your brand colors on the page. The saved picture looks the same as the page. How it works: Shadows and photo effects and Patterns.

Curved text, and effect colors that follow your brand

In the design editor, pick a text, click Effects and then Curve under Shape. Drag the slider to arch the words up, bend them down like a smile, or wrap them almost all the way round. Each letter follows the curve, the box grows to fit, and shadows, outlines and the other effects stay on.

An effect color you pick from your brand colors now follows your brand, so Apply brand and Shuffle change it along with the text. How it works: Text effects.

Signup forms turn away throwaway and no-reply addresses

Your signup forms now say no to throwaway inboxes like mailinator.com and to mailboxes nobody reads, like noreply@ and postmaster@. The person sees "Use an email address you read" and can try again. Nothing goes on your list.

These addresses never open an email, and a list full of them makes your emails land in spam more often. A shared inbox that a person reads, like info@, signs up as before. The same check runs when someone sends their address in a DM automation. How signups work: Signup forms.

Email templates for your kind of business, with your email logo

Start from a template now opens with three cards: For you, All templates and Your templates. For you shows the templates made for your kind of business, so a yoga studio sees Studio and gym and a shop sees Shop, plus two that suit any business. All templates shows every one, with a button per goal and one for Simple layouts.

Every template now starts with the logo you picked under Email settings, Logo and picture, at the size you picked there, and uses your brand kit's logo only when you have not picked one. A logo with a see-through background sits on your band color, as in the footer, never on a white box. The same goes for the templates and sections in the editor's Templates tab. How it works: Email campaigns.

Find a template faster, with categories, rows and search

The templates in the design editor and in a new email look the same now. At the top are For you, All templates and Your templates, and a search. Under them are the categories, each with a real template in your brand, so you see what you get. Then comes one row per category that you scroll sideways, with See all for the whole category.

Type in Search templates to find a template by its name, what it is for, the kind of post or a word in it. In the design editor, small pictures pick posts, stories, carousels or reel covers. In a new email, Start from scratch is at the top and your recent emails are a row in For you. How it works: Design editor and Email campaigns.

Dock, Ideas and Mentions in the menu, and cleaner page headers

On a computer, the pages that used to sit as small words above a page title now have their own rows in the menu. Dock and Ideas sit right under Posts, and Mentions right under Inbox. The row for the page you are on is lit. Ideas shows how many open ideas you have, and Mentions how many are still new. The numbers update when you move to another page, and the row of the page you are on shows none, since the page has its own.

Want a shorter menu? Press the small arrow next to Posts or Inbox to fold its rows away, and press it again to bring them back. Postfjord remembers your choice on this device. On a phone the words stay at the top of the page too, and the same rows show when you open Menu.

Page headers are plain now. The dashboard, the Creative Dock and Ideas no longer have painted mountains behind the title. You see the title, one line under it and the buttons on the right, like on every other page. The dashboard keeps a small Bo next to your greeting. How it works: The Creative Dock, Inbox and Mentions.

20 new email templates, grouped by goal

Start from a template has 20 new emails under Designed for you, grouped by goal: Shop, Studio and gym, Café, salon and services, Creator and coach, and For everyone. Press a goal at the top to see only those. The six templates with one big photo are still there, under With a big photo.

Each template has a look of its own, with its own typeface for headings, buttons, picture shapes and dividers, and all of them take your brand colors and logo. They come with photos chosen for each one, so the email looks done before you change a word. Click a photo and press Choose image to use your own.

Words in [brackets] are yours to fill in, and the email cannot go out until they are. You find the same templates in the Templates tab of the editor. How it works: Email campaigns.

Pictures and sliders in the email and page editors

The settings of a block in the email editor and in the landing page editor look the same now, and most of them are pictures. Pick the shape of a picture, the style of a button, a divider or a layout by its drawing. Sizes and spacing are sliders that stop at the sizes every mail app can show, and the email or page changes while you drag.

Your brand colors show with their names, like Background, Accent or Light blue, and Custom keeps the last few colors you picked yourself. In the email editor the settings come in groups that fold, with what is set shown on a closed group. On a phone they take the bottom half of the screen, so the email stays in view above them.

How it works: Email campaigns and Landing pages.

Design templates in your brand, Shuffle and every size at once

The design editor now opens on 50 templates for posts, stories, carousels and reel covers, grouped by kind of business and by goal. Every card is drawn in your brand colors, fonts and logo. Use template opens it in one step.

Apply brand puts your brand colors and fonts on any design, also one you made before. Shuffle tries a new look with your own colors and fonts, and Undo takes you back. Color settings now show your brand colors by name (Main, Accent, Text, Background), and the font list starts with your heading and body font. Set the body font under Settings, Brand.

Text in a box shrinks to fit as you type, and a red frame says when a word does not fit at all.

Sizes shows one design in square, portrait, story and landscape. Tick the ones you need, fix one size by hand if you like, and Save makes them all at once. From a post, each channel gets the size it needs. Before it saves, the editor lists anything that does not fit, with Fix and Save anyway. How it works: Design editor.

A new design editor with photos, turning, groups and layers

The design editor is new. It fills the screen, with tools on the left, the page in the middle and settings on the right.

  • Drag to move, size and turn anything. Layers snap to the page and to each other, and a small number shows the space between them.
  • Type right on the page with a double click.
  • A page holds up to 8 photos. Each photo is a frame you can move, size, turn and crop, and one can fill the whole page.
  • Pick several layers to line them up, give them equal space or group them. Lock a layer so it stays put, or hide it.
  • The Layers tab lists everything on the page. Drag to change the order.
  • Zoom from 50 to 400 percent, and use the keyboard for undo, copy, paste, moving and more.
  • On a phone, tap a layer and its settings open below the page.

Designs you made before open as they were. How it works: Design editor.

Open a saved design again, and never lose one

A design you saved can be opened and changed again. Press Edit design on the picture in Media, in the media picker or on a post. A carousel opens with all its pages. Saving makes new pictures, and in a post they take the place of the old ones.

The editor now keeps your work as a draft while you design. Close it or reload the page and your design waits under Continue where you left off the next time you open Create image. Closing no longer asks anything.

The saved picture now matches the editor more closely. Text in the default font breaks into lines in the same place, italic text leans in both, and the photo shows the same part. Drag the photo to choose that part. Changing the format no longer stretches text and shapes.

Each plan saves a set number of design pictures a day, 50 on Free. How it works: Design editor.

The design editor gets a fixed bar, drag and drop photos, and your brand fonts on the page

The tools for what you pick now sit in a bar under the top of the design editor. The bar stays in one place and never covers the page. Pick a text and it shows the font, the size with - and +, the color, bold, italic, how the lines line up and Edit. Pick a photo, a shape or a group and it shows their tools. With nothing picked it shows the page's background color and size. A small menu above what you picked has lock, duplicate and More, with copy, paste, layer order and line up with the page, each with its keys.

You can drag photos onto the page on a computer: your own from Media, the free photos, or picture files from your computer, which are uploaded to Media first. Drop near the edge and the photo fills the page, drop on a photo to swap it, or drop anywhere else to add it there. The page shows which one will happen while you drag. On a phone, tap a photo to add it.

Headings and body text now show in your brand fonts while you edit. Before this, the editor could not load the font files, showed Failed to fetch at the top and drew the text in a plain font. How it works: Design editor.

Subject tests count each person once

A subject test now counts clicks per person. Someone who clicks from a phone and then a laptop counts once, and two people at the same office count as two. A click in the first minute after the email went out no longer counts for the test, since some mail services open every link on arrival to check it.

A field from your own contact data in subject B, like a member level with a fallback, no longer stops the email from being scheduled when the same field works in subject A.

When more than 1,000 people are left after the first small group, an email goes out in hourly steps, and the test group is part of those steps. Once a subject wins, the rest go on in the same hour's step, so the hour does not start over, in steps of a quarter of the people left after the test when that is more than 1,000.

The Send screen waits until it has read a test saved on the email before Send works, so a saved test is never switched off by mistake. How it works: Email campaigns.

An email when you cancel a plan in Shopify

Pay for Postfjord through Shopify and cancel the plan there? Within a day, you get the same email as a plan cancelled on postfjord.com: the date the plan ends, that the workspace then moves to Free with everything kept, and how to change your mind. It comes again 3 days before the end.

To keep the plan, open Account in Postfjord, press Change plan in Shopify and choose it again before that date. Removing Postfjord from your store ends the plan at once, and the email says so.

See your sending health, and a guide to reaching the inbox

Email settings has a new box, Sending health. It shows how many emails your campaigns sent in the last 30 days, how many did not arrive, and how many people marked them as spam, next to the lines Amazon watches. One word sums it up: Good, Watch or Act now, with what to do.

A new help page, Reach the inbox, explains SPF, DKIM and DMARC, which DMARC value to start with, how Postfjord handles bounces and spam reports for you, and how new senders start slowly.

When you send from your own domain, the DMARC step now links to that page.

A reminder 3 days before a cancelled plan ends

Cancelled a paid plan? About 3 days before it ends, you get one more email. It gives the date, says your workspaces then move to Free and that nothing is deleted. Pages over what Free has room for go offline until you choose a plan again, and the email says so.

Want to keep the plan after all? The email says how: open Account, press Manage billing and renew it before that date. If you renewed already, no email comes.

Smaller pictures with a badge fit on a phone, and GIFs keep moving

A picture at 75, 50 or 33 percent with a badge now gets narrower on a phone, like one without a badge. Before, it kept its full width, and the email slid sideways on a small screen.

A GIF from GIPHY keeps moving when you pick a Format or a Shape for it, in an image block or on a card. Postfjord no longer trims it, because a trimmed GIF stops on its first picture. A GIF in an image block gets round corners in place of a circle or an arch, and the editor tells you why.

In the Cards block, a picture you pick while you type now lands on the right card, and what you typed stays. A card you remove while its picture loads stays removed.

When Bo moves a block out of a background box, the block leaves the box, and the box stays in one piece.

The right colour tip for a picture at the top

Under Email settings, Logo and picture, the tip under At the top and At the bottom now fits your choice. At the top, match the bottom edge of the picture to your first block. At the bottom, match its top edge to your footer. Before, it gave the footer tip for both.

More emails a day on every paid plan

Each workspace can now send more emails a day: 2,500 on Solo, 7,500 on Studio and 20,000 on Agency. Free stays at 200. Before, every plan sent at most 200 a day, so a big list took days to reach everyone.

A new sender starts slower. In a workspace's first 14 days of sending it can send 500 a day on days 1 to 3, 1,000 on days 4 to 7 and 2,500 on days 8 to 14, then its plan's number. Day 1 is the day its first email or automation email goes out. Mail services trust a new sender slowly, and a slow start keeps your emails out of spam.

The send screen shows the number for today and when the last part of an email goes out. While the slower start is on, it says so. The pricing page and Plans and billing list the number for each plan.

Daily email room is counted right when something fails

  • When sending a campaign hits a problem on our side, the emails that did not go out now give back their room in your daily limit once. Before, some of that room could be lost for the rest of the day, or given back twice.
  • The same goes for the daily limit on how many imported people may start getting email. A failed send no longer uses up their places.
  • A campaign you pause while Postfjord still checks its first small group stays checked until the check ends.
  • Alerts to the Postfjord team about a paused campaign or automation no longer include its name.
  • A campaign no longer says it waits for tomorrow's imported people when its list changed at the moment Postfjord took the next group from it. It goes on at the next check.

An inbox score before you send an email

The checks in the email editor now give each email an Inbox score: Good, Fair or Poor. Under it are the three things to fix first, each with what to do, and a click jumps to the block.

New checks look for what spam filters look for: words like "cash", "urgent" or "act now" in the subject, three or more "!", short links like bit.ly, and link words that show one website while the link goes to another. The score also counts the checks that were there already, like too many pictures, missing alt text, too many links, a size over Gmail's 102 KB and a missing preview text.

Postfjord runs the score itself. Your email is not sent to another service to be scored. Bo gets the score too when it checks an email for you. How it works: Email campaigns.

Flow: from a post to a signup to your emails

Flow is a new page in the menu, under Create, on the paid plans: Solo, Studio and Agency. If a workspace moves to Free, its live Flows stop by themselves and nothing is deleted. A Flow ties your parts into one path: someone sees your post, comments a word, gets a DM with a link to your page, signs up and gets your emails.

Build it step by step. Press Start building and add the steps in the order people meet them: a post, a DM automation, a landing page, a welcome email, a later email or a birthday email. Each step opens its usual editor, with Add to Flow where it would say Publish or Schedule. Postfjord ties the steps together: the DM answers comments on the Flow's post and links to its page, and a signup starts the emails.

Or tell Bo what you want, like "fill 15 spots in my Saturday beginner class". Bo makes every part as a draft. When he needs a link, a price or a date you did not give him, he asks. He also picks a picture from your media library for each post. You can start a Flow from ChatGPT, Claude or Gemini too: say "start a flow".

Nothing reaches anyone before you press Go live. The last step says what is not ready yet, with a link to fix it. A running Flow shows comments, DMs, signups and clicks.

When the campaign is over, Turn off can close it to new signups and keep the emails going, or stop everything. A Flow can also close by itself after a last day or a number of signups. How it works

Test two subject lines on an email

You can now test two subject lines on one email. On the Send screen, pick Test two subject lines under Subject test and write subject B, and a second preview text if you like.

A test group of 10 to 50 percent of the list gets the email first, split evenly between A and B. After a wait of 1 to 24 hours, the rest get the subject more people clicked. Opens only decide when the clicks are the same, since Apple Mail opens every email by itself. You can also pick the winner yourself, before or after the wait.

The email's page and its report show both subjects, how many people got each, how many clicked, and which one won. The test group counts toward the daily limit and the month like everyone else. Apps connected over MCP and Bo can schedule an email with a second subject too. How it works: Email campaigns.

A logo with your name at the top of an email

The logo block has a size: Small, Medium or Large. Small is 40 pixels high, like the logo at the top of the emails Postfjord sends you. Tick Show the name next to the logo to put your business name beside it, in the font of your headings. Outlook on Windows shows them side by side too.

Smaller fixes in the email editor:

  • On a phone, a button set to the left or right in a column stays in its column. Before, it could cover the column under it. Every email gets this fix, and nothing else in it changes.
  • Headings have one Size row: small, medium, large, huge or poster.
  • Automatic on a line, badge or border color shows the color the email will use.
  • A Circle or Arch picture takes half the width of the email, and an empty picture shows its shape before you add a photo.
  • Cut the picture is now Format, so it is easy to tell apart from Crop.
  • The checks say when the text colors of the whole email are hard to read on its background.

Eight fonts, poster headings, new buttons and lines in the email editor

The Style tab now has a Text font and a Heading font. Pick from eight: the two classics every computer has, and six from Google Fonts, like Playfair Display, Oswald and Space Mono. Apple Mail and the iPhone show them. Gmail and Outlook show a common font that looks close.

Headings have a new size, Poster: 80 pixels on a computer and 52 on a phone. Headings and labels can be in capital letters, with the letters set tight, normal or wide.

Buttons come in three sizes and three shapes: square, rounded and pill. A new style, Text link, shows underlined words with an arrow and no box.

Dividers can be thick, short, dotted or three dots, in your button color or a color you pick.

The Templates tab has three new sections: an announcement bar for the top, your logo with up to four links, and a closing band in your brand color.

Emails you already made look exactly as they did.

Cards, picture shapes and badges in the email editor

The new Cards block puts 2 or 3 cards side by side, each with a picture, a title, a short text, a price, a badge and a button or a text link. Use it for classes, products, team members or offers. It needs no shop. On a phone the cards sit one under the other.

A picture can be Rounded, a Circle or an Arch, and Postfjord can cut it to a square, a tall or a wide picture, so every mail app shows the same picture. Your picture in Media stays as it is. A Badge, like "New" or "25% off", sits at the top corner of a picture or a card. Outlook on Windows shows square corners.

The Templates tab has three new sections: Three cards, Star review and Us and others, a list of what you do with checks next to what others do with crosses.

Emails you already made look exactly as they did.

Background boxes in the email editor, with photos and edge to edge colors

A background box puts one color, two colors or a photo behind a few blocks. Put a big headline on a photo, or run a band of color edge to edge across the whole mail app.

Press Add a background box in the Blocks tab, or Put in a background box in a block's settings. The small Box tab on the email opens its settings: what is behind the blocks, a dark or light veil over a photo, the room above and below, and how wide it is. The words turn white or dark by themselves, so they stay easy to read.

Outlook on Windows shows the photo too. When pictures are off, people see the color under the photo.

The Templates tab has a new section, Photo hero. The promo band, testimonial, event and closing band are background boxes now, and so are the bands in the Launch, Sale and Photo event starters.

Emails you already made look exactly as they did.

Customer tags from your Shopify and Stripe orders

Postfjord now tags each buyer who is a contact by how often they buy: New customer after one order, Returning customer after two, Best customer after three or more, and No purchase in 90 days when a buyer has gone quiet. Shopify orders and Stripe sales both count. A full refund takes the order off the count, and a tag that no longer fits comes off. A refund never adds a tag, so it never starts an email.

They are normal tags, so you can use them in a segment or to start an email automation. Four ready-made automations start on them: Thank a new customer, Welcome back a returning customer, A note for your best customers and Win back a customer after 90 days. Fill in your offer and press Start. When a tag comes off, its emails stop for that person: a refund stops the thank you, and a new order stops the win back. See Customer tags.

A bigger Free plan

The Free plan now sends 3,000 emails a month, up from 500. It also has room for 500 active DM contacts a month, up from 100. Everything else on Free stays the same, and Free still sends up to 200 emails a day. Since November 4, sending email needs a paid plan.

A Free workspace can now import up to 9,000 contacts in one file, up from 1,500, because the import limit follows the emails a plan sends.

Nothing to do: every Free workspace has the new numbers today. The pricing page and Plans and billing list them.

A new welcome email, one reminder to confirm, and a note when you cancel

The email you get when your account is approved now lists three things to do in your first ten minutes: connect a channel, set your brand voice and let Bo plan next week. Nicklas signs it, and a reply reaches him.

Made an account but did not confirm your email? A day after the last link, you get one reminder with a new link. The link in the earlier email then stops working. We send that reminder once, never again.

When you cancel a paid plan, you get an email with the date the plan ends and how to renew it before then. It also asks one question: is there something you missed that we could build? Reply and Nicklas reads it.

The weekly summary email

Every Monday morning, soon after 07:00 in your workspace's time zone, you now get a short email about last week: how many posts went out on each channel, the three posts with the most likes and comments, how many posts wait under Posts, Failed, and how many posts are scheduled for this week.

You get one email per workspace, and only for a workspace that published something last week. Owners, editors and viewers all get it.

To stop it, untick Weekly summary under Account, Emails from Postfjord.

An email when you join the waitlist

When you ask for early access, you now get an email right away. It says your place is saved, how early access works and that we email you again when your account is approved. Reply to it and the answer reaches Nicklas.

Product updates under Account now also turns off when you press unsubscribe in one of those emails, and ticking the box again starts them again. The box covers our news and tips about using Postfjord. Sign-in, security and billing emails are not affected.

Viewers no longer see your customers

A person with the Viewer role now sees your posts and results, but not the people behind them. Inbox, Contacts and comments are gone from their menu, and so are names and email addresses in bookings, sales, imports and the top list of Share with a friend. Numbers stay: a viewer still sees how many people signed up, booked or bought. Bo follows the same rule for a viewer, a viewer sees only the Bo chats they started and the notes Bo leaves by itself, and a routine's email reaches a viewer only for a routine they made. Mentions get their own line in a viewer's menu. Owners and editors see everything as before. To let someone read your contacts and messages, make them an Editor under Settings, Members.

Times in emails follow your time zone

The monthly report email now comes on the 1st from 7 in the morning or later in your workspace's time zone. Before, it went out at 7 in Stockholm, which was still the last evening of the month in the Americas. The report still counts the month in UTC, so in Asia and Australia the email waits until the month has ended in UTC too. When we take down or put back one of your landing pages, the email gives the time in your workspace's time zone. Screens no longer show Stockholm times for a moment while your workspace loads.

Only Postfjord marks a post as published, and your fonts count toward storage

Only Postfjord can mark an account on a post as published, after the platform says the post is live. Nobody in a workspace can set that status, the post link or the post number by hand. So the links in your emails, the numbers in Analytics and the posts your DM automations listen to are always the real ones. See Composer.

Fonts you upload now count toward your storage, and a workspace keeps up to 20 of them. A font that never finished uploading is removed after a day. See Design editor.

The brand voice fields, file names and alt text now have a set length, and a field stops taking text there. See Brand voice and Media.

Free photos from Pixabay for everyone

Every workspace can now search free photos from Pixabay in Media and in the media picker. Pick one and Postfjord copies it into your library, ready for a post or an email. You do not have to name the photographer.

Connecting a Page checks your access

When you connect Instagram and Facebook, the list now shows a Page only when you have full control of it, or access to its content, messages and community activity. If some Pages are left out, the list says so. A Page and its Instagram account move here from another workspace only for someone with full control of the Page. For anyone else the Page is greyed out with the reason.

A workspace can now add Postfjord to 10 new Mastodon servers a day. Servers where Postfjord is already set up do not count.

New contacts this week counts the right people

New contacts this week on the dashboard now counts the people who came in since Monday. People you import are not counted, since they were already yours. Before, it counted the last seven days, included imports, and stopped at 300.

A deleted workspace still counts for the month

The AI budget a workspace used this month stays on your account when you delete the workspace. So do its posts on Free. Making a new workspace no longer starts the month again.

A payment you dispute with your bank now ends what it paid for at once, as a cancellation with no refund would. If a charge looks wrong, write to hello [at] postfjord.com first. More in Plans and billing.

Merge contacts

When one person is two contacts, you can now make them one. Tick both in Contacts and press Merge contacts, or open a contact and use Merge under Maybe the same person. The Instagram or Facebook contact stays with its messages and gets the email address, the tags of both and the fields it was missing. The other contact is removed. Owners and editors can merge.

A shorter link for ChatGPT, Claude and Gemini

Postfjord's MCP server has its own address now: https://mcp.postfjord.com/mcp. Paste it into ChatGPT, Claude, Gemini or another AI app, sign in to Postfjord and press Allow.

  • The old link still works. Apps you connected with https://app.postfjord.com/api/mcp stay connected, and you can keep using it.
  • For AI apps that look Postfjord up. postfjord.com/pricing.json lists every plan, price and limit as JSON, from the same numbers as the pricing page. /.well-known/mcp.json on mcp.postfjord.com and app.postfjord.com describes the server and names its tools.

How to connect each app is in MCP.

An email for every new API key, and keys stop after a security step

When someone makes an API key or connects an AI app, every owner of the workspace now gets an email with the key's name, what it may do and who made it. Did you not expect it? Press Revoke next to it under Settings, Apps.

Choosing a new password, pressing Sign out everywhere, pressing This was not me in one of our emails, or deleting your account now also stops every API key and AI app you connected, in every workspace. Make a new key or connect the app again afterwards. A key also stops when the person who made it is no longer an owner of the workspace.

Connecting Mailchimp, choosing a Mailchimp audience and adding your own AI key now ask you to confirm it is you first, like connecting Stripe. If Postfjord support joins your workspace to help you, each owner gets an email.

A cleaner look for your apps

Settings, Apps shows every app as a small card of the same size: the app's own logo in its own colours in the middle, the name and one line about what it does. Whether it is connected or still needs setting up sits as a small label at the bottom of the card. Search and the category buttons work as before, and a card opens the same setup.

The list on postfjord.com/integrations has the same cards. The top says how many apps Postfjord works with, and you can search or pick a category to see only those apps.

Emails greet form signups by name

A name typed into a signup form now fills the contact's first name and last name. Emails that start with First name greet the person by name. Before, everyone who signed up through a form got the fallback word. People who signed up before today are greeted by the first word of the name they typed.

Put your email picture at the top

The wide picture from Email settings can now open your emails, as a band across the top, above your first block. Before, it could only sit at the very bottom, under the footer.

Open Email settings at the top of Campaigns, find Logo and picture, pick At the top under your picture and press Save. Your next emails, scheduled emails and automations get the picture at the top. You see it in the editor and the preview too.

Emails you already set up look the same as before: the picture stays at the bottom until you pick the top.

A smaller plan pauses the newest accounts and people, and deletes nothing

When a workspace moves to a plan with room for fewer connected accounts or fewer people, the oldest keep working and the newest are paused.

  • Accounts. The accounts you connected first, up to the plan's number, keep posting. A paused account gets no posts and sends no messages, and its messages and comments still come in. Channels marks it Paused and says what to do.
  • People. The workspace's owner always stays, then the people who joined first, with other owners first in line. A paused person sees a calm page that says why, instead of the workspace. Settings, Members marks them. The calendar feed gets a new address, as when someone is removed.
  • One email. The owner gets one email that lists what was paused.
  • Back by itself. Upgrade, or disconnect an account, or remove a person, and the oldest paused one comes back within seconds. A post that was due while its account was paused waits for you to press Retry.

Read more in Billing.

One contact when a DM leads to a signup

When a DM automation sends someone to your landing page and they sign up on its form, they now end up as one contact. Once they confirm their email address, it goes on their Instagram or Facebook contact, together with the form's tags and the details from the form. Before, they stayed two contacts: one from the DM and one from the form. The contact keeps its messages. Nothing changes on the DM contact until they confirm.

The connect screen shows which app is asking

When you connect ChatGPT or Claude to Postfjord, the screen now names the app only when it sends you back to its own sign-in address. Any other app shows the name it gave itself, with a note that Postfjord does not know it.

An app that runs on your own computer, like Gemini CLI, now says so on the screen. It no longer counts as known, so the screen never starts on Schedule and publish for it. Pick that yourself if you want it.

Apps you already connected keep working.

Connect Calendly with one click

You can now connect Calendly without copying a token. Open Settings, Apps, Calendly, press Connect Calendly, sign in to Calendly and press Allow. You come back to the card, and new bookings start to arrive.

Pasting a personal access token still works: press Paste a token instead on the same card. A Calendly you connected with a token keeps working, and there is nothing you need to do.

When you disconnect, the card now says if Calendly did not answer. Postfjord disconnects anyway and turns away anything Calendly still sends.

App limits count per workspace

Apps and AI assistants connected to your workspace, such as ChatGPT or Claude, can add at most 30 pictures or videos a minute, ask the AI composer for at most 20 drafts a minute, and turn at most 5 ideas a minute into drafts for every channel. The limits count for the whole workspace, so two keys share them. The 500 files a day stay as they were.

Short links in DMs stop counting clicks from one network address after about 30 in a minute, and one link counts at most 10,000 clicks an hour. Everyone who taps still gets to the page, so a script that opens a link over and over no longer adds to its numbers.

Clearer first note in your team chat

When you save a Slack, Discord, Teams or Google Chat address, or add the Postfjord bot to a Telegram group, the first note now says Postfjord is connected. Send a test still says This is a test from Postfjord. Before, both said the same thing, so a test right after saving looked like the same note twice.

Hide a landing page from Google

A landing page can now stay out of Google. Under Page, switch on Hide from Google and publish. Only people with the link find the page: search engines leave it out, and it leaves your address's sitemap.

A page that Bo makes for a Flow, like a birthday gift you send in a DM, has it switched on from the start. Pages you had before stay in Google. The REST API and AI apps can set it too, with hideFromSearch.

Birthday emails can go to one tag

An automation that starts on each contact's own date, like a birthday, now shows Who gets it too. Pick a tag, and only people with that tag get the email. Before, the choice only showed for one date for everyone, so a birthday email always went to the whole list.

Change the subject of an automation email

An email in an automation now has its subject line over the editor. Press Subject to change the subject and the preview text, with Claude's ideas if you want them. Before, an automation email kept the subject it was made with, for example a welcome email made from a template.

The small group is still checked when the rest goes out sooner

Your first email, and an email to people you imported, goes to a small group first. When Postfjord sends the rest sooner than the usual wait, the small group is still checked for the full time: two hours, or a day when the list has people you imported. If too many people mark it as spam or too many addresses do not work, the email pauses and Postfjord looks at it.

While that check runs after everyone has the email, the report says so and shows when it ends. There is nothing for you to do. Pause and Cancel go away then, since everyone already has it. A pause or a cancel earlier on does not stop the check. The help page has more on how fast emails go out.

Four fixes in the email editor

  • A Video block with a picture of your own now gets the same play button as the video's own picture. Postfjord draws it on a copy, so your picture in Media stays as it was. A tall picture keeps its whole shape.
  • Columns with round corners now show their round corners in the editor too, the same way the email shows them.
  • On a phone, the Blocks button has its own row at the top. It no longer covers the first block of your email.
  • Dark colours in the colour rows have a light edge in dark mode, so you can see them.

Team alerts in Telegram

Team alerts now also go to a Telegram group, next to Slack and Discord. Your team gets the same short note when a DM nobody has taken comes in, a post did not go out, someone signs up or you make a sale.

Open Settings → Apps, press Telegram and then Connect Telegram. Press the link, pick the group and add the Postfjord bot. It posts a first note right away. There is no address to copy.

The bot only reads the start message from the link, not what people write in the group. Press Remove and it leaves the group. The help page has the steps.

Postfjord in n8n

Postfjord now works with n8n. In n8n, install n8n-nodes-postfjord under Settings → Community nodes. Then press the n8n card under Settings → Apps in Postfjord, make a key and paste it in n8n.

A new contact, a confirmed form signup, a sale, a published post or a new conversation can start a workflow. A workflow can make a draft post or schedule one, add or update a contact, add tags, find a contact by email, and start an email automation for someone who has confirmed.

Contacts added this way get your emails only after they click the link in the confirmation email. The help page has the steps.

Sections, more column layouts and frames in the email editor

The Templates tab now starts with sections: a header with your logo, a hero, a promo band, features in two or three columns, a testimonial, an event, a call to action and a footer note. Click one and it goes in under the block you picked, in this email's colors. Fill in the words in [brackets].

Made a block you like? Pick it and press Save as section. It shows under Your sections in every email, where you can insert, rename or delete it.

Columns come in more layouts: 1:3, 3:1 and four of the same width, each shown as a small drawing. On phones picks which column comes first when they stack, so a picture on the right can still lead on a phone.

Text, picture and columns blocks have a Frame in their settings: a thin or medium border in any color, and small or large rounded corners.

Your saved emails look the same as before. Nothing to do.

Products, videos and events in your emails

The email editor has three new blocks under Blocks.

  • Products shows one to three products from your Shopify store, each with its picture, name, price and a Buy button. On a phone they sit one under the other. Press Refresh from store before you send to bring in the prices your store has now.
  • Video turns a YouTube, Vimeo, TikTok or Instagram link into the video's picture with a play button. A tap opens the video. You can also upload a picture of your own.
  • Event shows a class or a workshop with its day, time, place and two buttons: Add to Google Calendar, and Add to Apple or Outlook. The times are in your workspace's time zone.

Your saved emails look the same as before.

The email editor has one panel and one row of text tools

The email editor is calmer. Everything you set now sits in one panel on the left, and the text tools sit in one row above the email.

  • The panel has four tabs: Blocks, Templates, Style and Bo. Click a block in the email and the panel shows that block's settings. The arrow at the top takes you back.
  • Style holds the look of the whole email: typeface, headings, text size, colors and corners. Bo holds what used to be under the email and in Draft with Claude.
  • Click a text and the row above the email shows its style, bold, italic, the new Underline and Strikethrough, link, color, alignment, lists and First name.
  • A picked block has a small tab with its name, which you drag to move it, and Move up, Move down, Duplicate and Delete on its right side.
  • The top bar has a computer and phone switch for the email's width, and Send a test. The number on Continue says what the checks found.

Your emails look the same as before. Nothing to do.

Drag blocks into the email, crop pictures and highlight words

You can now drag a block from the Blocks tab to the place in the email where you want it. A blue line shows where it lands, between two blocks or inside a column. Clicking a block in the list still adds it under the one you picked, and on a phone a tap adds it.

A picture in an email has Crop in its settings: Free, Square, 16:9, 4:5 or a 3:1 banner. The crop is saved as a new picture in your Media and the email uses it. Your original stays as it is.

The text tools have Highlight next to Color, for a marker color behind some words. It shows in Gmail, Outlook and Apple Mail.

On a tablet the panel opens over the email from Blocks and style, so the email keeps its width. Your saved emails look the same as before.

A Flow's first post is never in the past, and Why this plan is in your language

Two fixes from the first real Flows.

  • The first post comes after now. A plan made in the evening used to put its first post at 07:30 that same morning, which had already passed. Now every post that would be in the past moves to the next good time, at least half an hour from now, in your workspace's time zone. A plan made at 23:50 starts the next morning.
  • Why this plan is in the language your app is in. Before, it could come in your brand's language and guess which language you wrote in. Now it follows the app, and Bo only talks about the plan. The posts, the DM, the page and the emails are still in your brand's language.
  • Flows you build yourself get the same fix: a post at a time that has passed today moves to the next good time.

Color on some words in emails and pages

You can now give some words their own color, in an email and on a page. Before, a color covered the whole block.

  • Pick the words and press Color next to Link. Pick one of your brand colors, or the color square for any color you like. With no words picked, the word under the cursor gets the color.
  • Default takes the color away again, and the words go back to the block's color.
  • Linked words can have a color too, so a link can be green instead of your link color.
  • In emails the color shows in Gmail, Outlook and Apple Mail, and the checks warn when a color is hard to read on its background.
  • On pages it works in a Text block, the line under the heading in Top and the answers in Questions. Through the API and MCP, colored words are written [the words]{#e4572e}.

Picking words with the mouse in the email editor is steadier too. Moving the mouse over the email used to redraw every block, and words picked in that moment lost their selection, so there was nothing to put a link or a color on.

Team alerts: message text stays out

Team alerts for Slack and Discord no longer send the words of a DM or a comment. A note still says who wrote and in which channel, when you have turned on Include names and email addresses, and the link opens the conversation in Postfjord.

If you already use team alerts, nothing needs to be done. Open Settings → Apps to see the new wording under What to send. The help page has the steps for both services.

STOP works in more languages

People can now stop your automated DMs in German, French, Spanish, Portuguese, Norwegian, Danish and Finnish too, as well as English and Swedish. "Abmelden", "désabonner", "darme de baja" and "descadastrar" all work, with or without accents, capitals or emoji.

Some of these words are everyday words as well. Spanish "para" also means "for", and Portuguese "sair" also means "to leave". Those only count when they are the whole message, so "Para, por favor" stops the automations and "para mi hija" does not.

You can still answer anyone yourself from the inbox. See Automations.

Make a new tag right in a signup form

A signup form could only use tags you had made before, under Contacts. Now you can make one where you need it.

  • Open Edit the form and look under Tags for people who sign up.
  • Pick a tag in the list, or type a name under New tag name and press +. The new tag is made and added to the form.
  • It works the same way as in a DM automation. Press Save form to keep it.

Disconnect Shopify removes the app the way Shopify asks for now

When you press Disconnect Shopify on a store you connected with Connect with Shopify, Postfjord removes its app from your store with Shopify's newer GraphQL API. Nothing changes for you: the webhooks and the app still leave your store, and if Shopify cannot be reached, Postfjord still disconnects on its side and deletes the keys. See Shopify.

A setup page for every email, and emails to a tag

An email now opens on its setup page, with five rows and a bar that shows how many are done: To, From, Subject, Send time and Content. Click a row, fill it in and save, and it gets a tick. Send stays off until all five are done.

To can now be people with a tag, not only everyone who said yes or a saved segment. Pick one or more tags, and a person needs just one of them. The big number counts only people who said yes to your emails. Before, the Send screen showed the size of the whole list even when you picked a segment. Now it shows the people in that segment or with that tag, and the finish date uses the same number.

The email remembers who it goes to. Bo and AI apps can draft an email to a tag, "to everyone with the tag yearly pass", and say how many it reaches. Nothing is sent until you press Send. If a tag the email goes to is deleted, the email cannot be sent until you pick again.

Subject has the preview text next to it and a Claude button for ideas. While you design, To, From and Subject stay in a bar above the editor.

The Send screen is cleaner: who gets it, when, and the web version, with the number on one line and the details behind a button. On a phone it fills the screen.

Share this email makes a post draft for every connected channel about the email, set for 30 minutes after it goes out.

Starting a new email looks new too: your templates, designed templates and simple layouts on top, then your recent emails as big cards with Use this email.

A calmer Contacts page

Contacts has one row of tools now. Search, pick a segment, or press Filters to filter by tag, channel, status, source, activity, birthday or email. The filters that are on show as chips under the search, with how many contacts match. Press the x on a chip to take a filter off.

Import contacts is the one button at the top. Export CSV, Mailchimp CSV and Add name and birthday fields are under More. Delete segment is in the segment menu, and Columns is a small button at the end of the table header.

The top of the page says how many contacts you have and how many can get email, as plain numbers. On a phone each contact is a card with the name, the email status, the tags and the day you last talked, and the filters open from the bottom of the screen.

The composer checks posts that ask people to comment a word

A post like "Comment GUIDE and I'll send you the guide" only works where something sends the guide. Now a yellow Check the comment word box shows above Schedule when nobody would answer the word:

  • the post goes to a channel that cannot answer a comment with a DM, such as X, LinkedIn, Threads, Bluesky or Mastodon, or
  • it goes to Instagram or Facebook, and no comment automation that is on answers that word there.

It is a warning: you can still schedule the post. Posts scheduled through the API or an AI app get the same check as a warnings list in the answer.

Bo writes these posts with more care too. When a post explains the idea, he writes it as an example ("your followers comment a word"), and he never promises a guide, code or link that no automation sends. See Composer.

Postfjord's AI runs on Claude Sonnet 5.5 and Claude Haiku 5.5

  • Drafts, emails, plans, the strategy and Bo now run on Claude Sonnet 5.5. Labels, checks, short rewrites and replies run on Claude Haiku 5.5. Your AI budget stays the same and goes further, because the short jobs cost less.
  • If Claude turns down a request, you get a clear message to ask another way. Nothing half written is saved.
  • With your own Anthropic key, a new connection suggests the same two models. A key you already connected keeps the models you picked under Settings, AI.

Canva is open on every plan

Canva approved the Postfjord app, so Design in Canva is open on every plan, not only for testers. Connect your Canva account on the Canva card in Settings, Apps, then make a picture in Canva and bring it straight into a post or your media library. Design in Canva

Bo can now work in every part of the app

Bo, your manager, can now do most of what you do in the app: posts, email, contacts, the inbox, comments, mentions, DM automations, pages and Flows.

Ask in plain words: "move next week's posts one day later", "send the spring email on Friday at nine", "make a landing page for the workshop". Bo reads what it needs and makes drafts and changes inside your workspace straight away.

Anything that reaches people, goes public, runs by itself or cannot be undone waits for you, and so does a change to your strategy or brand profile. You get a card that says what will happen and one button. Nothing happens until you press it.

On your own ChatGPT, Gemini, DeepSeek or Mistral key, Bo starts with the tools for the screen you opened the chat from. A few things stay in the app, like uploads from your device and your email sender. See Manager.

Undo in the page editor, and Cmd+Z while you type in an email

The page editor now has Undo and Redo at the top, and Cmd or Ctrl + Z works there too. It takes back blocks you added, removed, moved or changed, and changes under Look and Page. Typing in one field is one step.

In the email editor, Cmd or Ctrl + Z now works while you type in a block. It first takes back what you typed there, then the changes before it. Undo at the top does the same thing. Before, Cmd+Z did nothing until you left the text.

Removing a block in either editor shows a note at the bottom, Block removed., with Undo for about 8 seconds. One click brings the block back with everything in it.

TikTok for every workspace

TikTok approved Postfjord today, so every workspace can now connect a TikTok account under Channels and schedule videos to it.

Each TikTok post has a TikTok tab, and Send it to my TikTok inbox is chosen for you. At the time you set, the video lands in your TikTok inbox. Open the notice in the TikTok app, add sound and post it for everyone.

You can also choose Post it on TikTok, and Postfjord posts the video for you. TikTok does an extra check before an app may post videos that everyone sees. Until that check is done for Postfjord, those videos are set to Only me, so only you can see them.

The help page has the steps and the limits.

Tell Bo what to change in a Flow, and fix what it left out

You can now tell Bo what to change in a Flow's plan.

  • Write it or say it in Tell Bo what to change, for example "move the first post to Friday". Bo makes the plan again with the change and keeps the rest.
  • You read the new plan before you press Launch. Bo can change one plan 10 times.
  • Writing a goal also has a microphone now, so you can say what you want.
  • A small map over the plan shows the path a person takes, from the post to the emails.

When a Flow leaves something out, the plan now shows where to fix it.

  • Before Bo plans, he tells you if there is no address on postfjord.page or email is off, with a link to fix it.
  • Each thing under What is left out has a link: Connect a channel, Turn on email or Pick an address on postfjord.page.
  • Once it is fixed, press Plan again. You get a new plan with the missing part, and the old plan is put away.
  • The word to comment keeps letters such as Å, Ä and Ö. Before, FÖDELSEDAG became FDELSEDAG.

Flows can check followers, ask for a birthday and send a birthday email

Bo can now plan a whole birthday campaign from one sentence.

  • Follow check. Before the link, the DM asks people to follow you. Someone who does not follow yet is asked to follow first.
  • More questions on the form. A first name, a phone number and a date of birth, with a line on why you ask.
  • Birthday email. It goes every year at 09:00 on each person's birthday, only to the people the Flow brought in.
  • The plan shows each part, you can change or remove it, and the small map shows the whole path.
  • A birthday email automation can now be limited to one tag.

Resize a picture, and make a story from any post

Resize in the media library makes new shapes of one photo at once. Click a picture, press Resize, tick the shapes and press Save.

  • Square 1:1, Portrait 4:5 and Tall 9:16 are ticked for you. Five more shapes are there if you need them.
  • Each shape shows side by side. Drag to choose what shows, zoom in, or show the whole photo on a soft blurred background.
  • Each shape is saved as a new picture, like "Beach day 9x16". Your original photo never changes.
  • New pictures count toward your storage. Each plan makes a number a day: Free 24, Solo 100, Studio 250, Agency 500.

Make a story and Make a reel now sit on every post with pictures, in Posts and at the top of the post itself. A new draft opens and the post stays as it is, even one that already went out. A story of one picture is the picture itself: sharp, ready at once, and not one of the day's videos.

For developers: POST /v1/media/{id}/resize and the MCP tool postfjord_resize_media return the new media ids. POST /v1/reels and postfjord_make_reel take still: true for a story of one picture.

Pinterest is open to everyone

Pinterest approved Postfjord, so every workspace can now connect a Pinterest account under Channels and schedule pins. A pin can be one image, a carousel of 2 to 5 images, or one video, and it goes to the board you pick.

Pinterest accounts connected before today reached only Pinterest's test system. Their row under Channels asks for a Reconnect, and a pin scheduled to one stops with a note that says so. Press Reconnect, pick your default board again, then press Retry on the pins that stopped. The help page has the steps.

Mentions can search X

With the X add-on and your X account connected, Mentions looks for your keywords on X too. Untick X under Where to look on a keyword you do not need there. Posts from X show up in the same list as Bluesky and Hacker News, with a score, Reply to draft an answer, Copy text and Open post.

X charges for every post it hands over, so X has its own count of reads. The X add-on gives you 300 a month. Reads you do not use are saved, up to 900 together with the month's. The owner can buy 1,000 more for $9, once, and those never run out.

Postfjord shares the reads out over the days of the month, so one busy keyword cannot use them all in a day. You see what is left under All settings → Mentions → X reads. When the reads run out, only the X searches wait. Everything else in Mentions keeps working. How it works is in Mentions.

Make it a reel

A post with pictures can now become a short tall video for Instagram Reels and Stories, TikTok. Press Make it a reel under Media in the composer.

  • One picture, or up to 10, become a video of 5 to 30 seconds.
  • Each picture moves slowly toward the part you chose under Fit, and fades into the next.
  • Add a short line of text if you like. It gets the font and colors of your brand kit.
  • Pick Reel for the channels that show short videos, like Instagram and Facebook, or Story for Instagram.

The video takes about a minute. It goes in your media library and on a new draft with your post's text. Nothing is posted until you schedule the draft. The video has no music.

Each plan makes a few videos a day: Free 2, Solo 10, Studio 25, Agency 50.

For developers: POST /v1/reels and the MCP tool postfjord_make_reel return the new media id and draft id at once. GET /v1/media/:id says when the video is ready.

New blocks go where you are, in emails and pages

A block you add now goes right after the one you have selected (in an email) or open (on a page), and the editor scrolls to it. With nothing selected, it goes at the end, as before.

Point between two blocks and a + shows up: press it to add a block in that exact place. On a phone and a tablet the + is always there. Escape closes the list of blocks, and in an email the list opens upwards when there is no room under it, so it is never cut off.

On a page you can now drag a block by its handle to move it, next to the arrows. Alt + Up and Alt + Down move a block, as in the email editor.

Fit your picture to each channel in the composer

Each channel's tab in the composer now has Fit. It shows your picture in that channel's frame, exactly as it will be sent.

  • Pick a shape: Auto, the photo's own shape, or a fixed one like square or 4:5.
  • Pick Crop and drag the picture to choose what shows. Zoom in up to 4x. Reset goes back to the automatic crop.
  • Pick Show whole image and nothing is cut. The empty space gets a soft blurred copy of the photo.
  • It works with a finger on a phone, and with the arrow keys, plus and minus on a computer.

The preview on the right uses the same frame, so a Facebook or LinkedIn photo no longer shows as 16:9 when the whole photo is sent. New channels start on Auto. Posts you made before keep their old shape until you change something under Fit.

Very large photos work too, like a panorama or a 200 megapixel phone photo. If Postfjord cannot read a photo well enough to shape it, the channel sends it as before, so the post still goes out.

AI apps can show and change how a picture fits each channel

ChatGPT, Claude, Gemini and other AI apps can now work with Fit, the picture shape of each channel.

  • Before it schedules a post, the app can show you the exact picture each channel will send.
  • It can change a channel's shape, move the crop, zoom in, or show the whole picture with a soft blurred copy around it.
  • The app is told to look at the pictures with you first, and to show the whole picture when a crop would cut off a person or words.
  • For a picture in your library, the app can also see how it looks as a square, 4:5, 16:9 and 9:16.

Looking at a picture changes nothing on the post. The links work for one hour. With a Read only key the app sees only the pictures that are made already.

For developers: targets.<channelId> takes aspect and fit in POST and PATCH /v1/posts, GET /v1/channels lists aspects, GET /v1/media/:id returns previews, and GET /v1/posts/:id/previews is new. The MCP tool is postfjord_preview_post.

Signup forms can ask for a phone number and a date of birth

A signup form can now ask for a phone number and a date of birth.

  • Tick Ask for a phone number or Ask for the date of birth under Edit the form. The fields show on the form page and in the form block on your landing pages.
  • The date of birth becomes the contact's birthday, so a birthday email goes out on the day, every year.
  • People can write 900314, 1990-03-14 or 14 March 1990. Of a whole Swedish personal number, only the date is saved.
  • Write a line on why you ask. It shows under the fields.
  • A signup never changes a phone number or birthday a contact already has.

Text color in the email editor

Picking a color for a heading, a text block or a button in the email editor changed the background behind the words, not the words. The inspector had one setting called Color, and it was the background.

Now there are two, each named for what it changes. Text color colors the words of a heading, a text block or a button. Background color fills the block behind them. Automatic under Text color gives back the readable color Postfjord picks for you. The email you send shows the same colors as the editor, and the checks stop the send if a text color would disappear on its background.

You can also ask Claude in the editor to make a heading red, and it changes the words. See Email campaigns.

Social icons in emails, one list for the footer, and a footer logo

The Social links block in the email editor now shows round icons instead of words. Tick the networks you want in the panel on the right. Postfjord fills in the addresses from your connected accounts, so you only type one when it does not know it. The block and the footer use the same list, so the icons match everywhere. A sentence next to the boxes says that the list is used in every email. A Website icon, a short heading and left, middle or right are set for each email.

Social blocks made before today keep their typed links and now show them as icons. Use the shared list moves one onto the list without losing a link.

Claude can add the block and pick the networks when you ask in the line under the email.

A Facebook Page in the footer now links to the Page's own name, like facebook.com/yourpage, instead of a long number. Press Reconnect under Channels once to get it. Instagram always links to your username.

Footer look under Email settings has its own footer logo now: pick it from Media or upload it, and choose small, medium or large. Picture along the bottom says it is a wide landscape, and warns when the picture is square or tall, with Use as logo instead.

The preview shows pictures from the start. With Show images off, each picture becomes its alt text instead of a broken picture.

Blocks side by side in emails, and Claude's note says what really changed

You can now put two or three blocks next to each other, like a GIF and a button. Click a block, press the two-columns icon in its toolbar, and pick Side by side with the block above or below. On a phone, press Side by side in the bar at the bottom. Move out of columns takes a block out again, right under its row, and Undo takes back either step.

The columns block is now called Side by side (columns), with a line that says what it is for. A new search box above the blocks finds it when you type "side", "next to" or "columns".

Claude can do it too: "put the button next to the GIF" works in the line under the email.

The note after a change to the email is now made from what really changed: Changed: Spacer removed (2)., and under it what was not done and why. Before, Claude could say it had removed a block when nothing had changed. If Claude's answer cannot be read, nothing changes and the note says so. A change that only removed blocks now shows up in the email right away; before, it was dropped.

Preview on Desktop now shows columns side by side, as a mail app on a computer does. Before, it showed them one under the other, like a phone.

Small fixes in the email and page editors

We clicked through both editors in a real browser, on a computer and on a phone, and fixed what we found.

  • In an email, Escape now closes the text you are typing in. The block stays selected, so a second Escape or Delete acts on it.
  • On a phone, changing a link with Edit on the link card now keeps the words. Before, pressing Enter could swap the linked words for an empty line.
  • An email address you link with no words picked now shows as hello [at] yoursite.com in the text, without mailto: in front.
  • On a phone, every button in the bar under the email fits on the screen. Duplicate and Delete were cut off before.
  • A click on a link in the page preview no longer opens that website inside the preview.

Notes on the calendar, and many posts changed at once

You can now put a note on the calendar for a day or a few days in a row, like "Black Friday" or "Studio closed". Press Add note at the top of the calendar, write a title and pick the days and a colour. Everyone in the workspace sees it above the posts of those days. Drag a note to another day to move it. Nothing is ever posted from a note.

You can also change up to 200 posts in one go. Press Select in the calendar or in Posts, pick the posts, then Move them by some days or to a new start date, Make drafts, Cancel posts or Delete. Delete asks first and says how many. A line then tells you how many changed, and why any stayed as they were.

AI apps with your key can read and write notes and change many posts too. Read more.

New automations wait until you switch them on

A new DM automation no longer starts answering the moment you save it.

  • The last step has Switch it on now. It is off from the start.
  • Off, the automation is saved as Paused. Switch it on from the list when you have looked it over.
  • An automation you make for a post in the composer is still on, so it answers when that post goes out.

A clearer automation builder, with a real phone preview

The automation builder and the gallery got a new look.

  • The phone looks like Instagram. Dark mode, your account's own picture and name, and the post you picked with its photo and text. Under the phone, Post, Comments and DM show each part of a comment automation. It follows the field you are in. A Facebook Page gets Messenger's look.
  • Settings on the left, the phone on the right. Plain headings like And the comment has and Then they get, and big rows with a switch. On a phone the preview is behind a Preview button.
  • The follow check can come first. Under Opening DM, pick The follow check and people get the link after one tap instead of two.
  • Why does an opening DM matter? A short explanation with the whole chat in the phone.
  • Big cards in the gallery, with filters by goal and by trigger, a search box and Recommended first. A click anywhere on a card opens it.
  • The search understands Swedish, like "skicka en länk när någon kommenterar födelsedag".
  • Texts in your brand's language. Public replies, follow check texts and buttons start in your Language of posts, also when the app is in English.
  • A switch on each automation in the list turns it on and off.

A STOP is known by username and name too

Someone who wrote STOP in a DM is now also known by their Instagram username, and on Facebook by their name. A comment automation and the Message button under Comments check those before any DM, also after you delete the contact.

A Pause pressed while a comment is being answered now also stops the public reply under the comment. See Automations.

STOP holds when someone comments later

Someone who wrote STOP in a DM gets no DM from a comment automation when they comment on a post later. Before, Postfjord could miss the STOP when Instagram gave the comment a different id than the DM.

If Postfjord cannot check whether someone wrote STOP, it sends nothing. A comment automation shows the person under Retrying and checks again a few minutes later. See Automations.

Up to 5 feeds for New blog post to drafts

New blog post to drafts now takes up to 5 feeds. Each feed has its own name, its own channels and its own time of day. For example, your blog can go to every channel in the morning, and your product news to X only in the afternoon.

Your feed from before keeps working with nothing to do. It keeps the posts it has already seen, so no old posts become drafts. Check now works for one feed at a time, and Remove asks first. The drafts a feed already made stay in Posts. See One idea, every format.

Each channel can get its own picture shape

Postfjord can now send a picture in a different shape to each channel. A channel can keep the picture's own shape, use a fixed shape like square or 4:5, move the crop, zoom in, or show the whole picture on a soft blurred background. Postfjord makes that file once, when the post is scheduled, and sends exactly that file.

Posts made through the API or an AI app get Auto on every channel. Auto keeps the picture's own shape when the network shows it as it is. A wide photo to Instagram now goes out wide, up to 1.91:1, instead of being cut to 4:5. A picture that is too tall or too wide gets the nearest shape the network allows.

Posts you already made stay as they are. The Fit panel in the composer comes next.

Pause everything with one switch

When something goes wrong, an owner can now stop everything the workspace would send with one switch. Find Pause everything under Settings → General. Scheduled posts and emails wait, and automatic DM, comment and email replies stop. Messages still arrive in the Inbox, and you can still reply and publish by hand.

Everyone in the workspace sees a notice at the top of the app with who paused it and when, and owners can press Resume there. You can also pick a time to start again by itself.

Nothing you missed goes out when you resume. Posts and emails whose time came during the pause wait under Missed while paused, where you publish them now, pick a new time or keep them as drafts. Read more.

AI apps no longer make a post twice

When ChatGPT, Claude or Gemini works in your workspace and sends the same request twice, Postfjord now does it once. You get one draft, one scheduled post, one email or one reply, not two. This holds for posts, publish now, pictures and videos, emails, replies in the Inbox, automations and landing pages.

An AI app can also check a post before it schedules it. Postfjord answers with the accounts it goes to, the time in your own time zone and anything that would stop it, and saves nothing.

There is nothing to switch on. Apps that use the API with a key can send their own request id for the same result. How it works is in MCP.

Mentions: see who talks about you, and answer

Inbox has a new view, Mentions. Add your brand name as a keyword and Postfjord looks for it on Bluesky and Hacker News every few minutes. Posts that tag your Instagram account, and reviews of your own app on the App Store and Google Play show up in the same list.

Each mention gets a score from 0 to 100, a mood and one line that says what it is about, so the ones worth an answer come first. Sort them into New, Saved and Done. Press Reply and Bo drafts an answer in your voice. Instagram, and Google Play answers go out from Postfjord. So do answers to Bluesky posts, when you have a Bluesky account connected: press Reply as @yourhandle and confirm. For the rest you copy the text and paste it on the post.

New keywords also watch the news. Postfjord finds articles from sites around the world by their headline, once an hour, and shows the headline with a link and News via GDELT. There is nothing to answer there, so a news card has no Reply.

Adding an App Store app is simpler: type your Issuer ID, choose the key file and press Find my apps, then pick your app from the list. The help page has a step by step guide with pictures: Add your apps to Mentions.

Free has 1 keyword, Solo 3, Studio 10 and Agency 25. The Keyword pack adds 10 more for $9 a month. Set it up under All settings → Mentions. How it works is in Mentions.

Grok Bot and Hermes Agent connect to Postfjord

Grok Bot from xAI and Hermes Agent from Nous Research now connect to Postfjord with your Postfjord login. You paste no key. Both are in the app directory under Settings, Apps, and on postfjord.com/integrations.

  • Grok Bot: write "Add a custom MCP server called Postfjord at https://app.postfjord.com/api/mcp", press Add it, then Authorize, and sign in. It needs SuperGrok or a paid Cursor plan.
  • Hermes Agent: run hermes mcp add postfjord --url https://app.postfjord.com/api/mcp --auth oauth, sign in and press Allow within 30 seconds.

We tested both on October 6: they listed the channels, read the brand profile, wrote a draft and found it in the calendar, read analytics, the Inbox, automations and pages, and removed the draft again. See MCP server.

Smaller fixes to comments and the API

A private reply from Comments waits while Meta asks Postfjord to slow down, like the automations do. A public reply that reached Instagram or Facebook but could not be saved here now says it went, so you do not post it twice.

A comment written while everything was paused gets no automatic reply after you resume, also when Postfjord finds it later.

For apps: a closed Flow answers 403 like the other closed features, a list of mentions says when its cursor is gone, and tags made for a form or an automation that was refused are taken back.

Answer Instagram and Facebook comments from the Inbox

Inbox has a new view, Comments. It lists the comments on your Instagram and Facebook posts, grouped by post, with the newest first. Unanswered shows the ones still waiting for you.

Press Reply to answer under a comment, or Draft with Bo for a reply in your brand voice. Send a DM writes to the person in private, once for each comment, within 7 days. You can also hide, delete, like a comment on Facebook, and mark it done.

You see when an automation already answered a comment. Postfjord asks before a person gets a second DM on the same post, and never writes to someone who asked you to stop. How it works is in Inbox.

Bo plans next week every Sunday

On the Strategy page you can now switch on Sunday drafts. Every Sunday at 6 pm in your time zone, Bo writes next week's posts from your strategy: as many as your rhythm says, split over your content pillars by their shares, with each channel's own plan where it has one.

The week waits on the plan page for your yes, and the person who switched it on gets an email when it is ready. If the week already has a plan, made with Plan next week or earlier, Bo leaves it alone. Only the posts you approve go into the calendar. Sunday drafts are off until you switch them on, and on Free Bo plans up to 3 posts a week. Read more.

A strategy that Bo follows

There is a new page in the menu, Strategy. It holds your plan on one page: your goal, who you post for, why people follow you, your content pillars with a share of posts each, how many posts a week, and what to lean into or avoid.

Press Let Bo write a first draft, and Bo writes one from your brand voice and your latest posts. Change what you want and press Save. Each connected channel has its own tab, where you can set its own posts per week and shares.

Once it is saved, Bo reads the strategy before every post it drafts and every week it plans. Read more.

Pick your Shopify store in Shopify

Connect with Shopify no longer asks for your store's name. Press it, sign in to Shopify if it asks, and pick your store there. Back in Postfjord, the workspace you started in is already picked. Press Connect the store.

New to Postfjord and coming from your own Shopify store? Make an account and a workspace, and you get in right away, without waiting for early access. A development store still waits.

Postfjord now asks Shopify for two read scopes: products and orders. It no longer asks to read your customers. A store connected before keeps working.

Advanced, an app you made yourself, is now for developers and older setups. The card shows it when your workspace is connected that way. Read more.

Connect Shopify with one press

You can now connect your Shopify store without making an app of your own. Open Settings, Apps, Shopify, type your store's name and press Connect with Shopify. Shopify asks you to approve Postfjord, and you come back connected.

You can also start from your Shopify admin. After you press Install there, sign in to Postfjord and pick the workspace for the store.

Editors can connect the store now, not only the owner. The way you used before, pasting an app you made yourself, is still there under Advanced on the card. Read more.

Shopify for every workspace

Every workspace can now connect a Shopify store. Open Settings, Apps, Shopify, type your store's name and press Connect with Shopify. You approve Postfjord in Shopify and come back connected.

Then sell your products where people already talk to you: a product card in a DM automation, a Products block on your landing pages and link in bio, and products in your posts from the composer.

Each order counts for the DM, email or page the buyer came from. Buyers who are contacts get the tag Customer, and a refund takes its amount off again. How it works.

Your newsletters and pages become post drafts

The ready routines under Manager, Routines are now cards, in three groups: Daily rhythm, Made by you and Cross-platform. Each card shows where Bo reads from and where the drafts land, with an arrow between them.

Made by you is new:

  1. Newsletter to posts. When you send a newsletter from Postfjord, Bo writes 2 or 3 post drafts from its best ideas.
  2. New page to posts. When you publish a new page on postfjord.page, Bo writes a post that points people to it.
  3. New blog post to drafts has a card here too. It opens the setting under Settings, Apps, Your blog.

Cross-platform also has a new one: Best post to your other channels writes a version of your best post for each of your other channels.

They follow your strategy and your brand voice. Each takes one new thing at a time, at most 3 a day (1 on Free), and writes drafts only. Nothing is posted until you schedule it. When your AI budget for the month is used up, they wait quietly and try again the next day. Read more.

Sell your Shopify products in DMs and on pages

A DM automation can now show a product from your Shopify store. Press Add a Shopify product on the message with the link, and the DM shows the product's name and price with a Buy now button. On Messenger it is a card with the product's picture.

Landing pages and your link in bio page have a new block, Products: up to six products in a grid, each with its picture, price and a button. It shows in Add block once your store is connected.

When you add a product to an Instagram post in the composer, a note offers Add to my link in bio, since a link in an Instagram caption cannot be tapped. One press puts the product on your link in bio page.

Orders from these buttons count for the automation or the page they came from, on the Shopify card and on a page's Numbers tab. Read more.

Repost your best posts with Redraft

Analytics now shows Your best content to repost under Week by week: your posts with the most likes and comments in the last 90 days.

Press Redraft on one, and Bo writes a fresh version with a new first line and new words. It opens in the composer as a draft, so you check it and schedule it yourself. Each post can be redrafted once every 30 days, so the same words do not come back within a month. Read more.

Plan against reality

Your strategy now meets your real posts.

  • A pillar on every post. Pick one in the post editor, or leave it on Bo picks and Postfjord picks one when the post is scheduled or goes out. Your own pick always wins. On paid plans, posts made in the Instagram or Facebook app get a pillar during the night too.
  • Plan against reality at the top of Analytics: the share you planned for each pillar next to what you posted, likes and comments per pillar, and whether you kept your rhythm.
  • Bo's idea on Mondays. When one pillar clearly does better, Bo suggests a bigger share for it. Apply changes your strategy, Not now puts the idea away.
  • Your year of posts: a square for each day of the last year, darker on the days you posted more.

Read more.

See your page full screen, and pick a photo's size

Press Preview in the page editor to see the page full screen, as visitors will see it, before you publish. Switch between a phone and a computer at the top, and press Close to go back. Nothing is published, and only people in your workspace can see it.

A Photo block has a new Size: Full, Medium or Small. Medium and small photos are narrower and sit in the middle of the page. On a phone, a medium photo fills the width and a small one takes most of it. Read more.

Instagram comments get their reply even when Instagram forgets to tell us

Instagram tells Postfjord about a new comment within seconds, but now and then it skips one. Then the person who commented your keyword got no DM.

Now Postfjord also looks at the newest comments on the posts your comment automations listen on, every 3 minutes. A comment Instagram did not send gets its reply a few minutes late instead of never.

We look back 24 hours at most, and never at comments made before you turned the automation on or last saved it. Each person still gets one reply per post. You do not need to do anything. Read more.

Milestones for followers and views

Each account now earns badges as it grows: 100, 500, 1K, 5K, 10K, 25K, 50K and 100K followers, and 10K, 100K and 1M views. You find them on Analytics, Channels, with the day each one was reached.

When an account passes a new step, Bo says well done on the Dashboard. Badges an account had before Postfjord started counting are saved too, but Bo stays quiet about those. Read more.

Breakouts on Watch, with Make my version

Watch on Analytics now starts with Breakouts: posts from the Instagram accounts you watch that got at least 3 times the likes and comments that account usually gets. Each one says why in plain numbers.

Press Make my version and Bo writes a new post for your Instagram on the same idea, in your own words. Bo never copies the original and never tags or names the other account. It is saved as a draft, and nothing is posted.

Each version is one AI call on your AI budget. Free makes 3 a month and paid plans 30, per workspace. Breakouts come from the lookups Watch already makes. Read more.

Ask Bo instead while you wait

When a conversation in Messages waits for Nicklas, a button Ask Bo instead lets Bo answer your next message right away. Nicklas still has the conversation and answers too. Something is broken always goes to Nicklas. Read more.

Watch other Instagram accounts

Analytics has a new view, Watch. Type the username of a public Instagram business or creator account, and Postfjord shows its followers, how many posts it has, and its 12 latest posts with likes, comments and the date.

It needs your own Instagram connected through Instagram + Facebook. The posts update when you open Watch, at most every 6 hours. Free watches 1 account, Solo 5, Studio 10 and Agency 25, per workspace. Press Remove to stop watching an account, and Postfjord deletes what it kept about it.

Private, personal and age-restricted accounts cannot be watched, because Instagram does not share them. Read more.

A note when Postfjord is updated

When a new version of Postfjord is ready, a small note at the bottom of the screen says so, with an Update button. It shows on a phone and on a computer.

After Postfjord has updated itself, the note says Postfjord is updated. Press What's new to read what changed, or the cross to close it.

Postfjord only updates by itself in the first seconds after you open it, before you have started. After that it waits for you to press Update, so nothing you are working on is lost.

A small fjord on every ready-made automation

Press New automation and each group and card now has a small painted picture of the fjord in place of an icon.

The time of day tells you the goal: dawn for welcome, morning for a free guide, a summer day for a launch, sunset for a purchase and for answering messages, night for winning people back and fog for dates. Cards in the same group each get their own light, mountains and sun, so you can tell them apart. Open an email automation to see its whole flow, and the same picture sits at the top.

See an automation step by step

Every automation card has a new link, See every step. It shows the automation as it is set up, as numbered steps in plain words: "Starts when someone comments "guide" on any post", then the reply under the comment, the DM and its button, and where the link goes. Email automations show each email with its subject and when it goes out.

Each step shows its numbers where Postfjord has them. A step that will not work as planned, like an empty link or a deleted tag, is marked in red with what is missing.

Press Edit to change it or Close to go back. Read more.

A shorter menu, and one place for automations

The menu is shorter and goes by what you do: Home, Calendar, Inbox and Bo at the top, then what you create (Posts, Emails, Pages, Automations), then Contacts and Analytics, and Settings at the bottom.

  • Automations holds your DM and email automations on one page. All, DMs and comments and Email at the top show one kind at a time. New automation asks what you want to happen, then shows the ones that fit.
  • Dock and Ideas are at the top of Posts.
  • Media and Channels are in Settings.
  • In the light theme the menu is light too.

Old links still work and lead to the new places.

A lighter top on the dashboard, the Dock and Ideas

The dark band at the top of the dashboard, the Creative Dock and Ideas is now low and light. It shows painted mountains under a pale sky, or a calm evening sky in the dark theme, with a smaller title and one line under it. Your cards start higher on the screen, so you see more without scrolling.

Every button and number is still there. Customize, Focus, Ideas from Bo and the help button sit in the top right corner, and Bo still climbs over the mountains as the week goes by.

Instagram connected two ways, explained

An Instagram account can be connected with the Instagram + Facebook card or the Instagram only card. When it was connected both ways, Instagram let only one of them answer a chat, and a reply from the Inbox or an automation failed with Meta's own words.

Now a reply that fails for this reason says what happened and what to do, in four short steps. Automations write the same reason in the thread and in the Failed list.

Connecting an account that this workspace already has the other way no longer switches it on its own. The list says how it is connected now and leaves it unticked. Tick it to switch: chats, contacts, posts and automations stay where they are.

Free photos show up faster, with clearer ideas

In Free photos, the first photos now load right away, and each tile shows a soft placeholder until its photo is in. Photos further down load as you scroll to them.

The ideas under the search field are easier to use. Only a short content pillar from your brand profile becomes an idea, one to three words on its own line, like *Healthy recipes*. A long sentence no longer turns into odd words. The ideas for the time of year are still there.

Six email templates built around a photo

A new email now offers six templates with a big photo at the top, one per goal: welcome, newsletter, sale, event, product launch and thank you. They sit first in the list under With a big photo, in your logo and brand colours.

Each photo slot starts empty and says what kind of photo fits, like "Your best seller on a clean background". Click the slot, press Choose image, and upload a photo or pick one from Media. The editor now says this on every empty photo slot.

Your other ten templates are still there, under More templates. Read more.

Say what you want, get the right automation

New automation now starts with one box: What do you want to happen? Write it in your own words, like "send my free guide when someone comments GUIDE".

As you type, the best fits show up under the box, with the words they matched and where they work: Instagram & Facebook or Email. Press one to open it. If nothing fits, the box says so and the usual list is right below. It runs in your browser and does not use AI.

Messages in the Help panel, with Bo and Nicklas

The Help button now opens three tabs: Home, Help and Messages. Home says hello and lists the ways to reach us. Help searches the help pages.

Messages is your conversation with Postfjord. Bo answers questions within seconds. When Bo does not know, or you press Talk to Nicklas, Nicklas answers himself, usually within a day, and you get an email when he does. Something is broken goes straight to him.

You can add up to three pictures, an emoji, a GIF or a voice message of up to two minutes. A red number on the Help button shows a new answer. Read more.

Drag a picture onto a day in the calendar

On a computer the calendar shows your newest pictures in a row above the week or month. Drag one onto a day, and the composer opens with the picture in the post and that day picked at 9:00. Press a picture instead to start a post with it and pick the day yourself, which also works with the keyboard. Hide pictures folds the row away. Read more.

Automations say where they work

New automation now asks one thing first: should it work on Instagram & Facebook or by Email? If something is missing, like a connected Instagram or Facebook account, it says so on the choice, with a button that fixes it.

Every automation in the list also says where it works, with the Instagram, Facebook or email mark next to its name. The filters on the Automations page are called Instagram & Facebook and Email, and an empty list says what to do next.

See how your numbers changed from the days before

On Analytics, under Channels, each number at the top now has an arrow and a percent. It compares the days you picked with the same number of days just before. Pick 30 days, and it says, for example, "Up 12% from the 30 days before". Green means it went the good way, red means it did not.

Only channels with numbers for both periods count. When there are no numbers for the days before yet, no arrow shows. Read more.

Know when a post did better than usual

When a post gets at least twice the reach, likes and comments, or comments that your posts usually get on the same account, Postfjord tells you. It works on the accounts where Postfjord reads likes and comments, such as Instagram and Facebook. You see it on the Dashboard under Needs attention, with a green dot, and as a green line on the post in Posts. It says the numbers plainly, for example "It reached 4,200 people. Your posts usually reach 1,100."

"Usual" is the middle value of the 20 posts before it on the same account. A post must also reach at least 500 people, get 30 likes and comments, or get 10 comments, so small accounts are not told about small changes. Each post is told once. Nothing is emailed or sent to Slack or Discord. Read more.

Postfjord on Zapier

You can connect Postfjord to Zapier and the apps you already use. Press the Zapier card under Settings → Apps, make a key and paste it in Zapier.

A new contact, a confirmed form signup, a sale, a published post or a new conversation can start a Zap. A Zap can make a draft post, add or update a contact, add a tag, find a contact by email, and start an email automation for someone who has confirmed.

Contacts from Zapier get your emails only after they click the link in the confirmation email. The help page has the steps.

A page for every video, so Google and ChatGPT can read it

Each video you post on Instagram, TikTok or YouTube can now get its own page on your postfjord.page address. The page has what is said in the video, a short summary with headings, the questions the video answers and a button to the post. Google and AI assistants like ChatGPT read text and cannot watch a Reel, so this is how they find what you said.

Switch it on under Email, Landing pages, Video pages. Video pages live on postfjord.page like your other pages, so the page rules apply: if nobody in your workspace has accepted them yet, Postfjord asks first. A few minutes after a video goes out, its page is live, listed at /video and linked from your link in bio page. In the composer, Page for this video turns it off for one post, and shows the page once it is live.

Every plan has video pages: 3 a month on Free, 30 on Solo, 100 on Studio and 300 on Agency. Each page uses a little of your AI budget. The REST API and the MCP tools show the setting and the address, and take videoPage on a post.

Two-step sign-in before a new key

Making an API key, connecting Zapier or Make, or letting an AI app in through its sign-in page now needs two things first: a confirmed email address and two-step sign-in (an authenticator app or a passkey). The app shows what is left as a short list, red until done and green when done. Keys made before keep working.

Every version of the Terms you accepted

Postfjord now saves each version of the Terms you accept on its own. Accepting a new version keeps the date you accepted the old one. The page rules for Landing pages work the same way for your workspace.

Old versions stay readable. The Terms of 2 October 2026 are at postfjord.com/terms/2026-10-02, and each new version gets its own address the same way. The current Terms are always at postfjord.com/terms.

Open Account to see which version you accepted and when, in the new Terms card. Landing pages says when your workspace accepted the page rules, with a link to that version.

When the Terms change and you do not want to accept, press Open Account under the question. There you can cancel your plan or the X add-on, or withdraw from them, without writing to us first. Choosing or switching a plan waits until you accept.

See an automation before you make it

Press an email card in the automation gallery and you see the whole automation first: what starts it, how long it waits, and each email with its subject line.

Press Use this template to make it as a draft, or Back to look at another one. The help page has the steps.

Team alerts in Slack and Discord

Postfjord can now post a short note in a Slack or Discord channel when something needs your team: a DM nobody has taken, a comment no automation answered, a post that did not go out, a new signup, a sale or booking, or a channel that needs a Reconnect.

Open Settings → Apps, press Slack or Discord, paste the webhook address and press Save. You pick which notes go out. Each one links to the right place in Postfjord.

Names and email addresses stay out of the notes until you turn them on. The words of a DM or a comment are never sent. The help page has the steps for both.

Buttons with square corners

Buttons in the app now have softly squared corners instead of round ends. Status labels like Published keep their round shape, so a button never looks like a status.

Six new ready-made automations

The automation gallery has six new email automations, each with its emails written: Where to find us, Our best writing, Free email course, Waitlist, Ask for a review by email and Offer after a purchase. Fill in the parts in [brackets] and press Start.

Shopify orders and products

You can connect your Shopify store under Settings, Apps, Shopify. Postfjord then counts the orders that your DMs, emails and landing pages bring in, with the amount, and tags buyers who are contacts Customer.

An order can start an email automation that waits for a purchase, or a thank you in the DM thread. A refund takes its amount off again. The Shopify card also shows every order in your store this month, next to the ones Postfjord brought in.

In the composer, Shopify product adds a product's picture and link to the post. On a landing page, Pick a product fills a link or a picture.

The help page shows how to make the small app in Shopify that connects your store.

Settings are short lists you open

Each settings page is now a short list of boxes. Press a box to open it, press it again to close it.

The row of tabs at the top of Settings is gone. All settings at the top of each page takes you back to the list, also from the settings for the inbox, email and Bo, and from your account.

On your account, the X add-on shows the workspace you are in, not every workspace you own.

Sell from a page with your own Stripe Payment Link

Two new page templates take payment through your own Stripe account. There are now 20 templates.

Sales page, under Sell and launch, sells one product, course or service: who it is for, what the buyer gets, what a customer said, questions and a Buy button. Support my work, under Show your content, has a pay what you want button next to your latest posts. Both come in English, Swedish, German, French, Spanish and Portuguese, and carry the new tag Stripe payment in the list of templates.

Their buttons start with [your Stripe Payment Link] as the link, and the page cannot go live until you paste your own. The link field and the checks treat that placeholder as a link still to add, and the REST API and the MCP tools take the page with it, so an AI app can fill in the words first. The buyer pays on Stripe and the money goes straight to your Stripe account.

With Stripe connected under Settings, Apps, each sale and its amount show on the page's Numbers tab, as for any buy.stripe.com link on a page. The help page explains how to make a Payment Link in Stripe, with a set price or a pay what you want amount.

The REST API and the MCP tools now also save a draft from Product launch, Webinar or live class, Sale or limited offer and Event or workshop, whose countdown starts with no date. Until a date is picked, publish stops and says to pick the date the countdown ends.

Only Postfjord marks a post as published

Postfjord now saves the accounts on a post for you, on our server. See Composer.

An account the post already went out on, or is going out on right now, now stays on the post. In the composer its button is faded and cannot be clicked, and a line under the accounts says why. This also holds in the API. To post the same thing again, use Duplicate.

Drafts need an internet connection to save. If a save does not go through, the composer says so in red and tries again by itself until it says "Draft saved automatically". Your browser asks before you close a tab with changes that are not saved yet, and a draft deleted in Posts stays deleted even if it is still open somewhere.

Page templates for every goal

There are now 18 page templates, sorted by what the page is for: Get signups, Sell and launch, Get bookings, Visit us, Events, Show your content and Link in bio. Tabs at the top of the list show one group at a time. Under each template, a line says what it is for, and tags name what it uses: Countdown, Booking, Address and hours, Schedule, Latest posts, Signup form or Video pages.

New templates: Webinar or live class, Sale or limited offer, Salon, spa or clinic, Shop or local business, Event or workshop, Shop the feed, Creator or podcast and Link in bio for creators. Each comes in English, Swedish, German, French, Spanish and Portuguese.

Product launch now counts down to launch day. Newsletter lists the emails you sent instead of titles you type. A countdown in a template starts with no date, so a page never goes live with a deadline you did not pick.

postfjord.com lists every template by goal on the landing pages page.

The page rules come up when you open Landing pages

The rules for pages now come up when you open Email, Landing pages, until someone in your workspace has accepted them. Tick the box and press Accept, and Landing pages opens. Not now takes you back to where you were, and the rules come up again next time.

After that, Publish, a new address and the Video pages switch work without the box. You accept once for the whole workspace, and again only when the rules change.

  • A viewer cannot accept. Until an owner or editor has, a viewer sees Landing pages with a line that says so.
  • In the composer, Page for this video still shows the rules first if nobody has accepted them yet. Press Accept and it goes on with what you asked for.

See Landing pages.

Video pages and AI answers on the pricing page, and on Enterprise

The pricing page now shows two more numbers for each plan: how many video pages a workspace makes each month (3 on Free, 30 on Solo, 100 on Studio, 300 on Agency) and how many questions AI answers checks in ChatGPT and Claude each month (1, 5, 10 and 20).

On an Enterprise plan we set both numbers with you, like your other limits. Account shows them under Your limits.

Our pages about Ask for a review now name Google and Trustpilot. Yelp does not let businesses ask for reviews, so Postfjord warns you when you paste a Yelp link.

The privacy policy now says what a sale keeps when it starts an email automation: a one-way hash of the buyer's email address, never the address, so a refund can stop those emails. The hash is deleted with the contact.

A new way into Postfjord

Creating a workspace now takes four short steps with a list on the left that ticks itself off: your brand and website, what you do, what you want to do first, and your audience. Add your website and Postfjord reads your colors, fonts and logo into your brand kit. Your goal decides where you land: the composer, landing pages, email or the dashboard. There are now 14 kinds of business to pick from, among them coach, author, podcaster and YouTuber.

All your apps in one place, and a page for each on postfjord.com

Settings, Apps is now one directory of everything Postfjord connects to: social channels, your email list, booking systems, Stripe, AI apps like ChatGPT, Claude and Gemini, your own AI key, your blog, link tags and your sending domain. Search for an app, pick a kind with the buttons on top, and the apps you have connected come first. Each card says Connected, Set up, On, the plan it needs, or Reconnect when a channel stopped working. The email apps show once email is switched on for your workspace.

Press a card to open its setup on the same page: Mailchimp, Calendly and the other booking systems, Stripe, link tags, your blog and the AI apps work as before. A social channel opens Channels, your own AI key opens Settings, AI, and the sending domain opens Email settings. Your keys and the form to make a key by hand are still at the bottom.

postfjord.com has a new page, Integrations, with every integration that is live today and a page for each: what it does in Postfjord, how to connect it in three steps and what data moves where. The list in the app and the site come from the same place, so they always match.

The integration pages in German, French, Spanish and Portuguese

Every integration page on postfjord.com now has its own version in German, French, Spanish and Portuguese, at /de/integrations, /fr/integrations, /es/integrations and /pt/integrations. Each page says what the integration does, how to connect it in three steps and what data moves where, in the reader's language. The names of buttons and menus stay as the app shows them, so you can find them on screen.

Your pages can tell Google Analytics about new signups

Next to the Meta Pixel, Pages now has a Google Analytics card. Paste the Measurement ID and a Measurement Protocol API secret from your GA4 web stream, and a person who ticks the box on your signup form and signs up is sent to Google Analytics as a generate_lead event.

The box names what you have on: Meta, Google, or both. A signup goes only where the box said when the person ticked it.

Google never gets an email address or a name, and never hears about visits or taps. Each signup carries a visitor id made at random for that one event, so Google cannot follow anyone. Your pages still set no cookies and run no scripts.

Only the owner can connect it, and Send test event shows a test event in DebugView. Read more in Meta Pixel and Google Analytics on your pages.

Free tools on postfjord.com

postfjord.com/tools has three free tools that run in your browser, with no account. Nothing you type is sent to Postfjord or saved.

Best time to post makes a weekly posting plan on your own clock from where your followers live, for Instagram, Facebook, LinkedIn, TikTok, YouTube, Threads, X and Bluesky. Each platform has its own page. The plan downloads as a calendar file that repeats every week.

UTM builder adds the five UTM tags to a link the same way Postfjord tags the links it sends, warns about capital letters and spaces, and makes a QR code you can download as PNG or SVG.

SPF, DMARC and DKIM checker looks up a domain's records, counts SPF's 10 lookup limit, reads the DMARC policy, tries common DKIM selectors and gives you the record to paste when one is missing or wrong. A subdomain that sends through a service like Amazon SES is not told to add SPF it does not need.

The tools are in English, German, French, Spanish and Portuguese.

Free photos from Pixabay

You can search free photos without leaving Postfjord.

Press Choose media in a post or an email, or open Media, and press Free photos. Type what you need, or pick an idea, a color or landscape or portrait, and press the photo you like. Postfjord copies it into your media library, so it stays even if it is taken down on Pixabay.

The photos are free to use in posts and emails, and you do not have to name the photographer. The help page has the steps.

One idea and blog drafts write for every channel you pick

One idea to every format and New blog post to drafts now write for up to 12 channels in one go. Claude writes 5 channels per call and runs the calls at the same time, so 8 channels do not take longer than 5.

  • The API and the MCP tool postfjord_repurpose_idea take up to 12 channels in one call, up from 5.
  • If one call fails, you keep the drafts from the others, and the answer names the channels that got none. Send the same call again with the same ideaGroupId to write just those. The ideaGroupId is required for more than 5 channels.
  • The idea screen shows which channels are missing, with a Write the missing ones button that writes only those and keeps your other cards. A blog run tries them again next time.
  • Every call counts toward your AI budget.

Enterprise limits set for each customer

An Enterprise plan can now have its own numbers. We agree with you on every limit of the plan: workspaces, connected accounts, members, posts per month, AI budget, automations that run, active DM contacts, emails per month, automatic DMs per hour, analytics history, storage and landing pages. Every workspace you own on Enterprise gets them. Account lists all your limits under Your limits and marks the ones we set for you. Features stay the same on every plan. See Plans and billing.

Add photos and videos from Dropbox

Photos and videos in Dropbox can go straight into a post, without downloading them first.

Press Choose media in a post, or open Media, and press From Dropbox. Pick up to 20 files. Postfjord copies them into your media library, and in a post they are picked as soon as they land.

Postfjord gets a link to each file you pick and nothing else, and the copies count toward your storage like an upload. It works in the browser and in Postfjord installed on a computer. The help page has the steps.

Design in Canva

You can make a post picture in Canva and bring it straight into a post. Press Design in Canva in the composer or the media library, pick a size, and the design opens in Canva.

When it is ready, come back and press Add to post. Pictures come in page by page, up to 10, or the design comes in as one video. Every file counts toward your storage, like an upload.

A file from Canva keeps its link to the design, so Edit in Canva opens it again. Connect your Canva account once under Settings → Apps.

The help page has the steps.

Count your Cal.com bookings

Cal.com now works the way Calendly does. Paste an API key from Cal.com under Settings, Apps, Cal.com, and every booking made from a link in an automation, an email or a landing page counts for what sent the person. Everyone who books gets the tag Booked, a cancellation takes the booking off again, and a new time moves it.

The match is exact, because Postfjord's tags on a Cal.com link come back with the booking. A class with seats counts each person who takes a seat. Any Cal.com plan works, the free one too, on cal.com and cal.eu. A self-hosted Cal.com can send its bookings to your own booking address instead. More on Cal.com.

Import posts from a spreadsheet

The calendar has a new Import button. Choose a CSV file with one post per row, and Postfjord makes them all at once, as scheduled posts or as drafts.

Every row is checked before anything is made: the date and time in your workspace's time zone, the channel names, the text length for each channel, the picture or video address (Instagram, TikTok, YouTube and Pinterest need one to schedule) and the Instagram first comment. A row with a problem says what is wrong, and you can fix it on the page or skip it.

Dates like 11/2/2026 are read month first or day first for the whole file, and you can change the choice on the page. If an import stops halfway, choose the same file again to continue it without making any row twice.

A picture or video from a link is copied into your media library, like an upload. One file holds up to 200 rows. Download the template from the import page to start, and read Import posts from a spreadsheet for the columns and how to save a sheet as CSV.

Bo says hello, and settings in one list

In a new workspace Bo now says hello in the corner, with your first name and the next step to take. Settings opens on one list of everything you can set, with a line under each saying what is inside, from Brand kit to Sign-in and security.

Check post looks at what AI tools can quote

Check post in the composer now also tells you if ChatGPT, Claude, Gemini and Perplexity could quote the post. It looks at four things: the main point in the first lines, a real fact like a number or a price, short parts that are easy to skim, and a date or place when the post needs one. Bo gives one tip for the change that helps most. It is part of the same check, so there is no extra call, and it works on every plan.

When a post goes to fewer than four places and you have more channels, a line under the check offers Make this idea for more places, which opens One idea to every format with your text.

The dashboard has a quiet note when a live landing page, or an evergreen post while the evergreen schedule is off, has not changed in 30 days, with a link to each one. Postfjord never changes them for you. Not now hides the note for 30 days.

See if ChatGPT and Claude name you

Analytics has a new view, AI answers. Save the questions a new customer would ask, like "best yoga studio in Austin". Once a month Postfjord asks ChatGPT and Claude each one with web search on, and shows if they named you, which sites they used and the full answer, month by month. Press Check now to see it today. Every plan has it; the plan sets how many questions you keep, one on Free. See Analytics.

AI answers use your AI budget

AI answers now counts toward your workspace AI budget, like the other AI tools. One question costs about 5 to 15 cents a month for ChatGPT and Claude together. The number of questions stays the same: 1 on Free, 5 on Solo, 10 on Studio and 20 on Agency, each checked once a month.

When this month's AI budget is used up, Postfjord does not ask, and you do not lose a check. The screen says so. The check runs again next month, or after you raise the budget under Settings. See Analytics.

Safer recovery when someone knows your password

Your passkeys are now removed when you choose a new password with Forgot password?, when you press This was not me in an email about a new sign-in, and when you turn on two-step verification. Someone who only knew your password could have added one. Add yours again under Account.

If someone changes the email address on your account, Postfjord puts your confirmed address back by itself within 15 minutes, signs out every device and emails you.

The This was not me link in the email about two-step verification now works for 24 hours, down from 7 days, since anyone who can read your email could use it. Later than that, write to hello [at] postfjord.com.

Asking for a new password is now limited per network, and Admin checks that your session was not signed out.

Security updates for email and images

The parts that send Postfjord's own emails and process the images you upload got their latest security updates. Nothing changes in how you use them.

A fairer publishing queue and safer uploads

Every workspace now sends up to ten posts each minute. When you schedule more than ten for the same minute, the rest go out a minute or two later, so one busy workspace never holds up the others. See Posts.

A scheduled post with no channel switched on now moves to Failed with a note that says so. Before, it was marked as published even though nothing was sent. Press Back to draft, pick a channel and schedule it again.

The media library takes JPEG, PNG, WebP and GIF pictures, and the app turns most other pictures into a JPEG before upload. A picture it cannot open, in a format the library does not take, now gets a clear message right away. See Media library.

Give each post its own link on your link in bio page

A post in Latest posts on your link in bio page can now open a link of its own: a product, a booking or an article. Set it in the composer under Link in bio for this post. It is never added to the post itself, and you can change it after the post is out with Save link.

Postfjord checks the link the way it checks every link on a page before a tile opens it. A link that does not pass is left off, and the post opens where it was posted, as before.

New posts now usually show on your pages within minutes of going out, and at the latest overnight as before, also posts that went out on only some of their accounts. Under Numbers, every post gets its own row of taps.

The REST API and the MCP tools take bioLink on a post. A PATCH with bioLink alone changes it on a published post, with a key that may publish. Bo can set it on drafts.

An email when a post does not go out

When a scheduled post fails on a channel, the owners and editors of the workspace now get an email with the reason and a button that opens the post, where Retry is. One email per post a day, at most five an hour per workspace. Turn it off under Account, Publishing problems. See Posts.

The pages API says when a page is over your plan

When your plan has room for fewer landing pages than you have published, the ones past that number go offline. The REST API and the MCP tools now show these pages with the state over_plan. Before, they showed live or changed.

An over_plan page comes back online when you upgrade or unpublish another landing page. If your own script or AI app checks a page's state, add over_plan to the states it knows.

Accept the page rules before your first page goes live

The first time someone in your workspace presses Publish on a page, Postfjord shows four short rules for pages. Tick I accept the page rules and section 12 of the Terms and press Accept and publish. The page goes live as usual, and nobody else in the workspace is asked.

Pages that are live today keep running. The rules come up the next time you publish one of them, or give a live page a new address.

An AI app or the API can publish once someone has accepted the rules in the app. Until then, a publish from there stops and says to accept them in the app first. See Landing pages.

Show your address and opening hours on your pages

Landing pages and your link in bio page have a new block: Address and hours. It shows your address, your opening hours with today marked, a Call button and links to Google Maps and Apple Maps.

Above the hours it says Open now. Closes at 5 PM or Closed. Opens tomorrow at 9 AM, worked out in your time zone each time someone opens the page. Add special days like Thanksgiving, and they show on the page in the month before.

The Studio or gym intro offer and Café or restaurant templates now have this block in place of hours typed as text. Google can read your address and hours from the page.

Your pages can tell your Meta Pixel about new signups

Connect your Meta Pixel under Pages, and every signup form on your link in bio page and landing pages gets a box that is not ticked. When a person ticks it and signs up, your pixel hears about the new signup, so your Meta ads can see what they bring in.

Visits and taps are never sent to Meta, and neither is an email address or a name. A person who leaves the box empty signs up as before. Your pages still set no cookies and run no scripts.

Only the owner can connect it, and Send test event shows a test signup in Events Manager. Read more in Meta Pixel and Google Analytics on your pages.

Count down to a date on your pages

Landing pages and your link in bio page have a new block: Countdown. It shows the days, hours and minutes left until a date, like a launch on Fri, Nov 27 at 11:59 PM EST, with a button if you want one.

Pick what happens when the time is up: show a message with a second button, or hide the countdown. Press Preview, After to see it before it happens. Anyone who opens the page after that time sees the change, and you do not publish again.

The numbers are right when someone opens or reloads the page. The time left rounds up, so the page never shows less time than is left: with 47 hours to go, Days says 2 days.

Invisible bot protection in the app, watching first

The app at app.postfjord.com now runs Google reCAPTCHA Enterprise in the background, through Firebase App Check. It checks that requests come from a person in a real browser. You never solve a puzzle.

For now it only counts: nothing is blocked while we check that every real visitor passes. The privacy policy lists Google reCAPTCHA Enterprise as a provider.

A Booking block for your pages

Landing pages and your link in bio page have a new block, Booking: a button that opens your booking page, as a card with a heading and a few lines or as the button alone. Paste any https booking link. Postfjord knows Calendly, Cal.com, Acuity, Mindbody, Square and Google Calendar by name, writes Opens Calendly under the button, and tells you in the editor how bookings from that system are counted.

Taps on the button show under Numbers. With Calendly connected, every booking made from the button counts for the page.

A link to a booking system Postfjord knows, like Calendly or Acuity, now keeps its tags in every page block, also when Link tags is off, as the help page already said. That is how a booking finds the page that sent it. A page that is already live gets this when you publish it again.

The Coach or consultant template ends with a Booking block.

Blog drafts for up to 12 channels

New blog post to drafts now writes for up to 12 channels instead of 5, so every account you post to can get its own draft from a new blog post. See One idea to every format.

Fixes to analytics and email reports

The monthly PDF report now follows your plan everywhere, also when you ask Bo for a month in numbers: on Free this month and the 3 before it, on Solo the 12 before it. See Analytics.

The report of an email you sent keeps its numbers. About a month after an email finished sending, Postfjord counts them one last time, and they stay the same after the details behind them are deleted 13 months later. Sales and bookings from its links keep counting. See Email campaigns.

While a workspace is suspended, Analytics fetches no new numbers from Instagram, Facebook or the other platforms, neither at night nor when you press Refresh. See Suspended workspaces.

For reach on single Facebook posts, Postfjord now asks Meta for the number Meta has reported since November 2025, and for the older one when a Page does not have it yet. Before, reach on Facebook posts could stay empty.

A starting point for social media agencies

When you create a workspace, you can now pick Social media agency as your kind of business. It is for agencies and freelancers who run social media for their clients.

You get a brand voice for your agency's own posts, five saved replies for the questions prospects ask (prices, what is included, how you start with a new client, booking a call, examples of your work) and a first automation that sends your packages to anyone who comments PRICES. The [brackets] are yours to fill in. See Getting started.

Tick a box to accept the terms

To create an account, you now tick I accept the Terms and the Privacy Policy on the sign-up page. Create account and Continue with Google stay grey until the box is ticked.

Already have an account? Postfjord asks you once, the next time you open it. Read the Terms and the Privacy Policy, tick the box and press Continue, and the app opens where you were.

Postfjord saves which version you accepted and when. When we change the Terms or the Privacy Policy, it asks again.

Bluesky and Mastodon icons, and a green check on Mastodon

Social icons on your pages now have Bluesky and Mastodon. Each icon links to your own profile in a way Mastodon can read, so a page you add to your Mastodon profile shows with a green check. Reddit and Snapchat are there too. See Landing pages.

A share picture for pages without one

A page with no Photo when shared used its first photo or your logo when someone shared the link. A square photo, like a profile photo, then showed as a thin strip on LinkedIn. Now Postfjord makes a share picture when you publish: your photo or logo, the page title and your address, in your page's colours, at the size LinkedIn, Facebook and X show. A wide first photo and your own Photo when shared are used as before. See Landing pages.

Post to Mastodon

You can connect a Mastodon account under Channels and schedule posts to it with your other channels. Your account can be on any Mastodon server.

Type your Mastodon address, sign in on your server and allow Postfjord. You never give Postfjord your password. A post holds up to 500 characters, or what your server allows, and up to four images or one video. Analytics shows your followers, favourites and replies.

The help page has the steps.

Post to Bluesky

You can connect a Bluesky account under Channels and schedule posts to it with your other channels.

Type your handle, sign in on Bluesky and allow Postfjord. You never give Postfjord your password. A post holds up to 300 characters and up to four images or one video, and a link gets a card with the page's picture. Analytics shows your followers, likes and replies.

The help page has the steps.

A Get yours button on link in bio pages, and phone fixes

Your link in bio page now ends with a button, Get yours for free at postfjord.com, in the language of the page. It takes the place of the small Made with Postfjord link. Landing pages keep the small link. On a phone, the bottom menu now stays on top of the Dashboard cards when you scroll, and three screens that slid sideways now fit: long account names in the composer are cut short, the Contacts list shows the name and email status (tap a person for the rest), and a long link in an error message wraps.

Signup forms ask where people first heard about you

Signup forms can ask one optional question: Where did you first hear about us?

  • New forms ask it from the start. Older forms get it under Edit the form, and you can write the question in your own words.
  • The answer is kept on the contact as the person wrote it, and Postfjord sorts it into a group: search engine, AI assistant, a friend, Instagram, TikTok, LinkedIn, Facebook, YouTube, X, podcast, community, newsletter, event or other.
  • Each form shows how many answers fell in each group and the newest answers.
  • The signup form on a landing page and the code for your website carry the question too.
  • The API and the MCP server show the counts in the email overview.

See Signup forms.

See what your posts did each week, even without clicks

Analytics now opens on Week by week. For the last 12 weeks you see your posts next to what happened around them: likes, saves and shares, profile visits, new followers, DMs people started, new email subscribers, where they said they found you and visits to your landing pages. Link clicks are one row among many.

At the top, last week is one sentence, like "Last week: 4 posts, 6 new DM conversations and 3 new subscribers." Each chart has a 4-week average line, and after 8 weeks Postfjord says in words whether the weeks you posted more were the weeks more people signed up. There is no made-up ROI figure.

Owners and editors can add a short note to a week, like a launch or a holiday. The monthly PDF report has the same weeks.

See Analytics.

Add pictures and videos through the API and MCP

ChatGPT, Claude, Gemini and your own scripts can now add pictures and videos to the media library and use them in a draft.

  • Give the file's address and Postfjord downloads it: JPEG, PNG, WebP and GIF up to 50 MB, MP4 and MOV up to 500 MB. A script can also send the file itself, up to 30 MB.
  • The file counts against your plan's storage, exactly as an upload in the app does. Apps can add up to 500 files a day to a workspace.
  • The media list now shows every file with its state (processing, ready or failed) and its size. Ask for status=ready to see only the files a post can use now, as the list did before.
  • A post can be scheduled once its files are ready. A draft can use a new file straight away.
  • Videos now get their length and their width and height when they arrive. Videos already in your library get them the next time you open Media in the app. A draft then warns when a video is too long or too short for a channel.
  • MCP apps have two new tools: postfjord_upload_media and postfjord_get_media.

See MCP server.

Two ready routines for Bo, a weekly content loop and a monthly review

Under Manager, Routines, a workspace with no routine now gets two ready ones to start from.

  • Weekly content loop, Mondays at 8:00 on your workspace clock. Bo picks a question a customer asked in the inbox, writes a post that gives the whole answer in the feed and saves it as a draft for your channels. It says how the answer could become a blog post or an email, saves an email draft when email is on, and lists the customers' own words worth using again.
  • Monthly review, on the first of the month. Posts per channel, saves, profile visits, new DM conversations and new email signups for last month, and what to keep and what to drop. What Postfjord does not measure yet, Bo names instead of guessing.
  • Tap one and the form fills in. Change any word or the time, then press Save. Nothing runs before that.
  • Both write drafts only. Nothing is scheduled, published or sent.
  • The empty Manager and the dashboard show a card for them until the workspace has a routine.
  • Bo has a new reading tool for one month in numbers, which the monthly review uses and you can ask for in the chat.

See Manager.

Turn one idea into a post for every channel and an email

Write one tip, or paste the address of your own blog post, and Claude writes a post for each channel you have connected, an email draft and a section for your website. Each one gives the whole point in its own words, so people get the value without clicking a link.

Every format comes back as a card you can change or untick. Press Create drafts and the ticked posts become drafts, one per channel, with the email as a draft in Campaigns. Nothing is scheduled or sent.

Start from Start from an idea in the composer, Every format in the Creative Dock, or Bo's suggestion on the dashboard. AI apps can do the same through the MCP tool postfjord_repurpose_idea.

See One idea, every format.

Build DM automations from ChatGPT, Claude and other AI apps

The MCP server and the API can now build a new DM automation for Instagram or Facebook.

  • Ask for it in a chat: "When someone comments GUIDE, send them the guide in a DM and ask for their email." The app writes the messages and adds the link, a follow gate, an email question, a follow-up, a wait, a question or a hand-over to Postfjord's AI.
  • Every kind of start works: a keyword in a DM or a comment, a story reply or mention, a ref link, an away message, and Ask for a review after a booking or sale.
  • A new automation is always paused. It answers nobody until you switch it on, in the app or from the chat with a Schedule and publish key.
  • Tags, contact fields and conditions are still added in the app, and so is editing.

See MCP server.

PDF carousels on LinkedIn

A PDF can now go to LinkedIn as a document post, the carousel people swipe through page by page.

  • Upload a PDF to the media library, up to 100 MB and 300 pages. It shows as a page icon with its file name.
  • On LinkedIn one PDF makes the post a Document. The file name becomes the document title, and you can change it.
  • Every account's tab has Use different media for this channel, so the PDF can go to LinkedIn while Instagram gets the same slides as images.
  • Other platforms say no to a PDF before anything is scheduled.
  • The API and the MCP server take the PDF through targets.<channelId>.mediaIds with the format document.

See PDF carousels on LinkedIn.

Several images on LinkedIn, and a post's pictures always show in the editor

  • A LinkedIn post can now hold 2 to 20 images as a carousel. Before, the check refused both the post and the carousel format when a LinkedIn post had more than one image.
  • The post editor shows a post's own pictures even when the media library holds many newer files. Before, a post whose pictures were older than the newest 200 files looked empty in the editor, and Threads and Instagram said the carousel had no media.

Landing pages for every workspace

Landing pages and the link in bio page are now open in every workspace. You find them in the menu under Landing pages, also while email is still in testing for your workspace.

  • Pick your address on postfjord.page, then build a page from a template or ask an AI app to write one.
  • Your plan sets how many landing pages you can have. If you move to a plan with room for fewer, your oldest pages stay online and the rest go offline until you make room. Nothing is deleted, and the link in bio page always stays.
  • Postfjord can now take down the web version of an email that breaks the rules, the same way as a page.

See Landing pages and link in bio.

Check if a post works without a click, and mark it as give or ask

Most people never click the link in a post. In the composer, press Check in-feed under the text to see if the point is in the post or behind the link, and if the post gives something or asks for something.

When it helps, the check offers three things: write the point into the post, move the link to the first comment on Instagram, or set up a DM keyword that sends the link in a DM.

Every post can now be marked Gives or Asks under the text. A post you schedule without a mark gets one from Postfjord, and a mark you set is never changed. The week view in the calendar shows the split, for example "4 give, 1 ask", with a short note when the week leans on asking.

See In-feed check and give or ask.

The Text counter only counts accounts that use it

Two fixes in the composer:

  • The counter under Text on the Base text tab now only uses the limits of accounts that post that text. An account with its own text in its tab no longer turns the counter red. When every account has its own text, the counter shows no limit and a short line says Text is only a fallback.
  • A file you delete in another tab now disappears from an open draft right away: the thumbnail, the previews and the checks all see it is gone, with no need to reload.

See Composer.

A calmer Dock, an Ideas page and music from YouTube

The Creative Dock is quieter. The channel chips above the page and the counter for each channel under it are gone. One line under the page now says whether the text fits, like Fits all 4 channels · 139 left on X, or Too long for X. Press it to see each channel and tick the ones you write for.

On a phone the Dock opens as a document: back, undo, redo and ... on top, and the microphone, the channel line and Make a post at the bottom, above the keyboard.

Ideas have their own page again, Ideas in the menu, with a big box to write in, search, Open, Used and All, Only mine, and a way to change the words. Each idea goes to the Dock, the composer or Every format. The Dock shows the three newest next to your drafts.

The Sound card plays YouTube now: six stations and any playlist or video you paste. Nothing loads from YouTube until you press play. The sounds made in the browser are gone.

See The Creative Dock.

Bo learns from your edits and works on his own

Bo now learns from the changes you make to his drafts. When the same change shows in at least three posts, like removing the emojis on LinkedIn, he keeps it under What Bo remembers, marked with the channel and how many edits it came from, and tells you in a short chat. Delete the line and he stops.

Routines can also wait for something: next week looking quiet, a post doing better than the rest, or several people asking the same thing. The routine checks without using AI and wakes Bo only when there is something to do, once for each time it happens. Three new ready routines work this way: Fill a quiet week, Best post to email and Answer a question in a post. Like every routine, they write drafts and send nothing.

See Manager.

New blog post to drafts

Postfjord can now read your blog and turn each new blog post into drafts for your channels. Add the feed under Settings, Apps, New blog post to drafts, tick up to 5 channels and pick a time of day.

Once a day it reads the feed and writes at most 2 new blog posts, one draft per channel, in your brand voice. Posts that were on the blog before you turned it on are skipped. Bo leaves a short note when drafts are ready. Nothing is scheduled or posted by itself. Check now reads the feed right away.

See One idea, every format.

Yes and no emails in an automation

An email in an automation can now go only to some people. Under Who gets it, pick people who clicked a link in an earlier email, people who did not, or people with or without a tag. Add a no branch makes the other half right after, with the same wait.

Postfjord checks who gets the email when it is due. Someone it does not fit skips it and goes on to the next email, and the next wait counts from the last email they got. Each email shows how many people skipped it.

A click counts if it comes at least a minute after the email went out, and only in emails sent after you saved the condition. Nobody sees a list of who clicked.

This week's posts as an email

Your posts can now become a newsletter by themselves. Under Email settings, Emails from your content, pick a day and a time, and Postfjord makes an email from the posts you published in the last 7 days.

Claude writes a few lines about each post in your brand voice, and each post gets its picture and a link to it. Keep it as a draft to read first, or let it send to everyone who said yes, or to one saved group.

An email that is set to send gets the same checks as any email. If one says no, it stays a draft, and Campaigns says why. A week with no posts makes no email.

A status page at postfjord.com/status

Postfjord now has a public status page: postfjord.com/status.

  • It checks the app, publishing, DMs and automations, email and the API once a minute, and publishing on each platform every five minutes.
  • Each part shows the last 90 days and its uptime.
  • When something is wrong, we post what we know and follow it until it is fixed.
  • Report an issue at the bottom sends your report straight to a person at Postfjord, and you get an email that says we got it.

You find the page under Status in the footer of every page on postfjord.com.

A click on a link can start an email automation

An email automation can now start when someone clicks a link. Pick Someone clicks a link in an email under What starts it, then the campaign or automation email and the link in it. Everyone who clicks that link gets the automation. Nobody else does.

Only clicks in emails sent after you press Start count, and each person joins once. A click in the first minute after an email went out starts nothing, since some mail filters open every link when an email arrives.

The link you pick knows who clicked it, and Postfjord uses that only to start the automation. Every other link still counts clicks, not people.

Share with a friend

Every subscriber can now get their own link to share with friends. Switch on Share with a friend under Settings, Email, and pick the signup form the link opens. Put the new Share with a friend block in an email, or the tag {{referral_link}}, and each person gets their own link and count.

A friend counts when they sign up through the link, confirm their email, and then click a link in one of your emails within 60 days. Opening an email is not enough. Until that click they show as waiting, on your numbers and on the sharing page. Only people new to your list count, each once, and never the person who shared the link. One link counts at most 20 friends a day.

Add up to three rewards, for example at 1, 3 and 10 friends. Each gives a tag and can send an email you write, like a promo code or a free guide. Under the settings you see friends per week and the people who brought in the most.

Send an email again to people who did not click

The report of a sent email has a new button: Send again to people who did not click. Write a new subject, or let Claude suggest one, and pick a time. We suggest three days later at the same time of day. The same email goes to the people it reached who did not click a link in it.

Postfjord looks at clicks and leaves opens out, because Apple Mail opens every email by itself. People who unsubscribed, bounced or marked an email as spam since then are left out too. Each email can be sent again once, and the two reports link to each other.

It is in early access: it works on emails sent after Postfjord switches it on for your workspace.

Ready-made email automations

New automation now offers five automations with their emails already written: a welcome series, a do you want to stay email for quiet people, a birthday email, emails before an event and a follow up after the first visit. You can still start from scratch.

Pick one and it opens as a draft, in your brand colours and in your brand's language when that is English or Swedish. Change the words and fill in the parts in [brackets], like a date or a gift. Postfjord will not start it while [brackets] are left. Nothing goes out until you press Start.

Before an event needs a contact field of the type Date, like the day a course starts. After the first visit starts on a tag you pick.

Signup forms and email stats count each reader on their own

Postfjord now sees each reader's own address when a signup form is sent or an email is opened or clicked.

  • Before this, many readers could count as one. A busy signup form could then say no after about 20 signups in an hour, and all forms together after 100 a day. Opens and clicks could also be counted too low when many people read at once.
  • Nothing changes in how you use forms or emails.

Play videos in the media library

Click a video in Media and it plays in the details panel, with sound and the usual controls. Before, the panel showed only the first frame. On a phone the details panel now sits above the library, so the player and the name field fit the screen.

Signing in on a phone stays put

Tapping the email or password field on an iPhone no longer zooms in and slides the page sideways. Every field in the app now uses text large enough that phones leave the page as it is. The passkey button on the sign-in page also says what to do when your phone has no passkey yet: sign in with your password and add one under Account.

The sign-in page now takes a new version of Postfjord as soon as it arrives, so you always sign in with the newest one. The email you typed stays in the field.

On an iPhone, the help button sits above the menu at the bottom instead of on top of it.

Fair limits on the report and signup forms of your pages

The report form and signup forms on your pages count each visitor on their own, also at the new address.

  • Each visitor has their own daily limit on reports again, instead of sharing one with everyone else.
  • Nothing changes for you or your visitors.

The app in the Fjord design

Every main screen now uses the Fjord design from postfjord.com: paper cards, the night fjord header on the dashboard, status chips under each title and one yellow button for the main action.

  • Dashboard: the week's posts in the header, Bo following the week, cards with an action on each row that needs you.
  • Calendar: a line of days on phones and tablets, seven columns from 1024 px. Posts show their first picture. Drag and drop works at every width. Past days no longer offer a new post, since a post cannot be scheduled in the past.
  • Email automations: a top to bottom flow with the start, each email and the waits and conditions between them. Tap a part to edit it; the save bar shows only when something changed, with Undo.
  • Campaigns, reports, DM automations, contacts, Inbox, posts, composer, media, channels, landing pages, analytics, settings and account: the same look, every feature kept.
  • Inbox on a phone: opening a conversation shows the newest message and the reply box above the menu, and new messages no longer pull the page or the thread away from what you are reading.

More emails on every paid plan

Every paid plan now includes more emails each month: Solo goes from 5,000 to 10,000, Studio from 20,000 to 30,000 and Agency from 50,000 to 100,000. Free stays at 500.

The size of your email list was never limited, and the pricing page now says so: you pay for the emails you send, not the size of your list. The contact number on each plan is now labelled as DM contacts, since it counts the people a DM automation answers each month.

AI apps can make and publish landing pages

ChatGPT, Claude and other AI apps connected to Postfjord can now work on your link in bio page and landing pages. They list your pages with views and taps, write a new page as a draft from your photos and links in your brand colours, change a draft, and publish a page or take it offline.

A new page counts toward your plan's pages, as in the app. Publishing runs the same checks as the Publish button: words in [brackets], text that asks for passwords, and every link checked with Google. It needs a key that may Schedule and publish. Read more in MCP server and Landing pages and link in bio.

Work with your emails from ChatGPT, Claude and other AI apps

The MCP server and the API now reach your emails.

  • Ask the app how your list is doing: how many people said yes, how many emails are left this month, and how big each saved segment is.
  • List the contacts who confirmed, with name, email, tags and the date they were added. People who unsubscribed are never listed.
  • Read your campaigns and automation emails with their numbers, and one email's report with the clicks per link.
  • Have the app write an email draft in your brand colors with your logo on top, or ask Postfjord's AI to draft one from a brief, up to 10 a minute per key. Change a draft's subject, preheader or blocks. The draft opens in the editor like any other.
  • With a key at the Schedule and publish level, schedule a draft to everyone who said yes or to one segment, and unschedule or cancel it. It runs the same checks as the Send button.

The app never sends an email by itself, never changes who said yes, and never deletes a contact. See MCP server and Email campaigns.

Your AI app can work in the Inbox and with your automations

ChatGPT, Claude and other apps you connect over MCP or the API can now help with your messages.

  • They can list your Inbox conversations and read one, with the name, the last messages and the tags. They never get an email address. On WhatsApp the phone number is part of the conversation id, as in the Inbox.
  • They can ask Postfjord's AI to draft a reply in your voice. That only gives text back, and it uses your AI budget.
  • With the Schedule and publish level they can send a reply. It goes out the same way as when you press Send: only within 24 hours of the person's last message, never to someone who asked you to stop, never from a suspended workspace, and at most 10 a minute per key. The conversation stays unread, so your team still sees it.
  • They can list your DM automations with how many people each one reached, and switch one on or pause it with the Schedule and publish level.

The email editor shows your logo and buttons at their real size

Three fixes in the email editor. The emails you send looked right all along.

  • Your logo shows at the width you set. Before, it filled the whole top of the email in the editor, which looked like an empty box when the logo is dark.
  • Buttons on the left show in full. Before, the block under them covered most of the button.
  • Preview shows the email as soon as it opens. Before, it could stay white until you pressed Phone and then Desktop.

Postfjord and Kit side by side

postfjord.com/kit-alternative compares Postfjord with Kit, the email tool for creators: what each plan costs, what it includes and who each one suits. The Kit facts come from Kit's own pricing and features pages, checked today, with links so you can check them too. You find it in the footer under Compare, next to Linktree, Later, Buffer and ManyChat.

Gemini connects to Postfjord

Gemini CLI now connects to Postfjord with your Postfjord login, like ChatGPT and Claude. The help page shows the three steps. In Gemini Enterprise, an admin can add Postfjord as a custom MCP server. Every answer Postfjord gives an AI app is now a JSON object, which Gemini needs; ChatGPT and Claude read it as before.

Your emails on the web, and a newsletter archive

Every campaign you send now also gets a page of its own, like sunrise-yoga.postfjord.page/newsletter/spring-classes. Share it in a post or your bio. The email gets a View in browser link at the bottom.

The page shows the email for no one in particular: fallback text instead of names, no blocks meant for some people only, no survey, no unsubscribe link and nothing tracked. Turn it off under Web version in the send window or on the report.

All your web versions are listed at /newsletter on your address, the newest first. Add the new Newsletter archive block to your link in bio page or a landing page to show your latest emails there.

Automation emails can have a web version too. It is off until you turn it on.

A one-tap survey in your email

The new Survey block asks one question with a row of numbers: 1 to 5, or 0 to 10. A tap opens a small thank-you page that saves the answer. The person gets a tag like survey-class-feedback-5, and a field on their contact holds the number, so an automation or a segment can use it. A new answer replaces the old one.

Mail services that open every link to check it save nothing, because only the thank-you page sends the answer. Nothing is saved for someone who unsubscribed, bounced, marked an email as spam, asked your chat automation to stop, or was deleted. The report of the email shows how many people picked each number.

Pick the typeface, heading weight and text size for a whole email

Click next to the email in the editor, so no block is selected, and the inspector shows Email style:

  • Typeface: sans serif or serif for the whole email.
  • Headings: bold or regular.
  • Text size: small, normal or large for body and intro text.

Text in every email is also drawn a little finer on iPhone, iPad and Mac, so light text on a dark background no longer looks heavy. Read more in Email campaigns.

Blocks only some people see

Any block in an email can now go to some people only: people with a tag, people without a tag, or people in a saved segment. Pick it under Show to in the inspector. Everyone else gets the email without that block, so one email can greet members one way and new people another.

Postfjord looks at each person's tags and segments when their email goes out, in campaigns and in automations. Preview has a new list, Show the email as, to see the email the way one group gets it. The checks warn when a block points to a tag or segment that was deleted, and when some people would see no block at all. Those people are skipped, never sent an empty email.

Emails without the setting look exactly as before.

The Creative Dock, a page for writing your own posts

Dock is new in the menu. It is a quiet page for writing a post yourself, with your ideas beside it. Your drafts save as you type, and only you can see them.

Pick the channels you write for and the Dock shows the characters and hashtags left on each, counted the way each channel counts. A thin line in the page marks where Instagram cuts the caption to "... more". Copy puts the text on your clipboard, Dictate puts your spoken words in the page exactly as you said them, and Make a post opens the composer with your text and channels.

Check grammar only fixes spelling, grammar and punctuation, one fix at a time for you to accept or reject. A fix that would change a number, a time, a price, a day, a "not", a link, an @name or a #tag, or turn a common word into another, is left out. Fixes you accepted stay when you make a post, copy or leave the page before pressing Back to writing. Check grammar only and Dictate are for editors and owners, like every AI button.

Turn on Write it myself and the AI buttons disappear from the Dock and the composer, and Plan next week and Bo stop reading your ideas. An idea you jot while it is on is marked and stays away from Claude for good: Plan next week and Bo skip it, a page opened from it has no Make a post with Claude, and the composer shows no AI buttons when a post is made from it. There is also a daily prompt you can hide, a weekly count of the posts you wrote, Focus on a computer and four sounds to write to.

The idea notepad moved here from the Manager. Your ideas came with it. Enter saves an idea and Shift+Enter starts a new line, the pen next to an idea opens the composer straight away as before, and the date and time show when you point at an idea. A page holds 20,000 characters and says so when you get close.

Blog topics and a new look for the covers

The blog now sorts posts by topic. Pick Instagram and reach, DMs, replies and reviews, Email and your list, Planning, AI and dictation, Playbooks by business or Inside Postfjord at the top of the blog to see only those posts.

Each topic has its own time of day on the fjord. Instagram posts are drawn in the morning, DMs at sunset, email at dawn, planning in fog, playbooks on a summer day and news about Postfjord at night. The covers are painted landscapes now, with layered mountains, mist and the light of Bo on the water.

The Academy follows the same day: the first course starts at dawn and the last one ends at night.

The help center, the feature tiles on the home page, the guides and the pricing cards got the same painted look. postsocial is drawn in the morning, postchat at sunset and postmail at dawn, and each feature takes the time of day of its part.

Your blog as an email

New posts on your blog can now become email. Under Email settings, Emails from your content, paste your blog's RSS or Atom feed, often your site's address with /feed at the end.

Pick one email per blog post, or one email a week with the week's new posts. Claude writes a few lines about each one, with its title and a link to read it on your site.

Posts already on your blog when you save never go out. Like the weekly posts email, it can wait as a draft or send after the usual checks.

New covers for the blog and the Academy

Every blog post and every Academy course has a new cover. Each one shows a thing you would find by the fjord: a harbour clock for the best time to post, a signpost for your link in bio, a mailbox for your email list, a guest book for reviews. The one part the post is about is lit in the sun's colour.

The landscape behind each cover and its time of day stay the same.

Email automations that start on a date

An email automation can now start on a date saved on the contact. Send a birthday email every year, a reminder three days before a class pass runs out, or a thank you on the day someone joined a year ago.

Pick A date on the contact, like a birthday under What starts it. Then pick the date field, how many days before or after (or on the day), the time of day in your workspace time zone, and whether it comes back every year or happens once. Postfjord looks at the dates once a day, and each person gets it once for each date.

Birthdays can be written in many ways, like 14 March or 1990-03-14, and the year is not needed.

Ask quiet people if they want to stay on your list

A new email automation cleans your list in a kind way. Pick A contact has been quiet for a long time under What starts it, and choose how many days without a sign of life, 180 to start with. Once a day Postfjord finds people who have not written you a DM, bought, booked or signed up in that time, and asks each of them once if they still want your emails.

The first email gets a Keep me on the list button. Pressing it opens a page with one more button, so a mail filter that opens every link cannot answer for someone. The first people asked are a small test group, and the rest follow when their emails have gone well.

People who have not said yes 30 days after the first email are paused. They stay on your list, but no campaign or automation reaches them, and Contacts shows them as Paused, did not answer. The pause ends when they press the button after all, confirm again or sign up again.

Clearer messages when a two-step code is refused

When the code from your authenticator app is refused, the message now says why: the code was wrong or just used, there were too many tries, or the window waited too long. Anything else shows a short error code you can send us.

See where you're signed in

Account now shows every browser and app your account has used.

  • Sign out one device, or Sign out everywhere at once.
  • Signing in on a new browser or app gets you an email, with This was not me to sign out every device.
  • The sign-in page says how we protect your data.

Read more in Account.

Free months from referrals arrive by themselves

Free months from Give a month, get a month now arrive without anyone doing anything.

  • About two weeks after your friend's first payment, when their right to withdraw has passed, Postfjord adds credit worth one month of the plan for each of you.
  • Stripe takes the credit off your next invoices until it is used up.
  • On the free plan, your month waits and arrives about two weeks after you pick a paid plan.

Read more in Give a month, get a month.

Published posts, newest first

Under Posts, the tabs Published and Failed now show the newest post at the top, with the time it went out. Posts sent with Publish now used to end up at the bottom of the list.

Each workspace's pages get their own address

Landing pages and link in bio pages now live at an address of their own: sunrise-yoga.postfjord.page, and sunrise-yoga.postfjord.page/class for a landing page.

  • A problem with someone else's page on postfjord.page no longer reaches yours.
  • Addresses in the old shape, like postfjord.page/sunrise-yoga, send visitors on to the new one for good, so QR codes you already printed keep working.
  • Copy link, the QR code and the address in the app use the new shape.

Read more in Landing pages and link in bio.

Your own sending domain is easier to set up

Setting up your own domain for email now needs fewer tries.

  • If the DNS records are still missing a day after you add the domain, the owner gets an email that says what we see. A second one comes after two days.
  • If Amazon stops looking after three days, you keep the same records. Postfjord asks Amazon to look again once it finds all three, and Check asks at once. You no longer remove the domain and add it again.

Read more in Send from your own domain.

Postfjord adds your domain's records at Cloudflare

If your domain's DNS is at Cloudflare, Postfjord can now add the records for your own sending domain.

  • Make a token in Cloudflare with the template Edit zone DNS, for the one domain, and paste it under Let Postfjord add the records.
  • Postfjord uses the token once and does not keep it.
  • It only adds records, and never changes one that is already there.

Read more in Send from your own domain.

Help for posting and automations covers every setting

The help pages for writing a post, the calendar, the queue, media, automations and the inbox now walk through every setting you see on screen, in numbered steps and with the same names as the buttons. Diagrams show what happens after you press Schedule and how a comment turns into a DM and a contact. Bo, the assistant in the app, reads the same pages.

The composer shows what each channel tab holds

Under the tabs in the composer, a short line now says what each channel lets you choose in its own tab, for example format and first comment for Instagram, or title and who can see it for YouTube. Press it to open that tab.

The app only runs code from places it trusts

The app now tells your browser exactly where it may load code from: Postfjord, Google for sign-in and Facebook for connecting your pages. Code from anywhere else is refused.

  • Nothing changes in how you use the app.
  • Signup forms, emails you open in the browser and review pages keep their own, stricter rules.

Read more in Security.

Two-step verification with an authenticator app

Turn on two-step verification under Account: signing in then also asks for a 6-digit code from an authenticator app on your phone, like Google Authenticator, Microsoft Authenticator or 1Password. You get ten recovery codes for a lost phone, and we email you when it is turned on or off. A passkey counts as both steps, so Face ID and Touch ID keep signing you in with one touch.

Did someone else turn it on with your password? The email about it has a This was not me link, and the sign-in page has I did not turn this on, which sends the link again. It turns two-step verification off and sends you a link to choose a new password.

With two-step verification on, adding a new passkey needs a sign-in that passed the second step, and the Academy's email code cannot sign the account in. See Your account.

How we keep your account safe

postfjord.com/security explains where your data is stored, how it is encrypted, how we handle the keys you give us, and how to report a problem. Researchers find our contact in security.txt.

Behind the scenes the app got stricter browser protection today: it cannot be shown inside another site, every connection stays encrypted for two years at a time, and a content security policy now reports anything the app would not expect to load.

Stronger passwords and a check before sensitive changes

New passwords need at least 10 characters. Postfjord refuses the passwords attackers try first, your email name, the word Postfjord, and any password found in a known data leak. The leak check sends only the first 5 characters of a scrambled copy of the password, so it never sees the password itself. Passwords you already have keep working.

A few sensitive changes now ask you to confirm it is you when you signed in more than 10 minutes ago: making an API key, approving a Claude connection, connecting Stripe for sales tracking, inviting or changing someone's role, and deleting a workspace or your account. Platform admins confirm the same way before admin changes that give access or delete. Enter your password or continue with Google, and the change goes through right where you were. See Your account.

The brands' own logos for LinkedIn, ChatGPT, Klaviyo and more

LinkedIn, ChatGPT and Klaviyo showed letters where their logo belonged. They now have their real logos, taken from each company's own brand files. WhatsApp, Claude, Gemini, DeepSeek, Mistral and Calendly use their current official logos too.

A landing page's LinkedIn link shows the LinkedIn logo instead of the letters "in".

A press page with our brand kit

postfjord.com/press has the facts about Postfjord, a short text to copy, and the Postfjord logo in every version: with the name, stacked, the mark alone and in one colour, as SVG and PNG. It also shows our colours and typefaces and how to use the logo, with do's and don'ts. The whole kit downloads as one file.

Sign in with Face ID, Touch ID or Windows Hello

You can now sign in to Postfjord with a passkey: your face, your fingerprint, your phone or your computer's PIN, instead of typing a password.

  1. Open Account and find Passkeys.
  2. Press Add a passkey and confirm with your face, fingerprint or PIN.
  3. Next time, press Sign in with a passkey on the sign-in page.

A passkey only works on app.postfjord.com, so a fake sign-in page cannot use it. Your password and Google sign-in keep working as before.

When Postfjord asks you to confirm it is you before a sensitive change, a passkey works there too. Removing a passkey that was used to sign in also signs out your devices, at the latest within the hour, so a lost phone loses its access; you sign in again where you removed it.

Passkeys work in the browser. The Postfjord app for iPhone and Android gets them later.

The iPhone and Android app update themselves

The Postfjord app for iPhone and Android now gets new versions of Postfjord by itself, the same day they reach app.postfjord.com, without a new version from the App Store or Google Play.

  • A new version downloads in the background when you open the app.
  • If you have not started anything yet, the app switches to it right away. Otherwise Update shows under the version number, and the app switches the next time you go to another screen, so nothing you are writing is lost.
  • If a new version fails to start, the app goes back to the one that worked.

This needs version 1.0 (2) of the app or later.

See what your automations sell

Connect Stripe under Settings → Apps → Bookings and sales, and Postfjord counts what your Stripe payment links sell.

  • Per automation, email and page. A payment link Postfjord sends on gets a code that Stripe hands back with the purchase, so the sale counts for exactly the automation, email or landing page that sent the buyer. Automations and email reports show Sales with the amount.
  • A safe key. You paste a restricted key that can only add Postfjord's webhook. It cannot move money or see your customers.
  • Refunds come off. A refund takes its amount back, a full refund the sale.
  • Tagged Customer. A buyer who is a contact gets the tag Customer, which can start an email automation.

Postfjord keeps the amount and what sent the buyer, never their name or email. More in Link tags, sales and results.

The monthly report by email

An owner can now press Email me each month next to PDF report in Analytics. Early each month Postfjord makes last month's report and emails you the link, ready to forward to a client. Stop the monthly email turns it off. More in Analytics.

Give a month, get a month

Account has a new card, Give a month, get a month, with your own referral link.

  • Copy or share the link. Someone who signs up with it sees that a friend sent them.
  • When they start a paid plan, you both get a month free, added as credit to the next invoice after their first payment. On the free plan, your month waits until you pick a paid plan.
  • The card counts who signed up and who started a paid plan.

Read more in Give a month, get a month.

Sales on a landing page's numbers

A landing page's Numbers tab now shows the sales its Stripe payment links brought in, with the amount and the number of purchases, next to views and taps. More in Link tags, sales and results.

A monthly report as a PDF

Analytics has a PDF report button. Pick a month and Postfjord makes a one-page report with your logo from the brand kit, to send to a client or your team:

  • Posts published in the month, per channel.
  • For the month in progress, the last 30 days: followers, new followers, likes and comments and the best posts.
  • For a finished month: followers at its end, new followers during it and reach, per account.
  • Bookings and sales in the month, and the automations that brought the most, over all time.

A workspace can make 20 reports a day. More in Analytics.

Connect Claude.ai and ChatGPT with a sign-in

Claude.ai and ChatGPT now connect to Postfjord with your Postfjord login, so nobody pastes a key.

  • Add a connector. In Claude or ChatGPT, add https://app.postfjord.com/api/mcp as a connector, sign in, pick the workspace and what the app may do, and press Allow.
  • A key of its own. The app gets a key named after it, which shows under Settings → Apps → Your keys. Remove it there to disconnect.
  • The same rules. Read only, drafts only or schedule and publish, the plan's API access and a suspended workspace work as they do for keys.

How to connect each app is in MCP.

Evergreen posts

Posts has a new tab, Evergreen, for posts worth sharing again.

  • Press Evergreen on a post under Published to add it.
  • Pick the days, the time and how long a post rests before it comes back (14 to 90 days).
  • On each of those days, one post comes back as a new post with a fresh caption in your brand voice, so nothing repeats word for word.
  • By default it waits in Drafts for you to check. You can also let it post on its own.

Read more in Posts.

Count your bookings

Connect Calendly, Acuity or any other booking system under Settings → Apps → Count your bookings, and Postfjord counts the bookings your DMs bring in.

  • Per automation. A booking by someone who tapped a booking link in an automation shows as Bookings on that automation. A cancellation takes it off again.
  • Tagged Booked. Everyone who books and is a contact gets the tag Booked, which can start an email automation.
  • Any booking system. Calendly connects with a token and Acuity with its key. Mindbody, Momence, Glofox and others send bookings to your own address, straight or through Zapier or Make.
  • UTM tags on booking links. A short link to a booking page gets utm_source=postfjord, so your booking system's own reports show where people came from.

Postfjord keeps the class and time of each booking and never the person's email or name. More in Count your bookings.

Send posts to a client for review

Send for review in the Calendar makes a link your client opens without an account. They see each post as it will go out, with your logo, and press Approve or write what should change.

  • Up to 30 posts per link, drafts and scheduled posts, for 30 days.
  • Answers on the post. The calendar marks each post Review, OK or Changes, and the post shows the client's note. You get an email when the client answers.
  • Nothing changes by itself. An approved post goes out as planned. A draft with changes asked waits for you, and a scheduled one still goes out at its time unless you change it. A post changed after approval says so.

More in Send posts to a client for review.

Bookings from emails and landing pages

A booking link in an email or on a landing page now counts the bookings it brings in, not only a link in an automation.

  • Email reports show Bookings for that email, next to Sales.
  • Landing pages show bookings on the page's Numbers tab.
  • It works with Calendly, and with your own booking address when your system passes on the link's tags. A cancellation takes the booking off again.

More in Count your bookings.

Ask for a review after a booking or a purchase

Automation has a new template, Ask for a review.

  • It starts after a booking (Calendly, Acuity or your own booking system) or a purchase through a Stripe payment link.
  • It thanks the person in their DMs, with a button to your review page on Google, Yelp or Trustpilot.
  • It follows the 24 hour messaging window of Instagram and Messenger, and reaches each person once a month at most.

Read more in Automation.

The phone app follows your theme

Small fixes in the iPhone and Android app.

  • The status bar matches. In the dark theme the clock and battery turn white on a dark bar, and in the light theme they turn dark. It changes the moment your phone does.
  • Connecting a channel takes you back to the app. If a platform's sign-in page sat open too long, the answer used to open inside the browser sheet. Now it always comes back to the app, which asks you to start again.
  • No extra scrolling. The sign-in screen on an iPad and the Manager chat fit the screen below the status bar.

Post to X

You can post to X from Postfjord. It is an add-on for one workspace: $12 a month, with 40 posts to X a month, with or without links. Add it under Account, X add-on, on any plan except Free, then connect your X account under Channels.

A post to X can hold up to 4 images or one video. The counter in the X tab counts the way X does: a link is 23 characters and an emoji is 2. The same tab shows how many of the month's 40 posts are used and scheduled.

A post that fails does not use one of the 40, and you are never charged for more. The help page has the details.

A typed yes counts as a tap

Instagram on a computer does not show the buttons in a DM, so people there could not get your link. Now a message that says the same as a button, like "Send me the link", counts as a tap on it. When the step has only one button, a short yes counts too, like "yes", "ok", "ja", "oui", "sí" or 👍.

The same rules apply as for a tap: STOP still stops everything, and nothing is sent outside the 24 hour window. A link button on Instagram now also shows the link in the text, so people on a computer can click it.

A warning when the box for posting was not ticked

Instagram, Facebook and Threads let you untick the permission that lets Postfjord post. Before, the account connected anyway and the first post failed. Now the connect window tells you right away and asks you to press Connect again with every box ticked. If you close it, the account shows Postfjord cannot post here under its name until you reconnect.

Profile pictures of Instagram and Facebook accounts are also fetched again every night. Instagram's links stop working after a while, so pictures used to go blank. When a picture cannot load, the platform's logo shows in its place.

The help page has the details.

Page templates in your language

The ten templates for landing pages and link in bio now come in six languages: English, Swedish, German, French, Spanish and Portuguese. A new page is written in your brand's language from Settings, Brand voice, or in the language you use Postfjord in when none is set there.

Before, a Spanish page mixed English starter text with Spanish buttons and form words. Now the whole page starts in one language, the words in [brackets] included, and the list of templates shows each one in that language before you pick.

Pages you already made keep the text they have.

Exact colours and more colours on pages

Under Look, you can now type a colour code next to each colour, for example #1a7f5a, to match your brand exactly.

More colours gives three new colours: Boxes for the signup form, cards and links in every style, Button text, and Links for featured links and a link while the mouse is on it. Each one follows your other colours until you pick it, and Reset takes it back. The text in a box changes colour when it would be hard to read, and Postfjord tells you when button text is hard to read.

Use my brand colours now keeps the card colour from your website scan as the box colour.

Own email domain in three records

Send from your own domain needs three CNAME records now. The MX and TXT records for bounce.yourdomain are an optional extra: Postfjord sets them up once it finds them, and a domain sends with or without them.

Postfjord looks up where the domain's DNS is kept and shows that company's own steps for Cloudflare, GoDaddy, Namecheap, Squarespace, Wix, Amazon Route 53, Porkbun, IONOS, Hostinger, one.com, Loopia and Oderland.

Send the steps emails the records and a short guide to whoever looks after the domain, up to five times a day.

The help page has a short film of the three steps.

Your own email domain keeps its 30 days

A domain you add to send email from is removed by itself when it is not set up within 30 days. Removing it and adding it again no longer starts the 30 days over. After it is removed, the same workspace can add it again one week later. This gives the real owner of a domain time to add it.

A domain that was set up once is not affected.

Agents can read your analytics

Claude, Muse and any other agent connected with an API key can now read the same numbers as the Analytics screen: followers and their change, posts, likes and comments per channel, the top posts across your channels, and the best weekday and hour to post. Ask "Which posts did best last month?" and plan more like them in the same conversation.

It is the new MCP tool postfjord_get_analytics and the REST endpoint GET /v1/analytics (read scope), over 7, 30, 90 or 365 days, as far back as your plan keeps.

One confirmation email, not two

Someone who signs up with a Postfjord form, or gives their address in an automation that asks them to confirm, now reaches your Mailchimp audience only after they press the button in Postfjord's email, and then as subscribed. Before, the address could reach Mailchimp first, and Mailchimp sent its own confirmation email as well.

The confirmation email now shows your brand kit logo at the top, like your signup form, and the form and confirmation pages show the Postfjord mark at the foot.

Emails come from hello [at] postfjord.com

Emails from Postfjord now come from hello [at] postfjord.com, the same address your replies go to. Academy sign-in codes arrive from Postfjord Academy, so you can tell them apart in your inbox.

Import straight from Brevo and Klaviyo

You can now bring your list straight from Brevo or Klaviyo, without a file. Open Contacts, Import contacts, pick Brevo or Klaviyo, and paste a key. Postfjord shows your lists, and reads the one you pick.

Who unsubscribed, bounced or was blocklisted comes along as unsubscribed or blocked, and those columns are locked. In Klaviyo, someone who never subscribed comes in without email, and the date each person said yes becomes their sign-up date. Then you check the columns and say how the people signed up, the same as for a file, and Postfjord checks the import before your first email reaches them.

Postfjord only reads with the key and deletes it as soon as your contacts are in. For Klaviyo, make a read-only key. Brevo has no read-only keys, so let the key end after 7 days. The steps are in Import contacts. The Brevo and Klaviyo cards under Settings, Apps lead there too.

Import contacts from a file

You can now bring your email list from any tool that exports a CSV file. Press Import contacts at the top of Contacts and choose the file: an export from Brevo, Klaviyo, MailerLite, Kit, Substack, beehiiv, Squarespace, Shopify or Mailchimp, or a spreadsheet of your own.

Postfjord matches the columns for you and shows what it found before anything is saved. People who unsubscribed or bounced in your old tool come along as unsubscribed, so they never get an email from you. Rows without a sign-up date need a few examples of how those people signed up, or they come in as contacts only.

Nothing is sent when you import. Postfjord checks the import before your first email reaches these people, and afterwards you can download the rows that did not come in, with the reason next to each one. Email must be switched on for your workspace. The steps for each tool are in Import contacts from a file.

The Email icon finds your signup form

When you pick Email in a Social icons block, you no longer have to copy a link from Email settings. Choose where the icon goes: the signup form on this page, one of your signup forms on its own page, or your email address.

On a page with a Signup form block, the Email icon jumps to that form from the start. A link you typed yourself stays as it is, and the publish check now says what to pick when an Email icon has no link.

Only Postfjord confirms your address

An address now counts as confirmed only when Postfjord confirmed it: with our own confirmation email, our password reset, an Academy sign-in code, or a Google sign-in with that address. A confirmation made any other way is taken back within 15 minutes, and that account is signed out.

If someone registered your address and then got it confirmed another way, they get no Academy code, cannot accept invitations to your address and cannot claim diplomas with it. If you then sign in with Google, a password they added is removed and the account is yours.

Confirm your email while signed in

The link in the email that confirms your address now opens a page with a Confirm my email button. It works while you are signed in to that account, and nothing is confirmed until you press it. If you are not signed in, the page asks you to sign in first.

An invitation to a workspace now needs a confirmed address. Sign up, confirm your email, and the invitation takes you in.

Postfjord sends its own emails to confirm addresses and reset passwords. A link from any other email that claims to do that now opens a page that changes nothing.

Forgot password is also a little stricter for an account that was never confirmed. The reset confirms the address, and it removes any Google sign-in or phone number added before, so only your new password opens the account.

Comment replies are tried again

When Meta has a short problem and refuses the message to someone who commented, we now try again by ourselves: after 1 minute, 5 minutes and 30 minutes, then every 3 hours for up to 24 hours. The person still gets one message and one public reply, never two.

Click Failed or Retrying on a comment automation to see who did not get the message, what they wrote and why, in plain words. Send again tries once more for a comment that is less than 7 days old. The help page has the details.

Automations your plan does not run say so

An automation your plan does not run no longer says Active. The Automation list now marks it Not running on your plan, with a link to upgrade. On Free, only the oldest automation that is switched on runs.

When you save or switch on an automation that will not run, the list tells you right away. If switching one on pushes another one out, the list names the one that stopped.

When someone writes a keyword that belongs to an automation your plan does not run, the thread in the Inbox shows a short note with the automation's name, so you know why nothing was sent.

Settings now has an AI tab and an Apps tab

Settings → AI shows what you already have: Bo runs on Claude, it comes with your plan, and you see this month's AI usage. Your own AI key, if you want one, sits below it.

Settings → Apps has two groups. Bring your contacts in holds Mailchimp and a CSV file card that opens the new contact import. Work in Postfjord from another app has a card for Meta Muse, the Claude app, ChatGPT, Codex and Cursor. Press Set up and three numbered steps follow: choose what the app may do, copy your key, paste it in the app. The text to paste already holds your key.

Under the cards, Your keys lists every key with the day it was made and when it was last used. The old key form is still there, under Advanced: make a key by hand. Links to the old tabs lead to Apps.

Sign in to the Academy with a code

You now sign in to the Academy on postfjord.com with a code. Type your email and press Email me a code. We email you 6 digits. Type them on the same page and you are signed in. There is no link to open, so it works the same on your phone and your computer.

The code works for 10 minutes and only once. After 5 wrong tries it stops working, and Send a new code gets you a fresh one. Sign-in links from before no longer work. See Academy, diplomas and the certificate.

App accounts are deleted in the app

Delete my account in My Academy is now only there for accounts that use nothing but the Academy. If you also use the Postfjord app, My Academy sends you to Account in the app instead, where you see your workspaces and your plan before anything is deleted.

Post to TikTok

You can connect a TikTok account under Channels and schedule videos to it like any other post. The text becomes the caption, and hashtags work as they do on TikTok.

Each post has a TikTok tab. Choose Post it on TikTok and pick who can see the video, whether people may comment, Duet or Stitch, and whether the video promotes a brand. Or choose Send it to my TikTok inbox: the video waits for you in the TikTok app, where you add sound and post it yourself.

The help page has the steps and the limits.

All your channels on one page in Analytics

Analytics now opens with all your channels added up for the days you pick: followers and how many you won or lost, posts published, likes and comments, engagement rate and reach per day. Below are your five best posts across every channel, the best times to post and your channels side by side. On a phone the side by side table turns into one card per channel.

Each channel has its own tab under Each channel, with the charts you had before. The labels are bigger, and a follower line that barely moves now shows real numbers, like 5,797 and 5,798, instead of 5.8k on every line.

Channels that share no numbers with Postfjord show how many posts Postfjord published there, with a short note on why. Where reach is missing, the page says why. How Analytics works

Safer links, steadier channels

A round of fixes after a security check of channels, email and the admin tools.

Email. A link you change after sending must now lead to a page on the same website, also after any redirect. Links to sites where anyone can put up a page, like Google Docs or Dropbox, cannot be changed. An email Postfjord reviewed keeps its links. The website in the footer is checked before each send, and must start with https://. A first email that grew past 1,000 people after you scheduled it waits for a review too. Sender names with letters like å, ä, ö or é now go out as written. Opens and clicks in the report over time show a number from 5 up. An own sending domain that is not set up within 30 days is removed, so nobody can hold on to it. A signup form now does nothing for someone who is already confirmed: no welcome email and no new tags, because anyone can type an address into a form.

Channels. A connection that renews at the same moment in two places no longer asks for a Reconnect by mistake. Refresh boards on Pinterest renews an old login first. A stats read without permission no longer marks a Facebook or Instagram channel for a Reconnect. Deleting a workspace also tells TikTok to drop Postfjord's access.

The email help page has the details.

Pin to Pinterest

You can connect a Pinterest account under Channels and schedule pins like any other post. A pin can be one image, one video, or a carousel of 2 to 5 images. The text becomes the pin's description, the link becomes the pin's link, and the Pin title field is there if you want a title.

Every pin goes to a board. Pick a default board on the Pinterest card under Channels, or choose another board for a single post in its Pinterest tab. Made a new board on Pinterest? Press Refresh boards and it shows up.

If the account has no boards yet, press New board under the account and give it a name. Postfjord makes a public board on Pinterest, and it becomes the default board. The help page has the steps.

Landing pages and a link in bio page

You can now make a link in bio page and landing pages on your own address, like postfjord.page/sunrise-yoga. Go to Email, Landing pages, pick your address and start from one of ten templates: a link in bio page, a class, a free guide, a launch, a coach, an intro offer, a café menu, a newsletter or a waitlist.

Words in [brackets] mark what only you know, like names and prices. The page cannot go live until you have replaced them. A Signup form block collects email addresses with an email to confirm, and every link is checked for safety before the page goes live.

Each live page has a QR code to print, and Numbers shows views and taps per link, counted without cookies.

Landing pages are part of email, which is open to a few workspaces during early access. Read more in Landing pages and link in bio.

Safer landing pages, and old addresses that keep working

When you change your address on postfjord.page, the old one now keeps sending visitors to the new one for as long as your workspace exists. A QR code you already printed keeps working. Postfjord keeps your five newest old addresses.

Every night Postfjord asks Google about the links on your live pages again. If Google now lists one as unsafe, the page goes offline and you get an email that names the link. The same email comes if Postfjord takes a page down for another reason: it says why and how to ask us to look again, and the editor shows it too.

On the Free plan, a page goes live once your workspace has a social account connected under Channels. Read more in Landing pages and link in bio.

Ten designed email starters

A new email now starts from one of ten designed starters: a newsletter, an announcement, a launch, a sale, an event invitation, a weekly schedule or menu, a welcome email, a "we miss you" email, a customer story and a founder letter. Each one shows as a preview in your own logo, colours and business name before you pick it.

The starters come with ready text. Names, prices, dates, times, addresses and quotes are in [brackets], and the email cannot go out until you have put in your own. Buttons already link to the website you saved under Settings, Brand voice, and photo slots show a placeholder until you pick a photo.

Text blocks have new styles in the inspector: intro, small print, label and quote. Headings can be large or huge, and any text can be set in serif. The help page has the details.

Email settings sit inside Email

The menu has one Settings, for the workspace. Email's own settings, your sender and the address in the footer, now open from Email settings at the top of Campaigns and Automations, the same way Chat settings sits at the top of the inbox.

See every step when you connect an account

When you press Connect under Channels, a small window now shows the steps first: log in on the platform and allow Postfjord, add the account, done. Then press Continue.

The window stays with you the whole way. When the platform sends you back, it says Connecting your account while Postfjord works, and then how many accounts were connected. Before, there were a few quiet seconds where nothing seemed to happen.

Most cards have one account, like Instagram only, Threads or LinkedIn. Postfjord now adds that account for you, without the extra list to tick. For Instagram + Facebook you still pick the Pages and accounts that belong to the workspace.

If something goes wrong, the step says what happened and has a Try again button. If you close the platform's page before you finish, press Start again. How connecting works

Practice in the Academy before you build for real

The lesson Build the automation in the Academy now has a practice run. Pick a post, a keyword, the public reply, the opening DM and the link, with the same settings as in Postfjord. Bo says what each choice does. Then pretend comments come in, and you see which ones get a reply and a DM, and which ones are left alone. Nothing is posted or sent.

Four lessons have a short film that shows the steps: how comment to DM works, building the automation, connecting an account, and your first post. A brief Claude can write from has a brief builder that opens the composer with your brief.

Every lesson ends with a few quick questions, and a Mark this lesson done button. The course pages show how far you have come. Your progress stays in your own browser.

Four free marketing courses in the Academy

The Academy has four new courses about marketing for small businesses and creators. They are free and open to everyone, with or without an account.

  • Find your customer and your message: who you sell to, the one sentence that says why you, proof and doubts, and your voice. It ends with your brand voice filled in.
  • Plan a month in an hour: content pillars, a weekly rhythm, writing a batch in one sitting, one idea as several posts, and the month in the calendar.
  • Get more customers from Instagram: your profile, Reels and stories, captions with one next step, fast replies, and working with businesses near you.
  • Grow an email list from social: a free offer, where to ask for the email, a signup people trust, the welcome email and how often to send.

Every lesson has a short exercise and a few quick questions, and ends with a button to the right place in Postfjord.

Academy progress on your account, diplomas and a certificate

The Academy now saves your progress on your Postfjord account. Sign in on postfjord.com with a link we email you, no password, and your ticks and answers follow you to any phone or computer. Progress you saved in the browser before comes along the first time. People on the waitlist can sign in and take every course too.

Finish a course, with every question answered right, and you get a diploma with its own page. Get the diplomas for Get started with Postfjord, Turn comments into customers and Write posts people stop for, pass a ten question exam, and you are Postfjord Certified Marketer. Both have an Add to LinkedIn button.

Some lessons tick themselves off when you have done them in Postfjord, like connecting a channel. Your courses and diplomas also show under Account in the app. See Academy, diplomas and the certificate.

Posts in a suspended workspace wait as drafts

When a workspace is suspended, its scheduled posts now move to Queue → Drafts and keep their time. You can still open, edit or delete them. The photos and videos they use stay in Media until the suspension is lifted, so a post never goes back into the queue without its media.

When the suspension is lifted, each one goes back into the queue at the time it had, as long as that time is still ahead. The ones you edited and the ones whose time passed stay drafts, so nothing goes out late or all at once.

This keeps one suspended workspace from slowing down posts in every other workspace. Suspended workspaces

STOP only when it is meant, and the unread dot stays for what needs you

  • STOP counts when it is meant. A short message with STOP, stopp, unsubscribe, avsluta or sluta, five words or fewer, still stops every automated message for that person. A longer message that only happens to contain the word, like "Can I stop by the studio at 5?", no longer does. Automation
  • The unread dot stays when a person is still needed. Your default reply ("we will get back to you") and a Claude answer that hands the conversation to a person leave the dot on. An answer from a keyword automation clears it, as before. Inbox
  • API keys and MCP are part of the paid plans. They are included from Solo. On Free, a key stops working and says which plan it needs, and it works again after an upgrade. MCP

Safer publishing, and fixes from a full review

We read through all of Postfjord's code this week and fixed what we found. These changes affect you:

  • A post is never published twice. Sometimes Instagram, Facebook or Threads publishes a post but does not answer in time. Postfjord used to try again and post it a second time. Now it stops and asks you to check the account first. What to do
  • Long videos go out. An Instagram or Threads video that needs more than a couple of minutes to process now waits and publishes. Before, it started over on every try.
  • Removing a channel removes it. When you take a channel off a post through the API, Claude or Bo, the post no longer goes to that channel.
  • A week plan goes into the calendar once. If two people approved the same plan at the same moment, every post was created twice.
  • One answer per message. When someone sends two DMs a second apart, your automation now answers once.
  • Solo, Studio and Agency get their full 20 GB of media storage. Uploads stopped at 2 GB before.
  • Drafts only API keys stay drafts only. A key with that scope can no longer edit a post that is already scheduled.
  • Comment replies count toward your contacts. A private reply to a comment now counts the person as an active contact, like every other automated message, and stops when the plan's limit is reached.
  • Mailchimp gets confirmed addresses only. Someone who signed up with a form has to click the confirmation link before they are sent to your audience.
  • The workspace owner stays. Other owners can no longer remove the person who created the workspace, and an owner who leaves takes their API keys with them. Members
  • Bo stops when the AI budget runs out, also in the middle of an answer, instead of finishing the answer past it.
  • A spam complaint blocks an address for good, also when the address was held for a while by our email provider.
  • Morning routines run on time. Routines now run several at once, so the 8:00 brief no longer waits behind other workspaces.
  • Upload errors in your language. A file that is too big, the wrong type or over your storage limit now says so in the language you picked.
  • The Automated label stays on automated messages in the inbox, also when Instagram reports the message back before we have saved it.
  • Buttons that delete wait for the answer, so a second click cannot delete twice.
  • A security fix in the media library.

Privacy policy and terms cover LinkedIn, Threads and YouTube

  • The Privacy Policy now says what we store when you connect a Threads or LinkedIn profile. For LinkedIn that is your member id, name and picture, and not your email address.
  • A new YouTube section says what Postfjord will do with a YouTube channel you connect, how to remove our access in your Google Account, and that the data is deleted within 7 days after you do. YouTube itself is not in Postfjord yet.
  • The Terms of Service say that connecting a YouTube channel means you agree to YouTube's own terms.

One account, one workspace

An Instagram, Facebook, Threads or LinkedIn account is now connected in one workspace at a time. Before, the same account could sit in two workspaces, and every automation then answered twice.

When you connect an account that is already in another workspace, Postfjord marks it and asks before it moves it here. The other workspace sees it as Moved. Its automations, chat menu, conversations and contacts stay where they were.

To work on one account together, invite each other to the workspace instead. Channels

New automation always starts with the templates

  • After you saved an automation, New automation opened the same kind of automation again instead of the six templates. Only a reload brought them back. Now every press shows the templates. Read more under Automation.

Names instead of numbers in the inbox

  • A person who sends a DM now shows up with their name in the Inbox, not a long number. Before, only people who had commented got a name.
  • Postfjord asks Instagram or Facebook when the person writes and the thread has no name yet. Until Meta approves Postfjord, it answers only for people with a role on our app, so most threads keep the number for now. Postfjord asks again at most once a week, the next time the person writes.
  • A real name found this way is kept when the same person later comments on Instagram, where a comment only carries the username.

A reminder before your LinkedIn connection runs out

LinkedIn lets Postfjord post for you for 60 days at a time. After that, you have to sign in again. Now Postfjord tells you a week before:

  • A notice in the app. It shows at the top of every screen, on the dashboard under Needs attention and next to Channels in the menu. It names the day.
  • One email to the workspace's owners and editors and to the person who connected the profile, a week before the date. It comes once per connection. Turn it off under Account with Publishing problems.
  • Who has to do it: only the owner of the LinkedIn profile can renew it. The notice and the email name that person. If someone else signs in, Postfjord adds their own profile as a new channel, and the old one still runs out.
  • What to do: the owner of the profile opens Channels, presses Reconnect on the LinkedIn card and signs in to their own LinkedIn account. It takes a minute, and your posts and settings stay as they are.

If nobody reconnects in time, posts to LinkedIn stop until someone does. How LinkedIn works in Postfjord

Bo reads today right, and opens today's chat

Ask Bo what is on today and it now finds everything in the calendar for today. Before, Bo could miss posts later in the day and say nothing was scheduled. A date now means the whole day in your workspace's time zone, from midnight to midnight. The same goes for the API and for Claude through MCP. If you call GET /api/v1/posts with a date and no time, such as from=2026-09-23, that date is now the whole local day. Before, it was midnight UTC. A full date and time works as before.

Manager also remembers where you were. It opens on the chat you had with Bo today, so you can leave and come back without clicking Chats. On a new day you get a new chat, and New chat is always there when you want a fresh one.

Bold words in Bo's answers now show as bold, not with stars around them.

One chat a day

Bo has a face

Bo now has a face. You see it in the menu and next to every answer in the chat.

Pick a sun or a stone under Manager, How Bo works. The sun is the one from our logo and is the default. Everyone in the workspace sees the face you pick.

The face shows how things stand:

  • It looks up while it reads your workspace.
  • It raises its eyebrows while a card waits for your yes.
  • It nods when a card you approved has gone through.
  • It shakes its head when one failed.

If you have asked your phone or computer for less motion, the face stays still.

How Bo works

Your name on your signup form

Your signup form page now shows whose list people join.

At the top of the page are your sender name, your logo and a link to your website. At the bottom are your company name and postal address. The page after someone signs up shows your name and logo too.

A person who clicks your signup link lands on a page that clearly belongs to you. They can see where their address goes before they type it.

The logo and website come from Settings, Brand kit. If you have not added them yet, the page shows your name on its own.

Videos show a preview in the library

Videos in the media library and the composer now show their first frame instead of a film icon, so you can tell your Reels apart before you pick one. A small film mark in the corner shows that it is a video.

The version on your phone, and Dictate that says why

On a phone, the bottom of every screen now shows which version of Postfjord you have. When a newer one is ready, an Update button shows up there too, the same one the sidebar has on a computer.

Dictate no longer disappears in a browser that cannot record sound, like the one built into Instagram or Facebook. The button stays, and pressing it tells you to open Postfjord in Safari or Chrome.

A button that asks you to confirm no longer spins while the question is still open. It starts once you have answered.

A dot for unread messages

A small dot next to Inbox in the menu now tells you a message is waiting, on any screen. On a phone it sits on the Inbox icon at the bottom. It goes away when someone on the team opens or answers the conversation, or closes it.

Publish now waits for Reels

Instagram needs a minute or two to process a video before a Reel goes live. Publish now used to give up waiting after about a minute and leave you in the composer, even though the Reel was still on its way. It now waits as long as Instagram needs and takes you to your posts when it is done.

The composer also follows the post while it is open. Once a post starts publishing, the buttons go away and the status at the top changes, so you cannot publish the same post twice by accident.

Media now sits right under the channels in the composer, since Instagram needs an image or a video before anything else.

While a post publishes, the composer shows each channel step by step: sending to Instagram, Instagram processing the video, and published. You can leave the page at any time; publishing carries on.

The week as a list on your phone

On a phone, the calendar's week now reads from top to bottom, one day under the other, so you scroll down instead of sideways to see the whole week. Today is highlighted, and + next to a day starts a post on it.

The bar at the bottom of the phone now starts with Dashboard, Calendar, your manager and Automation. Pick your own under Menu, Choose favourites.

Channels no longer runs past the edge of a phone when a card has two accounts.

A menu and your own favourites on the phone

On a phone, the bar at the bottom now holds four favourites of your own and a Menu button. Menu opens everything the sidebar has on a computer, so Channels, Settings and Account are one tap away.

Open Menu and press Choose favourites to pick the four you use most. The choice follows you to every phone you sign in on.

Pages no longer slide sideways on a phone. The suggestions on the dashboard wrap their text, and the buttons above the calendar and the charts in analytics fit the screen.

Questions in Postfjord's own style

When Postfjord asks before it does something, like publishing now, deleting a post or disconnecting a channel, the question now shows up in Postfjord's own box instead of the browser's grey pop-up.

Publish now lists the channels the post goes to, so you can check before it goes out. Anything that deletes or removes has a red button. Press Esc or click outside the box to cancel.

One home for everything

The menu now groups everything by what it belongs to, so you know where to look.

At the top are the things that cover all of Postfjord: Dashboard, Calendar and your manager, under the name you gave it.

Below them are the three parts, each with its plain name first:

  • Social holds Posts, which used to be called Queue, and Analytics.
  • Chat holds Inbox, Automation and its own Settings: saved replies, tags, contact fields and the pause after you reply. They used to sit under Settings, Inbox.
  • Email holds Campaigns and its own Settings: your sender and your signup forms. They used to sit under Settings, Email. Landing pages are coming soon.

Under Workspace you find what every part uses: contacts, media, channels and the settings for the whole workspace.

The button at the top follows the part you are in. In Chat it starts a new automation, in Email a new email, and everywhere else a new post.

Old links still work. A bookmark to Settings, Inbox or Settings, Email opens the new page.

New prices, and a plan for agencies

Postfjord has new prices, and a fourth plan.

  • Solo is $39 a month, or $29 a month billed yearly.
  • Studio is $99 a month, or $75 a month billed yearly.
  • Agency is new: $249 a month, or $189 a month billed yearly. It has 15 workspaces, 10 connected accounts and 15 people per workspace, for agencies and groups that run many brands.
  • Free stays free.

Every paid plan has 20 GB of media storage per workspace. A bigger plan gives you more workspaces, each the same size.

Each plan does the work of three tools: a scheduler, a DM tool and an email tool, with Bo on top. The plans still differ only in how much you can use. Every feature is in every plan.

Nobody paid the old prices, so no bill changes. See every limit on the pricing page.

Connect Claude without installing anything

Postfjord now runs its MCP server for you at app.postfjord.com/api/mcp. To let Claude work in a workspace, create an API key under Settings, API keys and copy the one line shown there into Claude Code. It already has your key in it.

Cursor, VS Code and other MCP apps connect with a few lines in their settings file, and Claude Desktop through a small bridge. The MCP help page has each one ready to copy.

Before this, the server had to run on your own computer from a copy of Postfjord's code, so the command on the API keys page only worked for us.

The calendar keeps up with new drafts

Drafts made somewhere else, by Claude, by a teammate or in another window, now show up in the calendar's Unscheduled drafts within seconds. Before, a calendar that stayed open could keep showing an old list until you reloaded the page.

On a short window, the sidebar now scrolls as one list. Media, Channels and Settings could end up hidden below the edge of the menu before.

Post to your LinkedIn profile

Connect your LinkedIn profile under Channels and schedule posts to it like to any other channel: text, one image, up to 20 images, or a video.

LinkedIn asks you to sign in again every 60 days. Postfjord shows the date under the account and marks it orange in the last week, so posts never stop without warning.

Company pages need a separate approval from LinkedIn. They come once LinkedIn grants it.

Instagram without a Facebook Page, and Threads

Two new ways to connect under Channels.

Instagram only. Many Instagram accounts have no Facebook Page. Press Connect on the Instagram only card, sign in with Instagram, and Postfjord gets that one account. You can post and schedule here. DMs in the inbox, DM automations and analytics work the same as through Facebook. Comments, and automations that start from a comment, still wait for Meta to approve them for this card. The account needs to be a Business or Creator account.

Threads. Press Connect on the Threads card and sign in with Threads. You can publish and schedule text, one photo or video, or a carousel of 2 to 20. The composer counts to the 500 characters Threads allows.

Meta approved both on October 17, 2026, so they are open to every account.

Dates in your language

Weekdays and months now follow the language you picked for Postfjord, in all six languages. The calendar says måndag in Swedish, Montag in German and lundi in French, and so do the dates on your posts, analytics, billing and API keys.

Dates spell out the month, like Sep 22, 2026, so 9/10 can never be read as the wrong day.

Clearer names for connecting apps

Two Settings tabs have new names that say which way the connection goes:

  • Your AI and apps (was Integrations): Postfjord uses your own AI key, or syncs contacts with Mailchimp.
  • Connect Claude and other apps (was API keys): Claude, Cursor, Muse or Zapier work in your workspace with a key you create.

Each tab points to the other in one line at the top. When you create a key, the page shows one thing to copy for Claude Code, with the key already in it. The key on its own, for apps like Muse and Zapier, is folded away underneath.

Everything about Bo on Bo's page

How Bo works and What Bo remembers have moved from Settings to Bo's own page, as tabs next to the conversation. Everything about your manager is now in one place.

Old links and bookmarks to the Settings tabs take you to the new place.

Postfjord Academy, three free courses

Postfjord now has an Academy at postfjord.com/academy, with three short, free courses: Get started with Postfjord, Turn comments into customers and Write posts people stop for.

Each lesson takes a few minutes. It ends with a button that opens the right place in Postfjord with the work started: the comment to DM template, the composer with a brief filled in, or your brand voice. If you are not signed in, Postfjord takes you there after you sign in.

You find the Academy in the menu, next to Help.

Update when you are ready

When a new version of Postfjord is ready, you now see a note at the bottom of the menu on the left, under the version number, with an Update button. Press it when you are done, and the page opens again in the new version.

Before today the page could reload on its own the moment a new version came out. A post you were halfway through writing could vanish. Now nothing happens until you say so.

You do not have to press the button. Reload the page and you get the new version at once. The next time you go to another screen, it opens there too. On a phone the left menu is hidden, so this is how the new version reaches you there.

Do this once: if the note never shows up, close every Postfjord tab and the installed app, then open Postfjord again.

The real logos

Postfjord now shows the real logo of each service it connects to, where it used to show two letters on a coloured square.

In the inbox, a message from Facebook has the blue Facebook circle beside it and a message from Instagram has the Instagram camera. The same goes for the calendar, the queue, the composer and the automation screens. On Channels, each card starts with the logo of what it connects. Under Settings, Integrations, Claude, Gemini, DeepSeek, Mistral and Mailchimp each have their own mark.

LinkedIn and ChatGPT keep their letters for now, because the set of logos we use does not include them.

Each logo appears in its owner's own colours, only to show which service something belongs to.

The fjord rolls while you wait

When Postfjord is fetching something, you now see it working. A small wave rolls next to the word Loading, the water from the Postfjord logo. When the whole app is starting, the full logo appears with its water moving.

Before, 21 places showed the word Loading and nothing else, so a screen about to finish looked the same as one that was stuck.

The wave follows your light or dark theme. If you have asked your computer or phone for less motion, it stays still.

It never rolls for ever. If nothing comes back after a few seconds, the screen tells you what happened.

Signing up takes two presses

Signing up through your form is shorter now. A person presses the button on your website, and then Confirm my email in the email they get. That is all.

Before, they had to press the button again on Postfjord's page after your form, and again after the link in the email. Those pages now do it by themselves. While the form page checks that a person, not a program, is signing up, it shows Signing you up with their address, and a link to use another address if they typed it wrong.

The checks against fake signups are the same as before. Read more in Signup forms.

Signup forms for your emails

People can now sign up for your emails themselves. Under Settings, Email, press New form, and you get a form page with its own link, plus a few lines of code to put the form on your website.

Everyone who signs up gets an email with a button to confirm. Once they press it, they become a confirmed contact, with the tags you picked for the form.

Already have a form, for example in Webflow? Point it at the link, and new signups come straight into Postfjord instead of piling up somewhere you have to copy them from.

Each form keeps fake signups out: the browser does a short calculation before the button works, one device can only sign up a few times an hour, and a form that suddenly gets hundreds of signups in an hour is switched off until you look at it.

Signup forms are part of email, which is open to a few workspaces during early access. Read more in Signup forms.

Monthly or yearly prices

The pricing page now has a switch above the plans: Monthly or Yearly. The big number on each plan is the price you pay with the choice you picked.

Monthly is shown first. Pick Yearly to see the monthly price when you pay for a year at once, what the year costs in total, and how much you save.

A line under the plans says that prices are in US dollars and that tax is added at checkout where it applies, so the total at checkout is no surprise.

Find the people who only gave you their email

In Contacts, the channel filter now has Email only. It shows the people who signed up through a form or came in with an import, and have never written to you on Instagram or Facebook.

Signup forms also tell you when a sender is missing. Under Settings, Email, the forms card now says so, because a form takes no signups until a sender is saved at the top of the page.

The automation tells you why it stayed quiet

A comment automation answers each person once per post. If someone comments your keyword twice on the same post, the second comment gets no DM, so nobody receives the same message twice.

Until today that happened without a word, and testing your own automation looked like a broken one. Now the thread says: "Automation skipped: this person already got a reply on that post."

If Instagram or Facebook refuses the first DM of a comment automation, the automation card now shows how many in red, next to entries and completions.

Two small fixes: a step whose link was removed is skipped with a reason instead of sending an empty message, and a button label ending in an emoji is no longer cut in half.

To test your automation again from your own account, open the thread in the inbox and delete the contact. The automation then answers you the next time you comment.

Throw a week plan away

A week plan you do not want can now be thrown away. Next to Apply there is a Discard plan button. Confirm once, and nothing is scheduled, no posts are created and no drafts are left behind.

Until today Apply was the only way out, and it stayed grey until you approved at least one post. A plan you did not want kept waiting for you on every visit.

Afterwards the screen tells you what happened, in a sentence: "You threw this plan away. Nothing was scheduled and no posts were created." An applied plan gets a sentence too.

You can discard a plan in a paused workspace as well.

A screen that waits now says so, and gives up

Sometimes a screen in Postfjord came up blank. No posts, no message, nothing to click, until you reloaded the page.

That no longer happens. If a screen has not heard back within four seconds, it stops waiting and shows what it has: your content, an empty state, or a message saying what went wrong. You can keep working without a reload.

This covers every screen: the calendar, the queue, the inbox, contacts, media, automations, settings, the manager and the workspace switcher. When everything answers in time, which is almost always, nothing looks different.

Ideas is now Manager

The Ideas tab has become Manager: a conversation with your workspace's own manager. It is called Bo.

Ask for something and Bo goes and looks. It reads your connected channels, your brand profile, the calendar, the media library, the idea notepad, the latest analytics and the queue, then writes what you asked for: a draft post, a change to a draft you already have, an idea on the notepad, an email draft in postmail, or a proposed week on the plan screen.

Bo writes drafts and nothing else. It never publishes, never schedules, never sends an email and never replies to anyone in your inbox. Those wait for you to press the button, and there is no setting that changes that.

The idea notepad has not gone anywhere. On a computer it sits beside the conversation; on a phone it is the second tab. Old links to Ideas open the Manager, and so does the Ideas widget on the dashboard.

A viewer can open a conversation and ask questions. Writing a draft needs the editor role. Every answer records what it cost, on the same monthly AI budget as the composer.

Bo works while you sleep, and still asks before anything goes out

A routine is something you want Bo to do again and again: every morning, every weekday, every Monday, or once a month. Write it once the way you would say it in the chat, pick a time, and it happens on its own. Each run opens a new chat at the top of the list, so the answer is waiting when you sit down, and you can have it emailed to you as well.

A routine never sends. It reads the workspace and writes drafts, and anything that would go out is a card with an Approve button, waiting for you in the morning. A routine at seven has no more power than you do at eleven. That is the whole trade: the work happens overnight and somebody presses the button over coffee. Run it now shows you what tomorrow morning will look like before you leave it running.

Bo also reads two more things. It can look over your inbox: how many people are waiting for an answer, how many of those you can still reply to, and, when three or more people have asked about the same thing in the same words, it says so. That last one is a card on the dashboard too: press it and Bo drafts the post that answers all of them at once. It can also read your email drafts in postmail, so it does not write the same email twice.

And Bo now runs on your own AI key. Connect Claude, ChatGPT, Gemini, DeepSeek or Mistral under Settings, Integrations and the whole conversation runs on it, with the same tools and the same rules, billed by that provider instead of your Postfjord AI budget.

Bo opens with something to do, and you can read what it remembers

Manager no longer opens empty. You get a few cards from your own workspace: a channel that needs a Reconnect, posts waiting in the queue, a week with nothing planned, your best post from last month ready to become an email. Tap one and Bo gets the question. The same cards are on the dashboard under What I would do next. They cost nothing from your AI budget.

Every card with text now has a Change it button. Say what you want different, "shorter" or "add a question at the end", and Bo changes it. A card that waits for your yes still waits afterwards.

Two new pages under Settings:

  • How Bo works: its name and a few lines it always keeps in mind, like "Never percentage discounts" or "We are closed in July". They apply to every draft, email and reply the AI writes for you.
  • What Bo remembers: everything Bo has learned about your business, in a list you can read, edit and empty.

Bo never writes down anything about a person who messages you.

Bo can ask, and you decide

Bo can now prepare the things that go out, and you decide if they do.

Ask Bo to schedule a draft for Tuesday at eight, publish a post, take one off the calendar, switch on a DM automation, put a week plan in the calendar or reply in the inbox. You get a card with the exact words, time and channels, and one button. Nothing goes out until you press it.

Only editors and owners can approve. Pressing twice does it once. A card that gets stuck comes back to you after ten minutes.

A reply card never shows the person's name. When you delete a contact, what Bo's chats said about them is removed too.

Under every answer, a folded line shows what Bo did, step by step, and why anything was refused.

Every draft follows the house writing standard

Postfjord now writes to one standard before it writes in your voice: no long dashes, none of the words and phrasings that give a machine away, a number or a name instead of an adjective, sentences of different lengths, at most two emoji. It applies to posts, rewrites, hashtags, the weekly plan, DM replies, emails and the help assistant.

Two things changed under the hood. The rules go into every prompt ahead of your brand profile, and each finished text is read once more: a line that slipped through is rewritten before it reaches you. Your own brand rules sit on top and still win on tone, themes and what to mention.

Agents get the same standard. GET /v1/brand returns it with your brand profile, so a post written by Claude or Meta Muse through the API reads like one Postfjord wrote.

Pick light or dark yourself

Postfjord has followed your phone or browser into dark mode for a while. Now you can pin it: Auto, Light or Dark, under Appearance on the account page and at the foot of the sidebar. On a phone the switch sits at the top of the screen and one tap flips it.

The choice is saved in the browser you are using and applies before the page draws, so a dark app no longer flashes white on the way in. The colour of the status bar around the app follows it.

Your posts get a language, and Bo answers in yours

Postfjord used to guess that your content was in Swedish when nobody had said otherwise. A café in Austin could get Swedish captions. It no longer guesses.

Pick a language in your brand voice. Until you do, it says Not set yet, and each draft comes out in the language you wrote the brief in. Postfjord tells you which one it used.

Fill from website now also picks the language your site is written in, unless you already chose one.

Bo tells you once. The first time you use Bo in a workspace without a language, it says which language it writes your posts in. Say "write in German" and it changes it for you.

Bo also answers in the language you write to it in. You can chat in Swedish while it writes your posts in English.

Bo can look things up

Bo can now read web pages and search the web.

Paste a link and Bo reads the page. "Write a post about this article." "Look at our schedule page and tell me what is missing." Pages behind a login or a paywall stay out of reach.

Ask and Bo searches when the answer is not in your workspace. Your channels, brand voice and calendar come first.

A search costs about a penny from your monthly AI budget and shows up under AI spend on the account page. One answer uses at most about five searches.

If a page tells Bo to publish something or to ignore its instructions, Bo does not. It quotes the text to you and says where it came from. The line under each answer shows what Bo read or searched for.

Prices in US dollars

  • Plans are now priced in US dollars: Solo $25 a month or $19 a month billed yearly, Studio $59 or $49. Free stays free. Every plan still includes every feature. Plans and billing.
  • Nothing changes for anyone already on a paid plan: an existing subscription keeps its price and currency until it is cancelled.

Meta Muse, and a scope on every API key

  • Meta Muse can now work in your workspace: it builds its own connector from our new public API document. The steps are on postfjord.com/muse. Claude, Zapier and your own code can use the same document at postfjord.com/openapi.json.
  • Every API key now has a scope you pick when you create it: Read only, Drafts only, or Schedule and publish. A key made for drafts can never give a post a date, so an agent with that key cannot send anything. Keys made before today keep full access. Help: MCP server and API.

Tell Claude what to change in an email

  • The email editor has a line under the email where you say what should change, like "bigger heading" or "use the latte photo". Claude changes only that, marks the changed blocks and lets you undo in one step. The microphone lets you say it instead of typing. How it works.
  • Read my website now opens your site the way a visitor sees it and measures the colours by how much of the page they cover, instead of reading the code. You get six colours (background, cards, text, muted text, accent and text on accent), more brand colours, the button shape and both fonts.
  • New emails start in that palette: your background, card colour, text colours and button shape.

The menu follows the three parts

  • The sidebar is grouped the way Postfjord is built. What every part uses sits on top: dashboard, calendar, ideas and analytics. Then one group per part: postsocial (queue), postchat (inbox, automation) and postmail. Contacts, media, channels and settings belong to the whole workspace and sit at the bottom.
  • Help follows the same split: calendar, ideas, analytics and contacts moved to Across Postfjord, and their old addresses still work.
  • Each part has its own colour, the same one it has on postfjord.com and in the help center, and the page you are on is marked in that colour.
  • postmail shows as In testing until it opens for your workspace.

A starting point for your kind of business

  • When you create a workspace, pick what kind of business it is: hair salon or beauty, gym or fitness studio, restaurant or café, or coach or creator. You get a brand voice to start from, five saved replies for the inbox and a first comment-to-DM automation, for example BOOK for a salon and TRIAL for a gym. How it works.
  • The design editor's layouts and the email starters use sample texts for your kind of business, like "Open time today" for a salon or "Today's lunch" for a restaurant, and the automation templates show your keyword.
  • The kind of business can be picked in German, French, Spanish and Portuguese too.
  • New pages for salons and beauty and gyms and studios.

Import your audience from Mailchimp

Moving from Mailchimp no longer needs a file. Under Settings, Integrations, the owner picks a Mailchimp audience, sees what would come over, and imports it: contacts with their fields and tags, consent with the proof Mailchimp kept (when and from which IP address each person signed up and confirmed), unsubscribes that stay unsubscribed, and bounced addresses blocked. People who are already contacts keep their own values, and running it again adds nobody twice.

A help center in three sections

  • The help center is now organised like the product: one section each for postsocial, postchat and postmail, plus your account and setup.
  • Search the help from the top of the page. It looks through every page title, summary and heading as you type.
  • Old links to help pages still work and take you to the page's new address.
  • The product pictures on postfjord.com now show the app in its light theme, the way you see it when you sign in.
  • The plan comparison on the pricing page is grouped by part, so you can see what postsocial, postchat and postmail get on each plan.

Fix or delete a failed post

  • A failed post now shows what went wrong on each channel, with Retry, Back to draft and Delete. Back to draft makes it editable again, so you can change the media or pick a new time. How it works.
  • The Failed tab in the queue has a bin to delete a post straight away.
  • Dictate works on Ideas too: say the idea and it lands in the box as text.

Email addresses are checked before they are saved

  • An address given in a DM or typed in the contact panel is checked first. A typo in a common domain, like gmial.com or hotmial.se, gets a suggestion instead of being saved. An address that cannot receive email, because its domain takes no mail or it has letters like å before the @, is refused. In an automation the person is simply asked again. How it works.
  • Two addresses typed into one field are no longer saved as one.
  • Bounces and spam reports from our email provider are sorted more carefully, so a temporary problem at a receiving server never blocks a real address.
  • The Mailchimp CSV on the Contacts screen leaves out people who unsubscribed from your emails.

Say what the post is about

  • Press Dictate in the composer, or under the brief in the email editor's Claude panel, and talk for up to three minutes. What you said becomes the brief, without the "um" and "like", and Generate draft turns it into a post in your brand voice. How it works.

Your look, read from your website

  • Settings, Brand has a new Read my website button. Postfjord reads your site and suggests your logo, colours and heading font, shows them on a small email, and saves them when you press Looks right. Your posts, designs and emails then share the same look. How it works.
  • The brand kit's font list now includes the free fonts from the design editor's library.
  • Thumbnails of images with a transparent background, like logos, now show them on white instead of black.

Brand kit gets its own tab, and the website scan sees more

Your look now has its own tab in Settings, Brand kit, next to Brand voice: the website scan, colours, fonts and logo. Brand voice keeps how you write. Under More brand colours you can now add your own colours too, and every brand colour shows up as a quick pick in the email and image editors.

The website scan now opens your page on our servers as it was meant to, instead of reading its code. It also finds small brand colours a site repeats, like coloured dots before headings, and gives a white logo a colour behind it so it shows at the top of your emails.

Opt-outs and spam complaints that always hold

  • A person who wrote STOP stays opted out even after you delete their contact. If they write or comment again, no automation messages them.
  • A spam complaint about one of your emails now puts the address on the shared list that no workspace emails again, as the privacy policy says.
  • Delete contact also erases email addresses the contact had before you changed it, in Postfjord and in Mailchimp.
  • Automation steps that failed are deleted after 30 days, like the ones that were sent or skipped.
  • Deleting a workspace pauses everything in it first, so nothing is published, sent or reachable through the API while the deletion runs. Read more under Contacts.

Channel warnings, unsent messages and signed-out browsers

  • When a channel's problem gets worse, for example DMs not arriving turns into lost access, you get a new email right away instead of nothing.
  • When someone unsends a message, its text is also removed from a notification email that has not gone out yet.
  • If your session ended while the app was closed, or another account signs in on the same browser, the data the app kept offline is cleared before anything is shown.
  • The privacy policy now describes the waitlist on postfjord.com and how a new password passes through our servers during a reset.

See which content themes work

  • Analytics sorts every post into a theme: educational, offer, event or class, behind the scenes, community or inspiration, and notes whether it has a clear next step.
  • A new chart shows engagement per theme, and the summary says what stands out, like educational posts getting twice the engagement of offers.
  • Posts made outside Postfjord count too. Themes fill in during the nightly update, 25 new posts per channel a night. Read more under Analytics.

Check a post before it goes out

  • The composer has a new Check post button under the text, on the base text and on every channel tab.
  • It gives four short notes: does the text sound like your brand, does the first line make people read on, is there a clear next step, and does the post promise a health or money result that could read as misleading.
  • Advice only: nothing is blocked. @handles, email addresses and phone numbers are removed before the check. Read more under Composer.

What a suspended workspace can and cannot do

  • When Postfjord suspends a workspace, nothing leaves it: no publishing, no replies or automations in the inbox, no email to contacts, no Mailchimp sync, no API or MCP access and no new account connections.
  • Everyone in the workspace sees a notice at the top of the app, and can still sign in, read everything, edit drafts, export contacts and delete.
  • Messages and comments that arrive meanwhile are still stored, and an opt-out or unsubscribe is still honoured.
  • When the suspension is lifted, scheduled posts whose time passed become drafts, so nothing is published late or all at once. Read more under Workspaces and members.

Terms at checkout, right of withdrawal and renewal reminders

  • Terms at checkout. You now tick that you agree to the Terms of Service before you pay. Next to the pay button Stripe shows your right of withdrawal and, for a yearly plan, the price per month.
  • Order confirmation by email. Right after a purchase you get the plan, the price per billing period and per month, the seller and your right of withdrawal with the model withdrawal form.
  • Withdraw from contract here. If you buy as a consumer, you can withdraw from a new plan on the Account page during the 14 day withdrawal period. The plan ends at once and a receipt with the time we received it arrives by email.
  • Start during the withdrawal period. A box on the Account page lets a consumer ask for the plan to start during the withdrawal period. A withdrawal then refunds the price minus the part used; without it, everything is refunded.
  • Renewal reminder. Yearly plans get an email about 45 days before they renew, with the date, the price and the last day to cancel.

Plan switches only happen when they are paid

  • See the price first. Switch to Studio or Solo on the Account page now shows what you pay for the rest of the period, including VAT, before anything changes.
  • No payment, no switch. The plan only changes when the payment goes through. If your bank wants you to approve it, Stripe's payment page opens; if you leave, you keep your plan and nothing is charged or retried.
  • Switching down is free now. A cheaper plan or monthly billing credits the rest of the period to your next invoices and switches at once.

New privacy policy, terms and data processing agreement

  • The privacy policy now covers the inbox, automations, AI replies and email: what we store, every provider we use and where, how long data is kept and your rights under the GDPR.
  • New data processing agreement at postfjord.com/dpa. For data about your contacts, your workspace is the controller and Postfjord is its processor.
  • The terms now cover messaging and automation, rules for email, plans and payment, and the 14 day right of withdrawal for consumers. For accounts created before today they apply from 30 September 2026.
  • The database is now backed up every day, and each backup is kept for 7 days.

A block editor for email campaigns

  • Build an email from blocks (heading, text, image, button, post card, divider, spacer, two columns), reorder by drag or the toolbar, and edit text inline with bold, italic, links, lists and a merge tag for the recipient's name.
  • Start from six built-in layouts, a previous campaign, or a saved template, and save any campaign back as a template.
  • Preview the email at desktop and phone width with a real contact's name filled in, images on or off, a plain-text view and an approximate dark mode toggle.
  • A checks panel runs constantly for an empty subject, an unsafe or dead link, vague link text, a merge tag with no fallback, a missing or oversized image, poor contrast, hidden text and the email's total size, and points at the block to fix.
  • Draft an email with Claude from a short brief, optionally using your own recent posts, rewrite one block, or get five subject line ideas, all reviewed before anything is applied.
  • Works on phone with a bottom action bar and sheets in place of the desktop rail and inspector.

Delete a contact, and deleting data leaves nothing behind

  • New: Delete contact in the contact card. When a person asks you to erase their data, it deletes their conversation, comments, scheduled automation steps and email details, and removes them from your Mailchimp audience when it is connected.
  • Deleting a workspace now also deletes its API keys, short links, saved Mailchimp and AI keys and any notification emails still waiting to go out.
  • Deleting your account now also deletes your early access request, email confirmation and password reset records, the emails we sent you, a waitlist signup and invitations to your address.
  • When someone unsends an Instagram message, its text and attachments are deleted from the inbox too. The thread shows Message unsent in its place.
  • Signing out now deletes the copy of workspace data the app keeps in your browser, in every open tab.
  • Photos no longer keep their GPS location or camera data when you upload them (JPEG, PNG and WebP, and HEIC in Safari).
  • Notification emails from Postfjord (invitations, confirmations, password resets, new messages) are deleted from our sending queue after a week.

Deleting your account ends your subscription

  • Delete my account now cancels your subscription in Stripe at the same moment, so nothing is charged once the account is gone. If Stripe cannot be reached, nothing is deleted and you can try again.
  • With a subscription, the Account page says so before you delete: the time left in the period is not refunded. To use it, cancel the subscription first and delete the account when the period has ended.
  • Invoices stay in Stripe for seven years, as Swedish bookkeeping law requires.

Warnings when a channel stops delivering

  • When Meta refuses to send an account's DMs and comments to Postfjord, the account now says so under Channels, and the fix is one button: Reconnect. Before, publishing kept working and the inbox simply stayed quiet.
  • A notice at the top of the app and a number next to Channels in the menu show when any channel needs a Reconnect, and the dashboard lists it under Needs attention.
  • Owners and editors get one email when a channel needs a Reconnect, sent once per problem. Turn it off under Account with Publishing problems.
  • Accounts connected earlier are checked once during the night, so an old problem shows up too.

Your account without a workspace

  • Account now opens from the start screen when you have no workspace, for example after deleting your last one or while you wait for early access. From there you can delete your account or manage a running subscription, which was not possible before without a workspace.
  • Deleting a workspace while you have others no longer leaves the app stuck on Loading. It opens one of the workspaces you still have.

Switch plans from the account page

  • With a subscription, every plan stays on the account page: Switch to Studio or Switch to Solo opens Stripe's confirmation of that change with the price difference, and Cancel subscription goes straight to cancelling.
  • Monthly and yearly show your current billing period first.

Segments, contact activity and the Mailchimp integration

  • Segments: save any contact filter under a name, reuse it in Contacts, export it, sync it to Mailchimp or check it in an automation with the new In segment condition.
  • Source shows whether a contact came from a comment, a story, a link or QR code, or a DM.
  • Activity marks contacts as hot, warm or cold from how recently and how often they wrote and whether they clicked.
  • The Birthday filter finds birthdays this month or next month.
  • Tag people who click: a link in an automation can tag everyone who opens it.
  • Contacts with the same email on Instagram and Facebook are marked, and the Mailchimp export joins them.
  • Mailchimp integration under Settings, Integrations: contacts with an email sync to an audience with name, birthday and tags, automatically, with double opt-in unless you have consent.

Your own AI key: Claude, ChatGPT, Gemini, DeepSeek or Mistral

  • Your own AI: connect an API key from Anthropic, OpenAI, Google Gemini, DeepSeek or Mistral under Settings, Integrations, choose the models and use it for the whole workspace.
  • The composer, brand profile, week plans and AI replies in automations then run on your key and do not count toward the plan's AI budget.
  • A key that stops working shows its error on the card; Postfjord never falls back to its own key without you choosing it.
  • Integrations are now grouped into AI and Email and CRM.

Invitations by email and fresher template cards

  • Inviting someone to a workspace now emails them a link to join, with your name and the workspace. You can still copy the link.
  • Pending invitations have Resend, which sends a new link, and Revoke.
  • The invite form fits on one row, with the pending invitations listed below it.
  • The automation templates are coloured cards with a short title and one line each, so the right one is quick to find.

Inbox emails and clearer "any word" automations

  • Postfjord now emails you when a new conversation is waiting and nobody has picked it up, when a conversation is assigned to you, and when an automation collects an email address. Each email opens the conversation.
  • New conversations and collected email addresses go to every owner and editor of the workspace, not only the person who created it.
  • Turn inbox emails off under Account > Emails from Postfjord > Inbox.
  • When an automation answers any word, the keyword field is hidden and a warning says that every comment or message starts it. Keywords are no longer saved with such an automation, so it can never look like it only answers "guide".

Early access

  • Postfjord is in early access: new accounts confirm their email address, tell us a little about themselves and get in as soon as their request is approved.
  • The confirmation link and the "your account is ready" email come from Postfjord.
  • People invited to a workspace skip the wait and go straight in, as before.

A dashboard you arrange yourself

  • Dashboard is the new start page: at a glance numbers, what needs attention, coming posts, inbox, automation, contacts, followers and ideas in one place.
  • Customize it: drag widgets into the order you want, make them wide or narrow and hide the ones you do not need. The layout is personal and saved per workspace.
  • Every widget links straight to the screen where you act on it.

Contacts with real names, tags and Mailchimp export

  • Add name and birthday fields sets up First name, Last name, Birthday and Phone in one click, and contacts show their real name with the Instagram name underneath.
  • Click a contact to edit its email, fields and tags without leaving Contacts.
  • Tick contacts to add or remove a tag on all of them at once, or to export only those.
  • Columns puts any contact field in the table, and search looks through fields too.
  • Mailchimp CSV exports the contacts with an email address in Mailchimp's import format, birthday included.

Chat menu and conversation starters under Automation

  • Automation now lists every connected Instagram account and Facebook Page at the bottom, with Chat menu to set conversation starters, the menu and Get Started right next to the automations they start.
  • Under Channels the same panel opens from a button that says Chat menu instead of an icon.
  • With no automations yet, the panel links straight to creating one.

Quieter threads and no repeated public replies

  • When a DM to a commenter fails after the public reply went out, a new comment from the same person retries only the DM. The public reply is never posted twice.
  • While you reply to someone by hand, the thread shows at most one "automation skipped" line per hour instead of one per message.
  • A follow-up or a message after a wait that is held back by the hourly limit no longer says "skipped". It waits and sends when the limit lifts, and the thread only explains if it is finally dropped.

Ask a question in an automation

  • New Advanced step Ask a question: the automation asks something in the DM and saves the reply to a contact field.
  • Answers can be any text, an email address, a number, a date, a birthday or yes and no with two buttons.
  • Birthdays are understood however people write them, in Swedish or English: 14 mars, 14/3, March 14th, with or without the year.
  • An answer that does not fit gets one more try, then the automation moves on. The inbox shows Waiting for an answer meanwhile.

Plan limits you can see coming, What's new and help on every screen

  • The calendar shows how many of this month's posts your plan has used.
  • Connect and Invite tell you when the workspace is full, with a link to upgrade, instead of failing after you press them.
  • Analytics goes back a full year. The Free plan shows the last three months.
  • What's new in the menu lists the latest releases, with a dot when something new has shipped.
  • Every screen has a help icon next to its title that opens the matching help page.

Help assistant in the app

  • Ask Postfjord. A round Help button in the corner of every screen opens a chat with Claude that has read all the help pages and knows which screen you are on and what state the workspace is in. Answers link straight to the right screen. Not taken from your AI budget.

Story triggers, growth links, chat settings, smart waits, conditions and guardrails

  • Story replies and mentions start automations. Two new templates: reply when someone answers your story (keywords optional, an emoji works) and thank people who mention you in a story (once per 24 hours per person). Both can wait 1 to 10 minutes before answering. The inbox shows "Replied to your story" and "Mentioned you in a story" on the message.
  • Public reply variations and likes. Up to three public replies under a comment, picked at random; like the comment on Facebook; one reply per person per post, so a second comment on the same post is left alone.
  • Growth links with QR codes. The link template gives you ig.me/m/yourhandle?ref=code or m.me/pageid?ref=code with your own code, a Copy button and a QR code to download as SVG. The person who arrives through the link starts the automation at once, and "Opened your link" shows in the thread.
  • Chat settings per account. Under Channels, each Instagram and Facebook account gets conversation starters (up to four, each starting an automation), a chat menu (start an automation or open a link), Get Started and a greeting on Messenger, saved to Meta in one click. Until Meta's app review grants the permission, the panel says so.
  • Default reply. Create one per account from the chat settings or from the wizard: sent once per person per day when nothing else matched, optionally only between certain hours, for example at night.
  • Waits with a send window. A Wait step in minutes, hours or days (up to 30 days), only between certain hours and only on certain weekdays, in the workspace time zone. A wait never reopens Meta's 24 hour window.
  • Guardrails. An hourly cap on automated messages per plan (60 on Free, 400 on Solo, 1,500 on Studio), an automatic slow-down when Meta rate-limits the account, a send log kept for 30 days, and a grey line in the thread plus a "Last automation skipped" badge saying why an automation did not send.
  • DM automation for this post, in the composer. Pick a comment automation or create one from a keyword while writing the post. The moment the post is published, Postfjord attaches it to the automation on every selected Instagram and Facebook account. The queue shows the binding as a badge, and the wizard's post step gained "Posts I bind from the composer".
  • Conditions, tags and fields. Advanced steps in the wizard: Message, Wait, Condition (tag, field, follows you, inside the 24 hour window, has email; and/or; yes and no branches), Add tag, Remove tag and Set field. Up to 20 steps per automation, shown as notes in the phone preview.

Comment-to-DM wizard, click tracking, contacts and inbox teamwork

  • Automation wizard. Two templates (send a DM with your link when someone comments, reply when people DM specific keywords), four steps, a live phone preview. Existing automations open in the wizard.
  • Pick the post. A comment automation listens on specific posts or reels (picked from thumbnails), on any post, or on the next post you publish, which Postfjord pins automatically, whether it was published from Postfjord or from the Instagram app.
  • Keywords with emoji and "any word". Keyword automations always win over a catch-all.
  • Click-tracked links. Links in automations are shortened through Postfjord; unique and total clicks per automation, and per person in the contact panel. Meta's preview fetches are not counted.
  • Add-ons. Follow gate (checked on Instagram, passes on Facebook), email capture (two tries, then the automation moves on), and a follow-up 30 minutes to 23 hours later, skipped when the person already clicked.
  • Claude answers follow-up questions. An optional step under Advanced answers on the brand profile for up to five messages, flags the thread when a human is wanted, and is metered on the AI budget.
  • Stats per automation. Entered, completed, clicks with click rate, and emails.
  • Automation pauses when a person replies. 30 minutes by default, set under Settings, Inbox, with a Resume now button in the thread.
  • Inbox teamwork. Open, Mine, Unassigned and Closed views; assign threads to members; close and reopen (a new message reopens automatically); close everything assigned to you in one click.
  • Tags, contact fields and saved replies. Defined under Settings, Inbox; tags and fields on every thread, saved replies from the bookmark button or by typing /, with {name} filled in.
  • Contact panel and badges. Email, fields, last automation and clicked links on the thread; badges for paused automation, needs a human, waiting for email and Claude answering.
  • Contacts screen. Everyone who has messaged you, with search, filters by tag, channel, status and email, and a CSV export.
  • New message sound. A per-device bell in the inbox header, off by default.
  • Notifications queued, not yet sent. Emails for unassigned conversations and assignments are queued and go out once email delivery is enabled.

Plans and billing

  • Three plans: Free, Solo and Studio. Everything is included in every plan; the plans differ in volume. See the full table on the Plans and billing help page.
  • Upgrade from Account. Pay monthly or yearly through Stripe, manage the card and invoices in the billing portal. One subscription covers every workspace you own.
  • Limits now apply. Posts per month, connected accounts, members, automations and active contacts are counted against the plan. New workspaces start on Free.

Channel errors in plain words, sign in instead

  • When a channel needs reconnecting, Postfjord now says why in plain words ("Postfjord did not get full access to this Page...") instead of quoting Facebook's technical message. The original message is still there on hover.
  • Signing up with an email that already has an account offers a Sign in with this email instead button that keeps the invitation, and the password reset link brings you back to the invitation too.

New website

  • postfjord.com rebuilt. A proper start page, one page per feature, pages for creators, small businesses and agencies, a full pricing page generated from the plan table, a blog, about and contact pages, and the same menu and footer everywhere, including the help center and the changelog.

Get started checklist and branded emails

  • Get started. A new workspace opens on the calendar with a three-step checklist: connect Instagram and Facebook, set your brand voice, write your first post. It ticks itself off and goes away when you are done.
  • Sign-in emails (verification, password reset, email change) now come from noreply [at] postfjord.com with replies going to hello [at] postfjord.com.

Brand voice from your posts

  • Fill from your posts. The brand voice can now be drafted from your published Instagram and Facebook posts alone, no website needed. Postfjord reads up to 100 recent posts per account and learns from the 20 that performed best. Fill from website still works and now uses the same 100 posts as extra input.
  • Fixed: the brand voice page failed with "trim is not a function" in new workspaces, so Fill from website and Generate draft could not be used there.

Ideas notepad

  • Ideas. A notepad per workspace for hooks, questions and half-written posts. One click turns an idea into a draft, and it is marked as used when the post is saved.
  • Plan next week now reads your open ideas, so the proposed week starts from your own material.

Comment to DM, and a sturdier inbox

  • Comment to DM. A flow can now start when someone comments a keyword on a post: an optional public reply under the comment, then a private message that opens the conversation in the inbox.
  • Opt-out is its own thing. When a person writes STOP, the inbox shows it and automation cannot be switched back on for them by mistake.
  • Multi-word keywords such as "free guide" match anywhere in a message.
  • Inbox threads always show the newest messages, and switching conversations no longer carries a half-written reply along.
  • Faster webhook: incoming messages are stored first and answered by automation right after, so Meta never waits on us.
  • Channels: a hint about choosing all Pages in the Facebook dialog, since choosing one Page disconnects the others.

Every button shows when it is working

  • Any button that talks to the server now shows a spinner the moment you click it and cannot be clicked twice: publish now, schedule, retry, connect, send, save, invite, revoke and delete.
  • The Facebook connect card explains why to opt in to all Pages in Facebook's dialog.

Account page, help and changelog

  • Account page. Your name, password, language, email preferences, plan and AI budget in one place, separate from each workspace's settings. Change your password without leaving the app.
  • Help pages at postfjord.com/help, one per feature, and this changelog.
  • Every external link opens in a new tab, and the app is prepared for the coming iOS and Android apps.

Inbox and keyword automation

  • Inbox. Instagram and Messenger direct messages in Postfjord, with replies as your account, unread counts and the 24 hour reply window shown on every thread.
  • Automation. Reply automatically when someone sends a keyword in a DM: a message, a button and a follow-up. STOP words end automation for that person.
  • Both wait for Meta's messaging permissions on the Postfjord app before they go live.

Design editor, insights and a smoother connect

  • Design editor: blank canvas or layouts, pages for carousels, undo and redo, text boxes, shapes, pills and your logo, brand colours, uploaded fonts and the Google Fonts library, photo adjustments and seven filter presets, and saved templates per workspace.
  • Analytics: Instagram and Facebook insights with charts, engagement by weekday, hour and type, best slots and top posts.
  • Connect runs in the same window instead of a popup, which the installed app on phones handles much better.
  • First comments on Instagram posts.
  • The app checks for a new version on load, on focus and every 30 minutes.

First release

The first version, used daily by our first two customers.

  • Workspaces with owner, editor and viewer roles, and invitations by link.
  • Instagram and Facebook publishing: single images, carousels, video, first comments. Scheduler with retries.
  • Calendar with week and month views and drag to reschedule. Queue with status per channel.
  • Composer with per-channel variants and previews, drafts that save themselves.
  • Media library with automatic crops per format.
  • Claude built in: drafts from a brief, rewrite per channel, hashtags, and a brand voice learned from your website and your real posts.
  • Plan next week: a proposed week of posts, reviewed item by item.
  • MCP server and REST API with per-workspace API keys, so Claude Desktop and Claude Code can work in your workspace.
  • Nightly analytics snapshots.
  • Privacy policy, terms, GDPR deletion per workspace and per account.

Cookies and similar tools keep some information about how you use this site. Some are needed for it to work. The others are your choice.

Read our privacy policy

Necessary

Always on

These keep your cookie and language choices in your browser, so the site remembers them.

Who provides them
  • Postfjord

These show us which pages help people and how they find us. Nothing is used for advertising.

Who provides them
  • Google Analytics